Foreword - Amazon S3 · a system to record data in a crash or a near car crash event. This is called an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR

i2006 L/C100 from Dec.’04 Prod (OM60B63U)

Foreword

Welcome to the growing group of value- conscious people who drive Toyotas. We are proud of the advanced engineering andquality construction of each vehicle we build.This Owner’s Manual explains the operation of your new Toyota. Please read it thoroughly and have all the occupantsfollow the instructions carefully. Doing so will help you enjoy many years of safe and trouble- free motoring. Forimportant information about this manual and your Toyota, read the following pages carefully.When it comes to service, remember that your Toyota dealer knows your vehicle very well and is interested in your completesatisfaction. Your Toyota dealer will provide quality maintenance and any other assistance you may require.If there is not a Toyota dealer near you, please call the following number:U.S. OWNERS: ! When traveling in the U.S. mainland or Canada:

Toyota Customer Experience Center Toll- free:1- 800- 331- 4331! Hawaii:

Servco Automotive Customer Services Toll- free:1- 888- 272- 5515Please leave this Owner’s Manual in this vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need this information also.All information and specifications in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of Toyota’s policy ofcontinual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you mayfind some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.Please access our websites for further information.! The U.S. mainland www.toyota.com! Hawaii www.toyotahawaii.com

2005 TOYOTA MOTOR CORPORATIONAll rights reserved. This material may not be reproduced or copied, in whole or in part, without the written permission of ToyotaMotor Corporation.

ii

Important information about this manual

Safety and vehicle damage warningsThroughout this manual, you will see safety and vehicle dam-age warnings. You must follow these warnings carefully toavoid possible injury or damage.The types of warnings, what they look like, and how they areused in this manual are explained as follows:

CAUTION

This is a warning against anything which maycause injury to people if the warning is ignored.You are informed about what you must or must notdo in order to reduce the risk of injury to yourselfand others.

NOTICEThis is a warning against anything which maycause damage to the vehicle or its equipment if thewarning is ignored. You are informed about whatyou must or must not do in order to avoid or re-duce the risk of damage to your vehicle and itsequipment.

Safety symbol

When you see the safety symbolshown above, it means: “Do not”; “Donot do this”; or “Do not let this hap-pen”.

iii

Important information about your Toyota

Occupant restraint systemsToyota encourages you and your family to take the timeto read Section 1- 3 of this Owner’s Manual carefully. Interms of helping you understand how you can receivethe maximum benefit of the occupant restraint systemsthis vehicle provides, Section 1- 3 of this Owner’s Manu-al is the most important section for you and your familyto read.Section 1- 3 describes the function and operation con-cerning seats, seat belts, SRS airbags and chi ld re-straint systems of this vehicle and some potential haz-ards you should be aware of. These systems work to-gether along with the overall structure of this vehicle inorder to provide occupant restraint in the event of acrash. The effect of each system is enhanced when it isused proper ly and together wi th o ther sys tems. Nosingle occupant restraint system can, by itself, provideyou or your fami ly wi th the equal level o f res t raintwhich these systems can provide when used together.That is why it is important for you and your family tounderstand the purpose and proper use of each of thesesystems and how they relate to each other.

The purpose of all occupant restraint systems is to helpreduce the possibility of death or serious injury in theevent of a collision. None of these systems, either indi-vidually or together, can ensure that there is no injuryin the event of collision. However, the more you knowabout these systems and how to use them properly, thegreater your chances become of surviving an accidentwithout death or serious injury.Seat belts provide the primary restraint to all occupantsof the vehicle, and every occupant of the vehicle shouldwear seat belts properly at all times. Children shouldalways be secured in child restraint systems that areappropriate for their age and size. SRS (SupplementalRestraint System) airbags are, as their names imply,designed to work with, and be supplemental to, seatbelts and are not substitutes for them. SRS airbags canbe very effective in reducing the risk of head and chestinjuries by preventing contact of the head and chestwith interior portions of the vehicle.

iv

In order to be effective, the SRS airbags must deploywith tremendous speed. The rapid deployment of theSRS airbags makes the SRS airbags themselves poten-tial sources of serious injury if an occupant is too closeto an airbag, or if an object or some part of his or herbody has been placed between the occupant and theairbag at the time of deployment. This is just one exam-ple of how the instructions in Section 1- 3 of this Own-er’s Manual will help ensure proper use of the occupantrestraint systems, and increase the safety they can pro-vide to you and your family in the event of an accident.Toyota recommends you to read the provisions in Sec-tion 1- 3 carefully and refer to them as needed duringyour time of ownership of this vehicle.

Event data recorderYour vehicle has computers that monitor and controlcertain aspects of your vehicle. These computers assistin driving and maintaining optimal vehicle performance.Besides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there isa system to record data in a crash or a near car crashevent. This is called an Event Data Recorder (EDR).The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. Ina crash or a near car crash event, this device mayrecord some or all of the following information:

! Engine speed! Whether the brake pedal was applied or not! Vehicle speed! To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed! Position of the transmission selector lever! Whether the driver and front passenger wore the

seat belts or not! Driver’s seat position! Front passenger’s occupant classification

v

! SRS airbag deployment data! SRS airbag system diagnostic data

If your vehicle is equipped with a vehicle stability con-trol (VSC) system, its Electronic Control Unit (ECU) maycontain another EDR. There are a variety of drivingsituations which include activating the VSC under whichthe VSC EDR will record certain information. The VSCEDR may record some or all of the following informa-tion:

! Behavior of the vehicle! Steering wheel angle! Vehicle speed! To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed! To what extent the brake pedal was applied! To what extent the ECU controlled the condition of

the 4 wheels! Vehicle stability control system diagnostic data

The information above is intended to be used for thepurpose of improving vehicle safety performance. Unlikegeneral data recorders, the EDR does not record sounddata such as conversation between passengers.

Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR toa third party except when:

! An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the leas-ing company for a leased vehicle) is obtained

! Officially requested by the police or other authorities! Used as a defence for Toyota in a law suit! Ordered by the court

However, if necessary Toyota will:! Use the data for research on Toyota vehicle safety

performance! Disclose the data to a third party for research pur-

poses without disclosing details of the vehicle own-er, and only when it is deemed necessary

! Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identifi-cation information to a non- Toyota organization forresearch purposes

vi

New vehicle warrantyYour new vehicle is covered by the fol lowing Toyotalimited warranties:

! New vehicle warranty! Emission control systems warranty! Others

For further information, please refer to the “Owner ’sWarranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Sup-plement”.

Your responsibility for maintenanceIt is the owner’s responsibility to make sure the speci-fied maintenance is performed. Section 6 gives detailsof these maintenance requirements. Also included inSection 6 is general maintenance. For scheduled mainte-nance information, place refer to the “Scheduled Mainte-nance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

Important health and safety information about your Toyota

CAUTION! WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constitu-

ents, and a wide variety of automobile compo-nents contain or emit chemicals known to theState of California to cause cancer and birth de-fects and other reproductive harm. In addition,oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as wellas waste produced by component wear contain oremit chemicals known to the State of Californiato cause cancer and birth defects or other repro-ductive harm.

! Battery posts, terminals and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds. Wash yourhands after handling. Used engine oil containschemicals that have caused cancer in laboratoryanimals. Always protect your skin by washingthoroughly with soap and water.

vii

Accessories, spare parts andmodification of your Toyota

A wide variety of non- genuine spare parts and accesso-ries for Toyota vehicles are currently available in themarket. You should know that Toyota does not warrantthese products and is not responsible for their perfor-mance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage theymay cause to, or adverse e ffec t they may have on,your Toyota vehicle.This vehicle should not be modified with non- genuineToyota products. Modification with non- genuine Toyotaproducts could affect its performance, safety or durabili-ty, and may even violate governmental regulations. Inaddition, damage or performance problems resulting fromthe modification may not be covered under warranty.

Installation of a mobiletwo- way radio system

As the installation of a mobile two- way radio system inyour vehicle could affect electronic systems such asmultiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuelinjection system, electronic thrott le control system,cruise control system, anti- lock brake system, activetraction control system, vehicle stability control system,active height control suspension system, skyhook TEMS,SRS airbag system and seat belt pretensioner system,be sure to check with your Toyota dealer for precaution-ary measures or special instructions regarding installa-tion.

viii

Tires and loading on your ToyotaUnderinflated or overinflated tire inflation pressureand the excess load may result in the deteriorationof steering ability and braking ability, leading toan accident. Check the tire inflation pressure peri-odically and be sure to keep the load limits givenin this Owner’s Manual. For details about tire infla-tion pressure and load limits, see pages 320 and246.

Scrapping of your ToyotaThe SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices inyour Toyota contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicleis scrapped with the airbags and pretensioners left asthey are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Besure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seatbelt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualifiedservice shop or by your Toyota dealer before you dis-pose of your vehicle.

ix

Leak detection pumpThis pump performs fuel evaporation leakage check.This check is done several hours after the engine isturned off. So you may hear sound coming from under-neath the luggage compartment for several minutes. Itdoes not indicate a malfunction.

On- pavement and off- roaddriving tips

This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class. Utilityvehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate thanother types of vehicles. This vehicle wil l handle andmaneuver differently from an ordinary passenger car be-cause it is designed for off- road use also. In addition,this vehicle has a higher ground clearance and center ofgravity than that of an ordinary passenger car. Thisvehicle design feature causes this type of vehicle to bemore likely to rollover. Failure to operate this vehiclecorrectly may result in loss of control, accidents orvehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. Be sureto read “Off- road vehicle precautions” on page 224 and“Off- road driving precautions” on page 254.

x

WE REALLY CARE ABOUT YOU ! PLEASE BUCKLE UP

Toyota has made a special effort to encourage use of seat belts.

Toyota belts are:

! Comfortable

! Easy to use

! Convenient

We encourage you to use your belts every time you drive.

U

Publication No. OM60B63UPart No. 01999-60B63Printed in Japan 01- 0505- 00

( U)

Quick index! If a service reminder indicator or warning buzzer comes on 124. . . . ! If your vehicle will not start 270. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ! If your engine stalls while driving 274. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ! If your vehicle overheats 274. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ! If you have a flat tire 275. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ! If your vehicle needs to be towed 287. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ! Tips for driving during break-in period 225. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ! How to start the engine 252. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ! General maintenance 303. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ! Complete index NO TAG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Gas station informationFuel type:

UNLEADED gasoline, Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91)or higher. For improved vehicle performance, the use of premium unleadedgasoline with an Octane Rating of 91 (Research Octane Number 96) orhigher is recommended.See page 225 for detailed information.

Fuel tank capacity: 96 L (25.4 gal., 21.1 lmp.gal.)Engine oil:

API grade, SL “Energy- Conserving” or ILSAC multigrade engine oilis recommended.See page 315 for detailed information.

Tire information: See pages 320 through 328.Tire inflation pressure: See page 344.

U−5

I

You should know as much about the quality and

importance of proper maintenance of your new

vehicle as the people who built it.

The Toyota authorized Repair Manual

tells you how to maintain your vehicle and

enables you to correctly perform your own

maintenance.

The best way to keep your new vehicle in toprunning order is to maintain it properly fromthe moment you drive it off the showroomfloor.

The Toyota authorized Repair Manual ispacked with literally everything you need toknow to perform your own maintenance invirtually every area of your new vehicle.

Where to obtain the Repair Manual

The repair manual for LAND CRUISER may bepurchased from any Toyota dealer or the Mate−rial Distribution Center. To purchase the repairmanual, please contact your Toyota dealer orcall the Material Distribution Center toll− freeat 1− 800− 622− 2033.

Maintenance procedures for the engine,

chassis, body, electrical system, and more,

are clearly explained and illustrated.

Periodic maintenance and tune−up

Periodic maintenance and tune− up helps to pre−vent small problems from growing into larger ones lat−er on. The repair manual outlines exactly what main−tenance is required and clearly explains how to do thework yourself step− by− step.

Areas covered include such things as spark plug re−placement, valve clearance adjustment and engine oiland filter replacement.

1

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSOverview of instruments and controlsInstrument panel overview 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument cluster overview 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicator symbols on the instrument panel 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1- 1

2

1. Side vents2. Side defroster outlets3. Instrument cluster4. Center vents5. Electric moon roof switches and/or

personal lights6. Tire selector switch (in the glove box)7. Glove box8. Power door lock switches9. Power window switches

10. Automatic transmission selector lever11. Seat heater switches12. Rear seat audio system13. Cup holder14. Parking brake lever15. Second start mode selector button and

driving pattern selector button16. Four- wheel drive control lever17. Active height control suspension and

skyhook TEMS switches18. Lower vent19. Hood lock release lever20. Fuel filler door opener21. Window lock switch

Instrument panel overview!View A

I11038b

3

1. Headlight, turn signal and front foglight switches

2. Cruise control switch3. Ignition switch4. Wiper and washer switches5. Emergency flasher switch6. Navigation system including air condi-

tioning controls (See the separate“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.)

7. Clock and outside temperature display8. Front passenger’s seat belt reminder

light9. Audio system

10. Outside rear view mirror heater switch11. Rear air conditioning switch12. Rear window defogger switch13. Center differential lock switch14. Power antenna switch15. Power tilt and telescopic steering

switch16. Instrument panel light control dial17. Power rear view mirror control switches18. Tire pressure warning system reset

switch19. Power quarter window switch

(left- hand side)20. Power quarter window switch

(right- hand side)21. Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags

off switch

!View B(Vehicles with navigation system)

11C515b

4

1. Headlight, turn signal and front foglight switches

2. Cruise control switch3. Ignition switch4. Wiper and washer switches5. Emergency flasher switch6. Clock, outside temperature and trip in-

formation display7. Audio system8. Front passenger’s seat belt reminder

light9. Air conditioning controls

10. Outside rear view mirror heater switch11. Rear air conditioning switch12. Rear window defogger switch13. Center differential lock switch14. Power antenna switch15. Power tilt and telescopic steering

switch16. Instrument panel light control dial17. Power rear view mirror control switches18. Tire pressure warning system reset

switch19. Power quarter window switch

(left- hand side)20. Power quarter window switch

(right- hand side)21. Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags

off switch

!View B(Vehicles without navigation system)

11C029d

5

1. Ashtray2. Cigarette lighter3. Power outlet

!Lower part of center cluster panel

6

Instrument cluster overview

11C501b

1. Voltmeter2. Speedometer3. Service reminder indicators and

indicator lights

4. Tachometer5. Height control indicator light6. Engine oil pressure gauge7. Engine coolant temperature gauge

8. Odometer and two trip meters9. Trip meter reset knob

10. Fuel gauge

7

Indicator symbols on the instrument panel

Brake system warning light∗1

Malfunction indicator lamp∗1 Headlight high beam indicator light

Turn signal indicator lights

Driver’s seat belt reminder light∗1

Anti- lock brake system warning light∗1

Open door warning light∗1

SRS warning light∗1

Low fuel level warning light∗1

Automatic transmission fluid temperature warninglight∗1

Unengaged “Park” warning light∗1

Charging system warning light∗1

Engine oil replacement reminder light

Center differential lock indicator light

Driving pattern (“POWER” mode) indicator light

Automatic transmission second start indicator light

Cruise control indicator light∗2

Low tire pressure warning light∗1

8

∗1: For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warningbuzzers” on page 124.

∗2: If this light flashes, see “Cruise control” on page 155.∗3: For details, see “Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off

switch” on page 68.

Vehicle stability control system off indicatorlight∗1

Vehicle stability control system and active traction control system warning light∗1

Active traction control system indicator light

Slip indicator light

Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off indicator light∗3

Automatic transmission indicator lights

9

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLSKeys and Doors Keys 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine immobilizer system 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wireless remote control 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side doors 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power windows 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power quarter windows 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back door 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hood 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Theft deterrent system 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel tank cap 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric moon roof 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1- 2

10

Keys

Your vehicle is supplied with two kindsof keys.1. Master keys (black)—These keys work

in every lock. Your Toyota dealer willneed one of them to make a new keywith a built- in transponder chip.These keys are fitted with the wirelessremote control transmitter. For informa-tion on use of the wireless remote con-trol key, see “Wireless remote control”on page 13.

2. Sub key (gray)—This key does notwork in the glove box.

A transponder chip for engine immobilizersystem has been placed in the head ofthe master and sub keys. These chips areneeded to enable the system to functioncorrectly, so be careful not to lose thesekeys. If you make your own duplicate key,you will not be able to cancel the systemor start the engine.To protect items locked in the glove boxwhen using valet parking, leave the subkey with the attendant.Since the side doors can be locked with-out a key, you should always carry aspare master key in case you accidentallylock your keys inside the vehicle. NOTICE

When using a key containing a trans-ponder chip, observe the followingprecautions:! When starting the engine, do not

use the key with a key ring restingon the key grip and do not pressthe key ring against the key grip.Otherwise the engine may not start,or may stop soon after it starts.

11

! When starting the engine, do notuse the key with other transponderkeys around (including keys of oth-er vehicles) and do not press otherkey plates against the key grip.Otherwise the engine may not start,or may stop soon after it starts. Ifthis happens, remove the key onceand then insert it again after remov-ing other transponder keys (includ-ing keys of other vehicles) from thering or while gripping or coveringthem with your hand to start theengine.

! Do not bend the key grip.! Do not cover the key grip with any

material that cuts off electromagnet-ic waves.

! Do not knock the key hard againstother objects.

! Do not leave the key exposed tohigh temperatures for a long period,such as on the dashboard and hoodunder direct sunlight.

! Do not put the key in water orwash it in an ultrasonic washer.

! Do not use the key with electromag-netic materials.

12

KEY NUMBER PLATEYour key number is shown on the plate.Keep the plate in a safe place such asyour wallet, not in the vehicle.If you should lose your keys or if youneed additional keys, duplicates can bemade by a Toyota dealer using the keynumber.We recommend writing down the key num-ber and storing it in a safe place.

Engine immobilizer system

The engine immobilizer system is atheft prevention system. When you in-sert the key in the ignition switch, thetransponder chip in the key’s headtransmits an electronic code to the ve-hicle. The engine will start only whenthe electronic code in the chip corre-sponds to the registered ID code forthe vehicle.

The system is automatically set when thekey is removed from the ignition switch.The indicator light will start flashing toshow the system is set.If any of the following indicator conditionsoccurs, contact your Toyota dealer.! The indicator light stays on except

when the theft deterrent system is set-ting or activating. (See “Theft deterrentsystem” on page 28.)

! The indicator light does not start flash-ing when the key is removed from theignition switch.

! The indicator light flashes inconsistent-ly.

13

Inserting the registered key in the ignitionswitch automatically cancels the system,which enables the engine to start. Theindicator light will go off.For your Toyota dealer to make a new keywith a built- in transponder chip, yourdealer will need your key number andmaster key. However, there is a limit tothe number of additional keys your Toyotadealer can make for you.If you make your own duplicate key,you will not be able to cancel the sys-tem or start the engine.

FCC ID: MOZRI- 20BTY

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:(1) This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference received, includ-ing interference that may cause unde-sired operation.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party respon-sible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equip-ment.

Wireless remote control*—

12c520

1. “LOCK” switch2. Indicator light3. “PANIC” switch4. “UNLOCK” switch

The wireless remote control system isdesigned to lock or unlock all the sidedoors and back door from a distancewithin approximately 1 m (3 ft.) of thevehicle.NOTE: *This feature can be deactivatedas vehicle theft deterrent measure in caseof the loss of the wireless remote controlkey. Ask your Toyota dealer for details.When you operate any switch, push itslowly and securely. At this time, the indi-cator light flashes once.

14

The wireless remote control key is anelectronic component. Observe the follow-ing instructions in order not to cause dam-age and trouble to the key.! Do not leave the key in places where

the temperature becomes high such ason the dashboard.

! Do not disassemble it.! Avoid knocking it hard against other

objects or dropping it.! Avoid putting it in water.

You can use up to 4 wireless remote con-trol keys for the same vehicle. Contactyour Toyota dealer for detailed information.If the wireless remote control key doesnot actuate the doors or operate from anormal distance, or the indicator light onthe key is dimmed or does not come on:! Check for closeness to a radio trans-

mitter such as a radio station or anairport which can interfere with normaloperation of the key.

! The battery may have been consumed.Check the battery in the key. Toreplace the battery, see following“—Replacing battery” on page 17.

If you lose your wireless remote controlkey, contact your Toyota dealer as soonas possible to avoid the possibility oftheft, or an accident. (For detailed infor-mation, see “If you lose your keys” onpage 291.)

Locking operation

Unlocking operation

—Locking and unlockingdoors

15

To lock and unlock all the side doorsand back door, push the switches slow-ly and securely.To lock: Push the “LOCK” switch. All theside doors and back door are locked si-multaneously. At this time, turn signallights flash once.*NOTE: *The turn signal lights can be setnot to flash. Ask your Toyota dealer fordetails.Check to see that all the side doors andback door are securely locked.If any of the side doors or back door isnot securely closed, or if the key is in theignition switch, locking cannot be per-formed by the “LOCK” switch.To unlock: Push the “UNLOCK” switchonce to unlock the driver’s door alone.Pushing the switch twice within 3 secondsunlocks all the side doors and back doorsimultaneously.* At this time, turn signallights flash twice.**NOTE: *The 2- step unlocking function canbe changed. **The turn signal lights canbe set not to flash. Ask your Toyota deal-er for details.

Together with the activation of unlocking,the interior light comes on for 15 secondsif the interior light switch is in “DOOR”position.* However, this function does notwork when the ignition key is in the “ACC”or “ON” position. (For detailed information,see “Interior lights” on page 113.)You have 30 seconds to open a door afterusing the wireless remote unlock fea-ture.** If a door is not opened by then, allthe side doors and back door will be auto-matically locked again.NOTE: *The interior light can be set notto come on or the duration of lighting canbe changed. **The time before automaticre- locking can be changed. Ask yourToyota dealer for details.If the “LOCK” or “UNLOCK” switch is keptpressed in, the locking or unlocking opera-tion is not repeated. Release the switchand then push again.

Pushing the “PANIC” switch for 1 sec-ond blows the horn intermittently andflashes the headlights, tail lights andinterior lights.*NOTE: *This feature can be deactivated.Ask your Toyota dealer for details.The “PANIC” switch is used to deter ve-hicle theft when you witness anyone at-tempting to break into or damage yourvehicle.

—Activating panic mode

16

The alarm will last for 1 minute. To stopthe alarm midway, push the “PANIC”,“LOCK” or “UNLOCK” switch, or unlockany side door or back door with key. Youcan also stop the alarm by turning theignition key from “LOCK” to the “ON” posi-tion.The “PANIC” mode does not work whenthe ignition key is in the “ON” position.For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept any interfer-ence received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.

NOTICE:This equipment has been tested andfound to comply with the limits for aClass B digital device, pursuant to Part15 of the FCC Rules. These limits aredesigned to provide reasonable protec-tion against harmful interference in aresidential installation. This equipmentgenerates, uses and can radiate radiofrequency energy and, if not installedand used in accordance with the instruc-tions, may cause harmful interference toradio communications. However, there isno guarantee that interference will notoccur in a particular installation. If thisequipment does cause harmful interfer-ence to radio or television reception,which can be determined by turning theequipment off and on, the user is en-couraged to try to correct the interfer-ence by one or more of the followingmeasures:! Reorient or relocate the receiving an-

tenna.! Increase the separation between the

equipment and receiver.

! Connect the equipment into an outleton a circuit different from that towhich the receiver is connected.

! Consult the dealer or an experiencedradio/TV technician for help.

FCC WARNING:Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party respon-sible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equip-ment.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party respon-sible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equip-ment.

17

For replacement, use a CR2016 lithiumbattery or equivalent and a special screw-driver.

CAUTION

Special care should be taken to pre-vent small children from swallowingthe removed battery or components.

NOTICE

! When replacing the battery, be care-ful not to lose the components.

! Replace only with the same orequivalent type recommended by aToyota dealer.

! Dispose of used battery accordingto the local laws.

Replace the battery by following theseprocedures:

1. Remove the screw, and then the cover.

11C522x

2. Remove the module from the keyframe.

—Replacing battery

18

11C523

3. Open and remove the battery casecover using a coin. Remove the dis-charged battery and put in a new bat-tery with the positive side up.

4. Replace the battery case cover.5. Install the module into the key frame

and secure the cover with the screw.6. When pushing any switch on the wire-

less key, make sure the indicator lightcomes on.

NOTICE

! Make sure the positive side andnegative side of the battery arefaced correctly.

! Do not replace the battery with wethands. Water may cause unexpectedrust.

! Do not touch or move any compo-nents inside the transmitter, or itmay interfere with proper operation.

! Be careful not to bend the electrodewhen inserting the battery and thatdust or oils do not adhere to thecase.

! Take care not to lose the screws.

After replacing the battery, check that thekey operates properly. If the key still doesnot operate properly, contact your Toyotadealer.

Side doors—

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEYInsert the key into the keyhole and turnit.To lock: Turn the key forward.To unlock: Turn the key backward.All the side doors and back door lock andunlock simultaneously with either frontside door. In the driver’s door lock, turn-ing the key once will unlock the driver’sdoor and twice in succession will unlockall the side doors and back door simulta-neously.*NOTE: *The 2- step unlocking function canbe changed. Ask your Toyota dealer fordetails.

19

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITHINSIDE LOCK KNOBMove the lock knob.To lock: Push the knob forward.To unlock: Pull the knob backward.The front doors can be opened by pullingthe inside handles even if the lock knobare in the lock position.Closing the side door with the lock knobin the lock position will also lock the sidedoor. Be careful not to lock your keys inthe vehicle.Front side doors cannot be locked wheneither front side door is open and the keyis in the ignition.

l12093a

Driver’s side

l12046a

Passenger’s side

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITHPOWER DOOR LOCK SWITCHPush the switch.To lock: Push the switch down on thefront side.To unlock: Push the switch down on therear side.All the side doors and back door lock orunlock simultaneously.When the front doors are locked from theoutside or locked with the wireless remotecontrol key, the power door lock switchwill not work until the either front door isunlocked with the key, lock knob, or wire-less remote control key.

20

REAR DOOR CHILD- PROTECTORSMove the lock lever to the “LOCK”position as shown on the label.When the child- protector is locked, youcannot open the rear door by the insidedoor handle. We recommend using thisfeature whenever small children are in thevehicle.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the doorsare closed and locked, especiallywhen small children are in the ve-hicle. Along with the proper use ofseat belts, locking the doors helpsprevent the driver and passengersfrom being thrown out from the ve-hicle in an accident. It also helps pre-vent the doors from being openedunintentionally.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKINGYou can select the following functions:! Locking linked with the shift posi-

tion*All doors are automatically locked whenthe selector lever is moved out of “P”position.*:This function is the default setting fornew vehicles.

! Locking linked with vehicle speedAll doors are automatically locked whenthe vehicle speed goes above about 20km/h (12 mph).

—Automatic door locking andunlocking functions

21

You can set or cancel the automaticdoor locking functions:Be sure to apply the parking brake whenperforming the following operations.To select the locking linked with theshift position:1. Close all doors and turn the ignition

switch to the “ON” position.2. Shift the selector lever to the “P” posi-

tion.3. Within 10 seconds of turning the igni-

tion switch to the “ON” position, pressand hold the driver’s side power doorlock switch in the lock position for 5seconds and then release.The doors will be locked and unlockedto indicate that the function is set.

To cancel the function, do the above op-eration again.

To select the locking linked with thevehicle speed:1. Close all doors and turn the ignition

switch to the “ON” position.2. Shift the selector lever from “P” to the

“N” position.3. Within 10 seconds of turning the igni-

tion switch to the “ON” position, pressand hold the driver’s side power doorlock switch in the lock position for 5seconds and then release.The doors will be locked and unlockedto indicate that the function is set.


AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCKINGYou can select the following functions:! Unlocking linked with the ignition

switchAll doors are automatically unlockedwhen the the driver’s door is openedwithin 10 seconds after the ignitionswitch is turned to the “ACC” or“LOCK” position, or the key is re-moved.

! Unlocking linked with the shift posi-tionAll doors are automatically unlockedwhen the selector lever is moved to“P” position.

22

You can set or cancel the automaticunlocking functions:Be sure to apply the parking brake whenperforming the following operations.To select the unlocking linked with theignition switch:1. Close all doors and turn the ignition

switch to the “ON” position.2. Shift the selector lever from “P” to the

“N” position.3. Within 10 seconds of turning the igni-

tion switch to the “ON” position, pressand hold the driver’s side power doorlock switch in the unlock position for5 seconds and then release.The doors will be locked and unlockedto indicate that the function is set.


To select the unlocking linked with theshift position:1. Close all doors and turn the ignition

switch to the “ON” position.2. Shift the selector lever to the “P” posi-

tion.3. Within 10 seconds of turning the igni-

tion switch to the “ON” position, pressand hold the driver’s side power doorlock switch in the unlock position for5 seconds and then release.The doors will be locked and unlockedto indicate that the function is set.


Power windows

12C010a

The windows can be operated with theswitch on each side door.The power windows work when the ignitionswitch is in the “ON” position.Key off operation: If both front doors areclosed, they work for 45 seconds evenafter the ignition switch is turned off. Theystop working when either front door isopened.OPERATING THE DRIVER’S WINDOWUse the switch on the driver’s door.Normal operation: The window moves aslong as you hold the switch.To open: Lightly push down the switch.To close: Lightly pull up the switch.

23

12C011a

Automatic operation: Push the switchcompletely down or pull it completely up,and then release it. The window will fullyopen or close. To stop the window part-way, lightly move the switch in the oppo-site direction and then release it.Jam protection function: If somethinggets caught between the window and win-dow frame during automatic closing opera-tion or key off closing operation, the win-dow stops and opens halfway.If the window receives a strong impact,this function may work even if nothing iscaught.

l12088a

Window lockswitch

OPERATING THE PASSENGERS’ WIN-DOWSUse the switch on each passenger’sdoor or the switches on the driver’sdoor that control each passenger’s win-dow.Normal operation: The window moves aslong as you hold the switch.To open: Lightly push down the switch.To close: Lightly pull up the switch.If you push in the window lock switch onthe driver’s door, the passengers’ windowscannot be operated.The indicator lights on the switch tell youwhich of the switches can be operated.

12C007b

Automatic operation: Push the switchcompletely down or pull it completely up,and then release it. The window will fullyopen or close. To stop the window part-way, lightly move the switch in the oppo-site direction and then release it.Jam protection function: If somethinggets caught between the window and win-dow frame during automatic closing opera-tion or key off closing operation, the win-dow stops and opens halfway.If the window receives a strong impact,this function may work even if nothing iscaught.

24

12c012b

CAUTION

To avoid serious personal injury, youmust do the following.! Before you close the power win-

dows, always make sure there isnobody around the power windows.You must also make sure theheads, hands and other parts of thebodies of all occupants are keptcompletely inside the vehicle. Ifsomeone’s neck, head or hands getcaught in a closing window, itcould result in death or serious in-jury. When anyone closes the powerwindows, make sure he or she op-erates the windows safely.

! When small children are in the ve-hicle, never let them use the powerwindow switches without supervi-sion. Use the window lock switch toprevent them from making unex-pected use of the switches.

! Be sure to remove the ignition keywhen you leave your vehicle.

! Never leave anyone (particularly asmall child) alone in your vehicle,especially with the ignition key stillinserted. Otherwise, he or shecould use the power windowswitches and get trapped in a win-dow. Unattended person (particular-ly a small child) can be involved ina serious accident.

! Never try jamming any part of yourbody in a window to activate thejam protection function intention-ally.

! The jam protection function maynot work if something gets caughtjust before the window is fullyclosed.

25

Power quarter windows

The rear quarter windows can be oper-ated with the “REAR VENT” switcheson the instrument panel.The power rear quarter windows workwhen the ignition switch is in the “ON”position.Both left and right rear quarter windowsmove as long as you hold the switch.To open: Push the right one of theswitches.To close: Push the left one of theswitches.

CAUTION

To avoid serious personal injury, youmust do the following.! Before you close the power quarter

windows, always make sure there isnobody around the power quarterwindows. You must also make surethe hands and other parts of thebodies of all occupants are keptcompletely inside the vehicle. Ifsomeone’s hands get caught in aclosing window, it could result in aserious injury. When anyone closesthe power quarter windows, makesure he or she operates the win-dows safely.


! Never leave anyone (particularly asmall child) alone in your vehicle,especially with the ignition key stillinserted. Otherwise, he or shecould use the power quarter win-dow switches and get trapped in awindow. Unattended person (particu-larly a small child) can be involvedin a serious accident.

Back door

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEYInsert the key into the key hole andturn it.To lock: Turn the key clockwise.To unlock: Turn the key counterclockwise.All the doors lock and unlock simulta-neously with back door.Operating the power door lock switch si-multaneously locks or unlocks all the sidedoors and the back door. (See “—Lockingand unlocking doors” on page 14 and“Side doors” on page 18.)To open the back door, pull the lock re-lease lever.

26

Pull the handle toward you and pulldown the lower side of the back door.When closing the back door, make sureit is fully closed.See “Cargo and luggage” on page 247 forprecautions when loading luggage.

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING FROM IN-SIDETo lock: Push the knob.To unlock: Pull the knob.Operating the power door lock switch si-multaneously locks or unlocks all the sidedoors and the back door. (See “Sidedoors” on page 18.)

Push the handle and push down thelower side of the back door.When closing the back door, make sureit is fully closed.See “Cargo and luggage” on page 247 forprecautions when loading luggage.

27

CAUTION

! Keep the back door closed whiledriving. This not only keeps theluggage from being thrown out butalso prevents exhaust gases fromentering the vehicle.

! If the open back door hides thestop and tail lights, rear turn signallights or rear retro reflectors whileyou are parked, other road usersmust be warned of the presence ofyour vehicle by a warning triangleor other device. BACK DOOR CHILD- PROTECTOR

Move the lock lever to the “LOCK”position as shown on the label.When the child- protector is locked, youcannot open the back door by the insidedoor handle. We recommend using thisfeature whenever small children are in thevehicle.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the backdoor is closed and locked, especiallywhen small children are in the ve-hicle. Along with the proper use ofseat belts, locking the doors helpsprevent the driver and passengersfrom being thrown out from the ve-hicle in an accident. It also helps pre-vent the doors from being openedunintentionally.

28

Hood

To open the hood:1. Pull the hood lock release lever. The

hood will spring up slightly.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the hoodis closed and securely locked. Other-wise, the hood may open unexpected-ly while driving and an accident mayoccur.

2. In front of the vehicle, pull up theauxiliary catch lever and lift thehood.

Before closing the hood, check to see thatyou have not forgotten any tools, rags,etc. Then lower the hood and make sureit locks into place. If necessary, pressdown gently on the front edge to lock it.

Theft deterrent system

To deter vehicle theft, the system isdesigned to sound an alarm if any ofthe side doors, back door or hood isforcibly unlocked or opened or the bat-tery terminal is disconnected and thenreconnected when the vehicle is locked.The alarm blows the horn intermittentlyand flashes the headlights, tail lights andother exterior lights.

29

SETTING THE SYSTEM1. Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK”

position and remove it.The indicator light will start flashing whenthe key is removed from the ignitionswitch. (See “Engine immobilizer system”on page 12 for details.)2. Have all passengers get out of the

vehicle.3. Close and lock all the side doors, back

door and hood.The indicator light will come on when allthe side doors, back door and hood areclosed and locked.

The system will automatically be set after30 seconds. When the system is set, theindicator light will start flashing again.4. After making sure the indicator light

starts flashing, you may leave the ve-hicle.

Never leave anyone in the vehicle whenyou set the system, because unlockingfrom the inside will activate the system.WHEN THE SYSTEM IS SETActivating the systemThe system will sound the alarm underthe following conditions:! If any of the side doors is unlocked or

opened without the key or wireless re-mote control key, or if the back dooror hood is forcibly opened

! If the battery terminal is disconnectedand then reconnected

The indicator light will come on when thesystem is activated.

If any of the side door or back door isunlocked without the key or wireless re-mote control key and the key is not in theignition switch, all the side doors andback door will be automatically lockedagain.After one minute, the alarm will automati-cally stop and the indicator light will startsflashing again.Reactivating the alarmOnce set, the system automatically resetsthe alarm after the alarm stops.The alarm will activate again under thesame circumstances described in“Activating the system”.Stopping the alarmThe alarm will be stopped by the followingtwo ways:! Start the engine, and the alarm stops

after 2 seconds.! Unlock any of the side doors or back

door with the key or wireless remotecontrol key.

These ways cancel the system at thesame time.

30

TESTING THE SYSTEM1. Open all the windows.2. Set the system as described above.

The side doors and back door shouldbe locked with the key or wireless re-mote control key. Be sure to wait untilthe indicator light goes off or startsflashing.

3. Unlock any side door or back doorfrom the inside. The system should ac-tivate the alarm.

4. Stop the alarm as described above.5. Repeat this operation for the other

doors, back door and hood. When test-ing the hood, also check that the sys-tem is activated when the battery ter-minal is disconnected and thenreconnected.

If the system does not work properly,have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

Fuel tank cap

12C503

This indicates that the fuel filler dooris on the left side of your vehicle.

1. To open the fuel filler door, pull thelever.When refueling, turn off the engine.

CAUTION

! Do not smoke, cause sparks or al-low open flames when refueling.The fumes are flammable.

! When opening the cap, do not re-move the cap quickly. In hot weath-er, fuel under pressure could causeinjury by spraying out of the fillerneck if the cap is suddenly re-moved.

31

12C006b

2. To remove the fuel tank cap, turnthe cap slowly counterclockwise,then pause slightly before removingit. After removing the cap, hang iton the cap hanger.

It is not unusual to hear a slight swooshwhen the cap is opened. When installing,turn the cap clockwise till you hear aclick.If the cap is not tightened securely, themalfunction indicator lamp comes on.Make sure the cap is tightened securely.

CAUTION

! Make sure the cap is installed se-curely to prevent fuel spillage inthe event of an accident.

! Use only a genuine Toyota fuel tankcap for replacement. It is designedto regulate fuel tank pressure.

Electric moon roof

Sliding operation

Tilting operation

32

To operate the moon roof, use theswitches beside the personal light.The moon roof works when the ignitionswitch is in the “ON” position. However,if both front doors are closed, it works for45 seconds even after the ignition switchis turned off. It stops working when eitherof the front doors is opened.Sun shade operation—The sun shade can be opened or closedby hand.Sliding operation—To open: Push the “SLIDE” switch on therear side.The roof will open and stop partway 30mm (1.2 in.) from the fully opened posi-tion. When you push the switch again, themoon roof will open fully. To stop the roofpartway, push the same switch or tiltswitch while the roof is moving.As driving with the moon roof opened fullywill cause wind throbs, we recommendyou to drive with the moon roof partway30 mm (1.2 in.) from the fully openedposition.The sun shade will be opened togetherwith the roof.To close: Push the “SLIDE” switch on thefront side.

The roof will fully close. To stop the roofpartway, push the same switch or tiltswitch.Tilting operation—To tilt up: Push the “TILT” switch on the“UP” side.The roof will tilt up fully. To stop the roofpartway, push the same switch or slideswitch.To lower: Push the “TILT” switch on theopposite side of the “UP” side.The roof will fully close. To stop the roofpartway, push the same switch or slideswitch.Jam protection function (closing opera-tion only): If something gets caught be-tween the moon roof and frame duringclosing operation, the moon roof stops andopens halfway.If an impact is given to the moon roof,this function may work without anythingcaught.

If the battery terminals is disconnectedor the battery is run down, the moonroof may not operate automatically andthe jam protection function will not operatecorrectly after you reconnect, replace orrecharge the battery with the moon roofslide- opened or tilted up. In any of thesecases, you should return the moon roof tonormal.To normalize the moon roof, push andhold the switch until the moon roof isclosed or tilted down completely.Make sure the moon roof opens andcloses automatically. If the moon roof can-not be operated properly, have it checkedby your Toyota dealer.

33

CAUTION

To avoid serious personal injury, youmust do the following.! While the vehicle is moving, always

keep the heads, hands and otherparts of the bodies of all occupantsaway from the roof opening. Other-wise, they could be seriously in-jured if the vehicle stops suddenlyor if the vehicle is involved in anaccident.

! Before you close the moon roof,always make sure there is nobodyaround the moon roof. You mustalso make sure nobody places hisor her head, hands and other partsof the body in the roof opening. Ifsomeone’s neck, head or hands getcaught in the closing roof, it couldresult in death or serious injury.When anyone closes the moon roof,first make sure it is safe to do so.


! Never leave anyone (particularly asmall child) alone in your vehicle,especially with the ignition key stillinserted. Otherwise, he or shecould use the moon roof switchesand get trapped in the roof open-ing. Unattended person (particularlya small child) can be involved in aserious accident.

! Never sit on top of the vehiclearound the roof opening.

! Never try jamming any part of yourbody to activate the jam protectionfunction intentionally.

! The jam protection function maynot work when something getscaught just before the moon roof isfully closed.

34

35

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSOccupant restraint systemsSeats 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front seats 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Armrest 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear seats 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Head restraints 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat heaters 49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat belts 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRS driver airbag and front passenger airbag 60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags with roll sensing function67

Child restraint 78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1- 3

36

SeatsWhile the vehicle is being driven, all ve-hicle occupants should have the seatbackupright, sit well back in the seat and prop-erly wear the seat belts provided.

CAUTION

! Do not drive the vehicle unless theoccupants are properly seated. Donot allow any passengers to sit ontop of a folded- down seatback, orin the luggage compartment or car-go area. Persons not properlyseated and/or not properly re-strained by seat belts can be se-verely injured in the event of emer-gency braking or a collision.

! During driving, do not allow anypassengers to stand up or movearound between seats. Otherwise,severe injuries can occur in theevent of emergency braking or acollision.

Driver seat

CAUTION

The SRS driver airbag deploys withconsiderable force, and can causedeath or serious injury especially ifthe driver is very close to the airbag.The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (“NHTSA”) advises:Since the risk zone for driver airbagis the first 50 – 75 mm (2 – 3 in.) ofinflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10in.) from your driver airbag providesyou with a clear margin of safety.This distance is measured from thecenter of the steering wheel to yourbreastbone. If you sit less than 250mm (10 in.) away now, you canchange your driving position in sever-al ways:! Move your seat to the rear as far

as you can while still reaching thepedals comfortably.

! Slightly recline the back of theseat. Although vehicle designs vary,many drivers can achieve the 250mm (10 in.) distance, even with thedriver seat all the way forward, sim-ply by reclining the back of theseat somewhat. If reclining the backof your seat makes it hard to seethe road, raise yourself by using afirm, non- slippery cushion, or raisethe seat if your vehicle has thatfeature.

! If your steering wheel is adjustable,tilt it downward. This points the air-bag toward your chest instead ofyour head and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as rec-ommended by NHTSA above, whilestill maintaining control of the footpedals, steering wheel, and your viewof the instrument panel controls.

Front seats——Front seat precautions

37

Front passenger seat

CAUTION

The SRS front passenger airbag alsodeploys with considerable force, andcan cause death or serious injury es-pecially if the front passenger is veryclose to the airbag. The front passen-ger seat should be as far from theairbag as possible with the seatbackadjusted, so the front passenger sitsupright.

Front seats (with SRS side airbags)

CAUTION

The SRS side airbags are installed inthe driver and front passenger seats.Observe the following precautions.! Do not lean against the front door

when the vehicle is in use, sincethe side airbag inflates with consid-erable speed and force. Otherwise,you may be killed or severely in-jured.

! Do not use seat accessories whichcover the area where the side air-bags inflate. Such accessories mayprevent the side airbags from acti-vating correctly, causing death orserious injury.

! Do not modify or replace the seatsor upholstery of the seats equippedwith side airbags. Such change mayprevent the side airbag system fromactivating correctly, disable the sys-tem or cause the side airbags toinflate accidentally, resulting indeath or serious injury.

CAUTION

! Do not adjust the seat while thevehicle is moving as the seat mayunexpectedly move and cause thedriver to lose control of the vehicle.

! Be careful that the seat does nothit a passenger, luggage or the rearseat.

NOTICE

Do not operate the control switch inmore than one dimension at a time.It may cause electrical overload.

—Seat adjustment precautions

38

I13380b

1. SEAT POSITION AND SEAT CUSHIONANGLE ADJUSTING SWITCH

Move the control switch in the desireddirection.Releasing the switch will stop the seat atthat position.Do not place anything under the frontseats, as this might interfere with the seatmovement.2. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING

SWITCHMove the control switch in the desireddirection.Releasing the switch will stop the seat-back at that position.

CAUTION

Avoid reclining the seatback anymore than needed. The seat belts pro-vide maximum protection in a frontalor rear collision when the driver andthe front passenger are sitting upstraight and well back in the seats. Ifyou are reclined, the lap belt mayslide past your hips and apply re-straint forces directly to the abdomenor your neck may contact the shoul-der belt. In the event of a frontalcollision, the more the seat is re-clined, the greater the risk of deathor personal injury.

3. SEAT LUMBAR SUPPORT ADJUST-ING SWITCH

Push the control switch on either side.The amount of lumbar support will changewhile the switch is pushed.

—Adjusting front seats

39

Armrest

To use the armrest, pull it down asshown above.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the armrest,avoid putting heavy loads on it.

CAUTION

! Do not adjust the seat while thevehicle is moving.

! Be careful that the seat does nothit a passenger or luggage.

! After adjusting the seatback, pushyour body back against the seat tomake sure the seat is locked inposition.

! When returning seats to their origi-nal position, observe the followingin order to prevent personal injuryin a collision or sudden stop:Make sure the seat is securelylocked by pushing forward and rear-ward on the top of the seatbackand by trying to pull up the edgeof the bottom cushion. Failure todo so will prevent seat belt fromoperating properly.Make sure the seat belts are nottwisted or caught under the seatand are arranged in their properposition and are ready to use.

Tumbling the seats will enlarge the lug-gage compartment. See “Cargo and lug-gage” on page 247 for precautions whenloading luggage.

Rear seats——Rear seat precautions

40

I13220c

SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING LEVERLean forward and pull the lever towardyou. Then lean back to the desiredangle and release the lever.

CAUTION

! Avoid reclining the seatback anymore than needed. The seat beltsprovide maximum protection in afrontal or rear collision when thesecond seat passengers are sittingup straight and well back in theseats. If you are reclined, the lapbelt may slide past your hips andapply restraint forces directly to theabdomen or your neck may contactthe shoulder belt. In the event of afrontal collision, the more the seatis reclined, the greater the risk ofdeath or personal injury.



For easy access to the third seat:1. Lower the head restraint to the low-

est position.2. Push the seatback angle adjusting

lever and pull the seat cushion lockrelease lever or pull the strap.

After passengers are in, return the seatuntil it locks.

—Adjusting second seats—Moving second seat forthird seat entry

41

CAUTION

After returning the seat, make surethe seat is securely locked by push-ing forward and rearward on the topof the seatback and by trying to pullup the edge of the bottom cushion.

—Tumbling second seat

I13378b

BEFORE TUMBLING SECOND SEAT1. Stow the second seat belt buckles

as shown in the illustration.This prevents the seat belt buckles fromfalling out when you tumble the secondseat.

NOTICE

The seat belt buckles must be stowedbefore you tumble the second seat.

I13340a

2. Make sure the shoulder belt passesthrough the hanger when folding thesecond seat.

This prevents the shoulder belt from beingdamaged.

CAUTION

The seat belt must be removed fromthe hanger when the seat belt is inuse.

42

TUMBLING SECOND SEAT1. Lower the outer head restraint to the

lowest position and pull up the cen-ter head restraint. Unlock the seat-back and fold it down.

Tumbling the rear seats will enlarge theluggage compartment. See “Cargo andluggage” on page 247 for precautionswhen loading luggage.

2. Unlock the seat cushion. Swing thewhole seat up and forward.

3. Hook the strap.When returning the second seat to itsoriginal position, put the holding strap intothe hole.

43

4. Remove the seat hook covers fromthe back of the seat cushion, andinstall them over the seat hooks.

CAUTION

Be sure to apply the covers on theseat hooks, or you may get burnedwhen they become hot.

When returning the second seat to itsoriginal position, remove the seat hookcovers from the floor and install them inthe back of the seat cushion.

WHEN RETURNING THE SECOND SEATIf you cannot raise the seatback be-cause of the locked seat belt, do nottry it hard. Release the lock of the seatbelt in the following way. Push in thelower front edge of the seatback cush-ion to slacken the seat belt (1) and letthe seat belt retract a little (2).

CAUTION

When returning seats to their originalposition, observe the following pre-cautions in order to prevent personalinjury in a collision or sudden stop:! Make sure the seat is securely

locked by pushing forward and rear-ward on the top of the seatbackand by trying to pull up the edgeof the bottom cushion. Failure todo so will prevent seat belt fromoperating properly.

! Make sure the seat belts are nottwisted or caught under the seatand are arranged in their properposition and are ready to use.

44

—Adjusting third seatsSEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING LEVERLean forward and pull the lever towardyou. Then lean back to the desiredangle and release the lever.

CAUTION

! Avoid reclining the seatback anymore than needed. The seat beltsprovide maximum protection in afrontal or rear collision when thethird seat passengers are sitting upstraight and well back in the seats.If you are reclined, the lap belt mayslide past your hips and apply re-straint forces directly to the abdo-men or your neck may contact theshoulder belt. In the event of afrontal collision, the more the seatis reclined, the greater the risk ofdeath or personal injury.



—Tumbling third seats

I13377b

BEFORE TUMBLING THIRD SEAT1. Stow the third seat belt and buckles

as shown in the illustration.This prevents the seat belt and bucklesfrom falling out when you tumble the thirdseat.

NOTICE

The seat belt and buckles must bestowed before you tumble the thirdseat.

45

I13262c

2. Make sure the shoulder belt passesthrough the hanger when folding thethird seat.

This prevents the shoulder belt from beingdamaged.

CAUTION

The seat belt must be removed fromthe hanger when the seat belt is inuse.

TUMBLING THIRD SEAT1. Lower the head restraint to the low-

est position. Unlock the seatbackand fold it down.

Tumbling the third seats will enlarge theluggage compartment. See “Cargo andluggage” on page 247 for precautionswhen loading luggage.

2. Unlock the seat cushion and slidethe whole seat to the rear- mostposition while pulling up the handle.

46

13c557a

3. Swing the whole seat up.

13c558

4. Hook the strap.When returning the third seat to its origi-nal position, put the holding strap into thehole.

13c559

5. Remove the seat hook covers fromthe back of the seat cushion, andinstall them over the seat hooks.

CAUTION


When returning the third seat to its origi-nal position, remove the seat hook coversfrom the floor and install them in the backof the seat cushion.

47

CAUTION

When returning seats to their originalposition, observe the following pre-cautions in order to prevent personalinjury in a collision or sudden stop:! Make sure the seat is securely

locked by pushing forward and rear-ward on the top of the seatbackand by trying to pull up the edgeof the bottom cushion. Be certainto replace head restraint. Failure todo so will prevent seat belt fromoperating properly.

! Make sure the seat belts are nottwisted or caught under the seatand are arranged in their properposition and are ready to use.

—Removing third seats

After tumbling the third seat, open thecover, hold the whole seat and pull itup while pulling the handle toward you.Removing the third seat will enlarge theluggage compartment. See “Cargo andluggage” on page 247 for precautionswhen loading luggage.

Remove the seat hook covers from theback of the seat cushion, and installthem over the seat hooks.

CAUTION


When returning the third seat to its origi-nal position, remove the seat hook coversfrom the floor and install them in the backof the seat cushion.

48

CAUTION

When removing or reinstalling theseat, observe the following precau-tions to prevent personal injury:! Do not fold or remove the seat

while the vehicle is moving.! Be careful not to get your hands or

feet pinched in the seat.! Be careful not to hit the removed

seat against a person or drop it onyourself.

! After tumbling or installing theseat, push it forward and backwardto make sure it is locked in posi-tion.

To prevent personal injury in a colli-sion or sudden stop:! Do not sit on or place anything on

the folded seatback while driving.! Do not leave the removed seat

loose in the vehicle.! Do not try to sit on or place any-

thing on the removed seat.

! When reinstalling the seat, be care-ful not to hit the seat against youor inside of the vehicle.

! Install each seat in the same posi-tion from which it was removed.Failure to do so will prevent thirdseat occupants from using seatbelts properly.

NOTICE

Avoid putting heavy loads on the re-moved seat. The metallic tips of theseat legs may be damaged and theseat cannot be reinstalled.

Head restraints

Front

I13375b

Rear

49

For your safety and comfort, adjust thehead restraint before driving.To raise: Pull it up.To lower: Push it down while pressing thelock release button.Front head restraint only—You can alsomove the head restraint forward or back-ward. If such adjustment is desired, pullor push the head restraint.Rear center head restraint—When an oc-cupant sits on the rear center seat, al-ways pull up the rear center head re-straint to the lock position.The head restraint is most effective whenit is close to your head. Therefore, usinga cushion on the seatback is not recom-mended.

CAUTION

! Adjust the center of the head re-straint so that it is closest to thetop of your ears.

! After adjusting the head restraint,make sure it is locked in position.

! Do not drive with the head re-straints removed.

Seat heaters

Left sidefront seat

Right sidefront seat

To turn on the seat heater, push theswitch to “HI” (high heating tempera-ture) or “LO” (low heating temperature).At this time, the indicator light on ei-ther side will illuminate to indicate theseat heater is operating. To turn off theseat heater, push the switch lightly onthe opposite side.The ignition key must be in the “ON” posi-tion to operate seat heaters.

CAUTION

Occupants must use caution when op-erating the seat heater because itmay make them feel too hot or causeburns at low temperatures (erythema,varicella). Use extra caution for;! Babies, small children, elderly per-

sons, sick persons or persons withphysical disabilities

! Persons who have sensitive skin! Persons who are exhausted! Persons who have taken alcohol or

drugs which induce sleep (sleepingdrug, cold remedy, etc.)

To prevent the seat from overheating,do not use the seat heater with ablanket, cushion, or other insulatingobjects which cover the seat.

50

NOTICE

! Do not put unevenly weighed ob-jects on the seat and do not sticksharp objects (needles, nails, etc.)into the seat.

! When cleaning the seats, do notuse organic substances (paint thin-ner, benzine, alcohol, gasoline,etc.). They may damage the heaterand seat surface.

! To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, turn the switch offwhen the engine is not running.

Toyota strongly urges that the driver andpassengers in the vehicle be properly re-strained at all times with the seat beltsprovided. Failure to do so could increasethe chance of injury and/or the severity ofinjury in accidents.The seat belts provided for your vehicleare designed for people of adult size,large enough to properly wear them.Child. Use a child restraint system ap-propriate for the child until the child be-comes large enough to properly wear thevehicle’s seat belts. (For details, see“Child restraint” on page 78.)If a child is too large for a child restraintsystem, the child should sit in the rearseat and must be restrained using thevehicle’s seat belt. According to accidentstatistics, the child is safer when properlyrestrained in the rear seat than in thefront seat.If a child must sit in the front seat, theseat belts should be worn properly. If anaccident occurs and the seat belts are notworn properly, the force of the rapid infla-tion of the airbag may cause death orserious injury to the child.

Do not allow any children to stand up orkneel on either rear or front seats. Anunrestrained child could suffer serious in-jury or death during emergency braking ora collision. Also, do not let the child siton your lap. Holding a child in your armsdoes not provide sufficient restraint.Pregnant woman. Toyota recommends theuse of a seat belt. Ask your doctor forspecific recommendations. The lap beltshould be worn securely and as low aspossible over the hips and not on thewaist.Injured person. Toyota recommends theuse of a seat belt. Depending on the inju-ry, first check with your doctor for specificrecommendations.

Seat belts——Seat belt precautions

51

CAUTION

Persons should ride in their seatsproperly wearing their seat beltswhenever the vehicle is moving.Otherwise, they are much more likelyto suffer serious bodily injury ordeath in the event of sudden brakingor a collision.When using the seat belts, observethe following:! Use the belt for only one person at

a time. Do not use a single belt fortwo or more people—even children.

! Avoid reclining the seatback anymore than needed. The seat beltsprovide maximum protection in afrontal or rear collision when thedriver and the front passenger aresitting up straight and well back inthe seats. If you are reclined, thelap belt may slide past your hipsand apply restraint forces directlyto the abdomen or your neck maycontact the shoulder belt. In theevent of a frontal collision, themore the seat is reclined, the great-er the risk of death or personal in-jury.

! Be careful not to damage the beltwebbing or hardware. Take care thatthey do not get caught or pinchedin the seat or doors.

! Inspect the belt system periodically.Check for cuts, fraying, and looseparts. Damaged parts should be re-placed. Do not disassemble ormodify the system.

! Keep the belts clean and dry. Ifthey need cleaning, use a mild soapsolution or lukewarm water. Neveruse bleach, dye, or abrasive clean-ers, or allow them to come intocontact with the belt—they may se-verely weaken the belts. (See“Cleaning the interior” on page297.)

! Replace the belt assembly (includ-ing bolts) if it has been used in asevere impact. The entire assemblyshould be replaced even if damageis not obvious.

Tab

Buckle

Adjust the seat as needed and sit upstraight and well back in the seat. Tofasten your belt, pull it out of the re-tractor and insert the tab into thebuckle.You will hear a click when the tab locksinto the buckle.The seat belt length automatically adjuststo your size and the seat position.The retractor will lock the belt during asudden stop or on impact. It also maylock if you lean forward too quickly. Aslow easy motion will allow the belt toextend, and you can move around freely.

—Fastening 3- point seat belts

52

When a passenger’s shoulder belt is com-pletely extended and is then retractedeven slightly, the belt is locked in thatposition and cannot be extended. This fea-ture is used to hold the child restraintsystem securely. (For details, see “Childrestraint” on page 78.) To free the beltagain, fully retract the belt and then pullthe belt out once more.If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of theretractor, firmly pull the belt and releaseit. You will then be able to smoothly pullthe belt out of the retractor.

CAUTION

! After inserting the tab, make surethe tab and buckle are locked andthat the lap and shoulder portionsof the belt are not twisted.

! Do not insert coins, clips, etc. inthe buckle as this may prevent youfrom properly latching the tab andbuckle.

! If the seat belt does not functionnormally, immediately contact yourToyota dealer. Do not use the seatuntil the seat belt is fixed, becauseit cannot protect an adult occupantor your child from death or seriousinjury.

Take up slack

Keep as low on hips as possible

Too high

Adjust the position of the lap andshoulder belts.Position the lap belt as low as possibleon your hips–not on your waist, then ad-just it to a snug fit by pulling the shoulderportion upward through the latch plate.

CAUTION

! Both high- positioned lap belts andloose- fitting belts could cause seri-ous injuries due to sliding under thelap belt during a collision or otherunintended event. Keep the lap beltpositioned as low on hips as pos-sible.

! Do not place the shoulder belt un-der your arm.

53

l13197b

Seat belts with an adjustable shoulderanchor—Adjust the shoulder anchor position toyour size.To raise: Slide the anchor up.To lower: Push in the lock release buttonand slide the anchor down.After adjustment, make sure the anchor islocked in position.

CAUTION

Always make sure the shoulder beltis positioned across the center ofyour shoulder. The belt should bekept away from your neck, but notfalling off your shoulder. Failure todo so could reduce the amount ofprotection in an accident and causeserious injuries in a collision.

To release the belt, press the bucklerelease button and allow the belt toretract.If the belt does not retract smoothly, pullit out and check for kinks or twists. Thenmake sure it remains untwisted as it re-tracts.

54

—Fastening 2- point seat belts

Lengthen

TabBuckle

Sit up straight and well back in theseat. To fasten your belt, insert the tabinto the buckle.You will hear a click when the tab locksinto the buckle.If the belt is not long enough for you, holdthe tab at a right angle to the belt andpull on the tab.

CAUTION

! After inserting the tab, make surethe tab and buckle are locked andthat the lap portion of the belt isnot twisted.


! If the seat belt does not functionnormally, immediately contact yourToyota dealer. Do not use the seatuntil the seat belt is fixed, becauseit cannot protect an adult occupantor your child from injury.

Too high

Adjust to a snug fit

Keep as low on hips as possible

Remove excess length of the belt andadjust the belt position.To shorten the belt, pull the free end ofthe belt.Position the lap belt as low as possibleon your hips—not on your waist, then ad-just it to a snug fit.

CAUTION

Both high- positioned and loose- fit-ting lap belts could cause serious in-juries due to sliding under the lap beltduring a collision or other unintendedevent. Keep the lap belt positioned aslow on hips as possible.

55

To release the belt, press the bucklerelease button.

—Seat belt extenderIf your seat belts cannot be fastened se-curely because they are not long enough,a personalized seat belt extender is avail-able from your Toyota dealer free ofcharge.Please contact your local Toyota dealer sothat the dealer can order the proper re-quired length for the extender. Bring theheaviest coat you expect to wear for prop-er measurement and selection of length.Additional ordering information is availableat your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

When using the seat belt extender,observe the following precautions.Failure to follow these instructionscould reduce the effectiveness of theseat belt restraint system in case ofan accident, increasing the chance ofpersonal injury.! Remember that the extender pro-

vided for you may not be safe whenused on a different vehicle, foranother person, or at a differentseating position than the one origi-nally intended.

! If the seat belt extender has beenconnected to the driver’s seat beltbuckle without the driver actuallywearing the seat belt, the SRS driv-er’s airbag system will judge thatthe driver is wearing it. In thiscase, the driver’s airbag may notactivate correctly, causing death orserious injury in the event of colli-sion. Be sure to wear the seat beltwith the seat belt extender.

56

! Do not use the seat belt extenderif it is not absolutely necessary.

! Do not use the seat belt extenderwhen installing a child restraintsystem on the front or rear passen-ger seat. If installing a child re-straint system with the seat beltextender connected to the seat belt,the seat belt will not securely holdthe child restraint system, whichcould cause death or serious injuryto the child or other passengers inthe event of collision.

To connect the extender to the seatbelt, insert the tab into the seat beltbuckle so that the “PRESS” signs onthe buckle release buttons of the ex-tender and the seat belt are both facingoutward as shown.You will hear a click when the tab locksinto the buckle.When releasing the seat belt, press onthe buckle release button on the extender,not on the seat belt. This helps preventdamage to the vehicle interior and extend-er itself.When not in use, remove the extenderand store in the vehicle for future use.

CAUTION

! After inserting the tab, make surethe tab and buckle are locked andthat the lap and shoulder portionsof the belt and the seat belt extend-er are not twisted.


! If the seat belt does not functionnormally, immediately contact yourToyota dealer. Do not use the seatuntil the seat belt is fixed, becauseit cannot protect an adult occupantor your child from injury.

57

—Seat belt pretensioners

The driver and front passenger seat beltpretensioners are designed to be acti-vated in response to a severe frontalimpact or a vehicle rollover.When the sensor detects a severe frontalimpact or a vehicle rollover, the front seatbelts are quickly drawn back by the re-tractor so that the belts snugly restrainthe occupants.The seat belt pretensioners are activatedeven with no passenger in the front seat.The seat belt pretensioners and SRS air-bags may not operate together in all colli-sions.

Roll sensing of curtain shield airbagsoff indicator lightThe seat belt pretensioners will not oper-ate in a vehicle rollover if the roll sensingof curtain shield airbags off indicator lightis on. For details, see “Roll sensing ofcurtain shield airbags off switch” on page68.

CAUTION

! Make sure the roll sensing of cur-tain shield airbags off indicatorlight is not on.

! When the roll sensing of curtainshield airbags off switch is turnedon (and the roll sensing of curtainshield airbags off indicator light ison), the seat belt pretensioners willnot operate in a vehicle rolloverand turning off the seat belt preten-sioners can reduce the occupantprotection which your vehicle safetysystems can provide to you in cer-tain accidents and increase the like-lihood of death or serious injuries.

58

The seat belt pretensioner system con-sists mainly of the following components,and their locations are shown in the il-lustration.1. Front airbag sensors2. SRS warning light3. Seat belt pretensioner assemblies4. Airbag sensor assemblyThe seat belt pretensioners are controlledby the airbag sensor assembly. The airbagsensor assembly consists of a safing sen-sor and airbag sensor.

When the seat belt pretensioners are acti-vated, an operating noise may be heardand a small amount of non- toxic gas maybe released. This does not indicate thata fire is occurring. This gas is normallyharmless.Once the seat belt pretensioners havebeen activated, the seat belt retractorsremain locked.

CAUTION

! Do not modify, remove, strike oropen the seat belt pretensioner as-semblies, airbag sensor or sur-rounding area or wiring. Failure tofollow these instructions may pre-vent the seat belt pretensionersfrom activating correctly, cause sud-den operation of the system or dis-able the system, which could resultin death or serious injury.

! Do not use tires or wheels otherthan the manufacturer’s recom-mended size. Such a use may causethe curtain shield airbags and seatbelt pretensioners to inflate acci-dentally, resulting in death or seri-ous injury. For details, see “Check-ing and replacing tires” on page323.

! Do not place luggage heavier thanspecified on the roof luggage carri-er. Such luggage may cause thecurtain shield airbags and seat beltpretensioners to inflate accidentally,resulting in death or serious injury.For details, see “Roof luggage car-rier” on page 218.

! Do not modify or change the sus-pension system. Such changes maycause the curtain shield airbags toinflate accidentally, resulting indeath or serious injury.

Failure to follow these instructionscan result in death or serious inju-ries. Consult your Toyota dealerabout any repair and modification.

59

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the followingchanges without consulting yourToyota dealer. Such changes caninterfere with proper operation of theseat belt pretensioners in somecases.! Installation of electronic devices

such as a mobile two- way radio,cassette tape player or compactdisc player

! Repairs on or near the front seatbelt retractor assemblies

! Modification of the front end struc-ture

! Attachment of a grille guard (bullbar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,winches or any other equipment tothe front end

! Repairs made on or near the frontfenders, front end structure or con-sole

This indicator comes on when the igni-tion key is turned to the “ON” position.It goes off after about 6 seconds. Thismeans the seat belt pretensioners areoperating properly.This warning light system monitors theairbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-sors, side and curtain shield airbag sensorassemblies, curtain shield airbag sensorassemblies, driver’s seat position sensor,driver’s seat belt buckle switch, seat beltpretensioner assemblies, inflators, rollsensing of curtain shield airbags off indi-cator light, interconnecting wiring and pow-er sources. (For details, see “Service re-minder indicators and warning buzzers” onpage 124.)

If any of the following conditions occurs,this indicates a malfunction of the airbagsor seat belt pretensioners. Contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible.! The light does not come on when the

ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-tion or remains on for more than 6seconds or flashes.

! The light comes on or starts flashingwhile driving.

! If any seat belt does not retract or cannot be pulled out due to a malfunctionor activation of the relevant seat beltpretensioner.

! The seat belt pretensioner assembly orsurrounding area has been damaged.

60

In the following cases, contact your Toyotadealer as soon as possible:! The front of the vehicle (shaded in the

illustration) was involved in an accidentthat was not severe enough to causethe seat belt pretensioners to operate.

! The seat belt pretensioner assembly orsurrounding area is scratched, cracked,or otherwise damaged.

13c560

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem) front airbags are designed to pro-vide further protection for the driverand front passenger in addition to theprimary safety protection provided bythe seat belts.In response to a severe frontal impact,the SRS front airbags work together withthe seat belts to help reduce injury byinflating. The SRS front airbags help re-duce injuries mainly to the driver’s or frontpassenger’s head or chest caused by hit-ting the vehicle interior.The front passenger airbag is activatedeven with no passenger in the front seat.Always wear your seat belt properly.

CAUTION

! The SRS front airbag system is de-signed only as a supplement to theprimary protection of the driver andfront passenger seat belt systems.The driver and front passenger canbe killed or seriously injured by theinflating airbags if they do not wearthe available seat belts properly.During sudden braking just beforea collision, an unrestrained driveror front passenger can move for-ward into direct contact with orclose proximity to the airbag whichmay then deploy during the colli-sion. To ensure maximum protectionin an accident, the driver and allpassengers in the vehicle mustwear their seat belts properly. Wear-ing a seat belt properly during anaccident reduces the chances ofdeath or serious injury or beingthrown out of the vehicle. Forinstructions and precautions con-cerning the seat belt system, see“Seat belts” on page 50.

SRS driver airbag and frontpassenger airbag

61

! Improperly seated and/or restrainedinfants and children can be killedor seriously injured by the deploy-ing airbags. An infant or child whois too small to use a seat beltshould be properly secured using achild restraint system. Toyotastrongly recommends that all in-fants and children be placed in therear seat of the vehicle and proper-ly restrained. The rear seat is thesafest for infants and children. Forinstructions concerning the installa-tion of a child restraint system, see“Child restraint” on page 78.

The SRS front airbags are designed todeploy in severe (usually frontal) colli-sions where the magnitude and durationof the forward deceleration of the ve-hicle exceeds the designed thresholdlevel.The SRS front airbags will deploy if theseverity of the impact is above the de-signed threshold level, comparable to anapproximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collisionwhen the vehicle has the impact straightinto a fixed barrier that does not move ordeform.However, this threshold velocity will beconsiderably higher if the vehicle strikesan object, such as a parked vehicle orsign pole, which can move or deform onimpact, or if the vehicle is involved in anunderride collision (e.g. a collision inwhich the front of the vehicle “underrides”,or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).It is possible that in some collisionswhere the forward deceleration of the ve-hicle is very close to the designed thresh-old level, the SRS front airbags and theseat belt pretensioners may not activatetogether.Always wear your seat belts properly.

Collision from the rear

Collision from the side

Vehicle rollover

The SRS front airbags are generally notdesigned to inflate if the vehicle is in-volved in a side or rear collision, if itrolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision. But, whenever acollision of any type causes sufficientforward deceleration of the vehicle, de-ployment of the SRS front airbags mayoccur.

62

Hitting a curb,edge of pavementor hard surface

Falling into orjumping over adeep hole

Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS front airbags may also deployif a severe impact occurs to the under-side of your vehicle. Some examplesare shown in the illustration.

The SRS front airbag system consistsmainly of the following components, andtheir locations are shown in the illustra-tion.1. Front airbag sensors2. SRS warning light3. Airbag module for front passenger

(airbag and inflator)4. Airbag sensor assembly5. Airbag module for driver

(airbag and inflator)6. Driver’s seat position sensor7. Driver’s seat belt buckle switchThe airbag sensor assembly consists of asafing sensor and airbag sensor.

The front airbag sensors constantly moni-tor the forward deceleration of the vehicle.If an impact results in a forward decelera-tion beyond the designed threshold level,the system triggers the airbag inflators. Atthis time a chemical reaction in the inflat-ors very quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the forward mo-tion of the occupants. The front airbagsthen quickly deflate, so that there is noobstruction of the driver’s vision should itbe necessary to continue driving.When the airbags inflate, they produce aloud noise and release some smoke andresidue along with non- toxic gas. Thisdoes not indicate a fire. This smoke mayremain inside the vehicle for some time,and may cause some minor irritation tothe eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure towash off any residue as soon as possibleto prevent any potential skin irritation withsoap and water.If you can safely exit from the vehicle,you should do so immediately.

63

Deployment of the airbags happens in afraction of a second, so the airbags mustinflate with considerable force. While thesystem is designed to reduce serious inju-ries, primarily to the head and chest, itmay also cause other, less severe injuriesto the face, chest, arms and hands. Theseare usually in the nature of minor burnsor abrasions and swelling, but the force ofa deploying airbag can cause more seri-ous injuries, especially if an occupant’shands, arms, chest or head is in closeproximity to the airbag module at the timeof deployment. This is why it is importantfor the occupant to: avoid placing anyobject or part of the body between theoccupant and the airbag module; sitstraight and well back into the seat; wearthe available seat belt properly; and sit asfar as possible from the airbag module,while still maintaining control of the ve-hicle.Parts of the airbag module (steering wheelhub, airbag cover and inflator) may be hotfor several minutes after deployment, sodo not touch! The airbags inflate onlyonce. The windshield may be damaged byabsorbing some of the force of the inflat-ing airbag.

CAUTION

The driver or front passenger who istoo close to the steering wheel ordashboard during airbag deploymentcan be killed or seriously injured.Toyota strongly recommends that:! The driver sit as far back as pos-

sible from the steering wheel whilestill maintaining control of the ve-hicle.

! The front passenger sit as far backas possible from the dashboard.

! All vehicle occupants be properlyrestrained using the available seatbelts.

! If the seat belt extender has beenconnected to the driver’s seat beltbuckle without wearing the seat beltwhen using the extender in thedriver’s seat, the SRS driver’s air-bag system will judge that the driv-er wears the seat belt even if notwearing it. In this case, the driver’sairbag may not activate correctly,causing death or serious injury inthe event of collision. Be sure towear the seat belt with the seat beltextender.

For instructions and precautions con-cerning the seating position, see“—Front seat precautions” on page36.

64

! Do not sit on the edge of the seator lean against the dashboard whenthe vehicle is in use, since thefront passenger airbag could inflatewith considerable speed and force.Anyone who is up against, or veryclose to, an airbag when it inflates,can be killed or seriously injured.Sit up straight and well back in theseat, and always use your seat beltproperly.

! Toyota strongly recommends that allinfants and children be placed inthe rear seat of the vehicle and beproperly restrained.

! Do not allow a child to stand up orkneel on the front passenger seat,since the front passenger airbagcould inflate with considerablespeed and force. Otherwise, thechild may be killed or seriously in-jured.

! Do not hold a child on your lap orin your arms. Use a child restraintsystem in the rear seat. For instruc-tions concerning the installation ofa child restraint system, see “Childrestraint” on page 78.

65

! Do not put anything or any part ofyour body on or in front of thedashboard or steering wheel padthat houses the front airbag sys-tem. They might restrict inflation orcause death or serious injury asthey are projected rearward by theforce of deploying airbags. Like-wise, the driver and front passengershould not hold objects in theirarms or on their knees.

! Do not modify or remove any wir-ing. Do not modify, remove, strikeor open any components such asthe steering wheel pad, steeringwheel, column cover, dashboardnear the front passenger airbag,front passenger airbag or airbagsensor assembly. Doing so may pre-vent the front airbag system fromactivating correctly, cause suddenactivation of the system or disablethe system, resulting in death orserious injury.

Failure to follow these instructionscan result in death or serious injury.Consult your Toyota dealer about anyrepair and modification.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the followingchanges without consulting yourToyota dealer. Such changes caninterfere with proper operation of theSRS front airbag system in somecases.! Installation of electronic devices

such as a mobile two- way radio,cassette tape player or compactdisc player

! Modification of the suspension sys-tem

! Modification of the front end struc-ture

! Attachment of a grille guard (bullbar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,winches or any other equipment tothe front end

! Repairs made on or near the frontfenders, front end structure, con-sole, steering column, steeringwheel or dashboard near the frontpassenger airbag

66

The indicator comes on when the igni-tion key is turned to the “ON” position.It goes off after about 6 seconds. Thismeans the SRS front airbags are oper-ating properly.This warning light system monitors theairbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-sors, side and curtain shield airbag sensorassemblies, curtain shield airbag sensorassemblies, driver’s seat position sensor,driver’s seat belt buckle switch, seat beltpretensioner assemblies, inflators, rollsensing of curtain shield airbags off indi-cator light, interconnecting wiring and pow-er sources. (For details, see “Service re-minder indicators and warning buzzers” onpage 124.)




In the following cases, contact your Toyotadealer as soon as possible:! The SRS front airbags have been in-

flated.! The front of the vehicle (shaded in the

illustration) was involved in an accidentthat was not severe enough to causethe SRS front airbags to inflate.

! The pad section of the steering wheelor dashboard (shaded in the illustra-tion) is scratched, cracked, or other-wise damaged.

NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cablesbefore contacting your Toyota dealer.

67

13c561a

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem) side airbags and curtain shield air-bags are designed to provide furtherprotection for the driver, front passen-ger and second seat passengers inaddition to the primary safety protec-tion provided by the seat belts.

In response to a severe side impact, theSRS side airbags and curtain shield air-bags on impacted side work with the seatbelts to help reduce injury by inflating.The SRS side airbags help reduce injuriesmainly to the driver’s or front passenger’schest, and the SRS curtain shield airbagshelp reduce injuries mainly to the driver’s,front passenger’s or second seat passen-ger’s head and can help the driver, frontpassenger and second seat passengers toretain inside the vehicle.Roll sensing function:In response to a vehicle rollover, the SRScurtain shield airbags on both sides workwith the seat belts to help reduce injuryby inflating. The SRS curtain shield air-bags help reduce injuries mainly to thedriver’s, front passenger’s or second seatpassenger’s head and can help the driver,front passenger and second seat passen-gers to retain inside the vehicle.The SRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag on the passenger side are activatedeven with no passenger in the front seat.Always wear your seat belt properly.

CAUTION

! The SRS side airbag and curtainshield airbag system is designedonly as a supplement to the prima-ry protection of the driver, frontpassenger and second seat passen-ger seat belt systems. To ensuremaximum protection in an accident,the driver and all passengers in thevehicle must wear their seat beltsproperly. Wearing a seat belt prop-erly during an accident reduces thechances of death or serious injuryor being thrown out of the vehicle.For instructions and precautionsconcerning the seat belt system,see “Seat belts” on page 50.

SRS side airbags and curtainshield airbags with roll sens-ing function

68

! Do not allow anyone to lean his/herhead or any part of his/her bodyagainst the door or the area of theseat, front pillar, rear pillar or roofside rail from which the SRS sideairbag and curtain shield airbagdeploy even if he/she is a childseated in the child restraint system.It is dangerous if the SRS side air-bag and curtain shield airbag in-flate, and the impact of the deploy-ing airbags could cause death orserious injury to the occupant.

! Improperly seated and/or restrainedinfants and children can be killedor seriously injured by the deploy-ing airbags. An infant or child whois too small to use a seat beltshould be properly secured using achild restraint system. Toyotastrongly recommends that all in-fants and children be placed in therear seats of the vehicle and prop-erly restrained. The rear seats arethe safest for infants and children.For instructions concerning theinstallation of a child restraint sys-tem, see “Child restraint” on page78.

Roll sensing of curtain shield airbagsoff switchThe roll sensing of curtain shield air-bags off switch can turn off the curtainshield airbags in a vehicle rollover. Thisswitch should only be used in a situa-tion where the inflation is not desired(such as extreme- off road driving).

When you push the roll sensing of curtainshield airbags off switch for a few sec-onds with the ignition switch on, the rollsensing of curtain shield airbags off indi-cator light comes on and the roll sensingfunction is turned off. When you push theswitch again, the indicator light goes offand the roll sensing function is turned on.In a severe side impact, the curtain shieldairbag on impacted side will inflate evenif the roll sensing function is turned off.If the ignition switch is turned to “ACC” or“LOCK” with the roll sensing function offand then the ignition switch is turned backto “ON”, the roll sensing function will beback on automatically.

69

CAUTION

! Make sure the roll sensing of cur-tain shield airbags off indicatorlight is not on.

! When the roll sensing of curtainshield airbags off switch is turnedon (and the roll sensing of curtainshield airbags off indicator light ison), the curtain shield airbags willnot inflate in a vehicle rollover andturning off the curtain shield air-bags can reduce the occupantprotection which your vehicle safetysystems can provide to you in cer-tain accidents and increase the like-lihood of death or serious injuries.

The SRS side airbags may not activateif the vehicle is subjected to a collisionfrom the side at certain angles, or acollision to the side of the vehicle bodyother than the passenger compartmentas shown in the illustration.The SRS side airbags are designed toinflate when the passenger compartmentarea suffers a severe impact from theside.Always wear your seat belts properly.

Collision from the rear

Collision from the front

Vehicle rollover

The SRS side airbags are generally notdesigned to inflate if the vehicle is in-volved in a front or rear collision, if itrolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side collision.

70

The curtain shield airbags may not acti-vate if the vehicle is subjected to acollision from the side at certainangles, or a collision to the side of thevehicle body other than the passengercompartment as shown in the illustra-tion.The curtain shield airbags are designed toinflate when the passenger compartmentarea suffers a severe impact from theside or vehicle rollover.Always wear your seat belts properly.

The angle ofvehicle tip- upis marginal

Skidding vehiclehitting a curbstone

The curtain shield airbags may inflateif the angle of vehicle tip- up is margin-al or if the skidding vehicle’s tires hita curb stone laterally as shown in theillustration.

Collision fromthe front Collision from

the rear

Pitch end over end

The curtain shield airbags are generallynot designed to inflate if the vehicle isinvolved in a front or rear collision, ifit pitches end over end or if it is in-volved in a low- speed side collision.

71

Hitting a curb, edge ofpavement or hard sur-face

Falling into or jump-ing over a deep hole

Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS side airbags and curtain shieldairbags may deploy if a severe impactoccurs to the underside of your vehicle.Some examples are shown in the il-lustration.

13c538c

The SRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system consists mainly of the fol-lowing components, and their locations areshown in the illustration.1. SRS warning light2. Curtain shield airbag modules

(airbag and inflator)3. Side airbag modules

(airbag and inflator)4. Curtain shield airbag sensors5. Side and curtain shield airbag sensors6. Airbag sensor assembly

The SRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system is controlled by the airbagsensor assembly. The airbag sensor as-sembly consists of a safing sensor andairbag sensor.In a severe side impact, the side andcurtain shield airbag sensor and/or thecurtain shield airbag sensor trigger(s) theside airbag inflators and/or the curtainshield airbag inflators. At this time, achemical reaction in the inflators quicklyfills the airbags with non- toxic gas to helprestrain the lateral motion of the occu-pants.In a vehicle rollover, the airbag sensorassembly triggers the curtain shield airbaginflator. At this time, a chemical reactionin the inflators quickly fills the airbagswith non- toxic gas to help restrain thelateral motion of front and second seatoccupants.

72

When the airbags inflate, they produce afairly loud noise and release some smokeand residue along with non- toxic gas. Thisdoes not indicate a fire. This smoke mayremain inside the vehicle for some time,and may cause some minor irritation tothe eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure towash off any residue as soon as possibleto prevent any potential skin irritation withsoap and water. If you can safely exitfrom the vehicle, you should do so imme-diately.Deployment of the airbags happens in afraction of a second, so the airbags mustinflate with considerable force. While thesystem is designed to reduce serious inju-ries, it may also cause minor burns orabrasions and swelling.Front seats as well as parts of the frontand rear pillar, front, center and rear gar-nish and roof interior may be hot for sev-eral minutes, but the airbags themselveswill not be hot. The airbags are designedto inflate only once.

CAUTION

SRS side airbags and curtain shieldairbags inflate with considerableforce. To reduce the possibility ofdeath or serious injury when they in-flate, the driver, front passenger andsecond seat passengers must:! Wear their seat belts properly.! Remain properly seated with their

backs upright and against the seatsat all times.

13c562

! Do not allow anyone to lean againstthe door when the vehicle is in use,since the side airbag and curtainshield airbag could inflate with con-siderable speed and force. Other-wise, he/she may be killed or seri-ously injured. Special care shouldbe taken especially when you havea small child in the vehicle.

73

! Sit up straight and well back in theseat, distributing your weight evenlyin the seat. Do not apply excessiveweight to the outer side of theseats with a side airbag and to thefront and rear pillar, front, centerand rear garnish and roof interiorwith the curtain shield airbag.

! Improper sitting and wearing of theseat belts may not retain you insidethe vehicle.

! Make sure the roll sensing of cur-tain shield airbags off indicator isnot on. The curtain shield airbagswill not inflate in a vehicle rolloverif this indicator light is on and youmay be killed or seriously injured.

13c563

! Do not allow anyone to get his/herhead close to the area where theside airbag and curtain shield air-bag inflate, since these airbagscould inflate with considerablespeed and force. Otherwise, he/shemay be killed or serious injured.Special care should be taken espe-cially when you have a small childin the vehicle.

74

! Do not allow anyone to kneel onthe passenger seat, facing the pas-senger’s side door, since the sideairbag and curtain shield airbagcould inflate with considerablespeed and force. Otherwise, he/shemay be killed or seriously injured.Special care should be taken espe-cially when you have a small childin the vehicle.

! Do not allow anyone to get his/herhead or hands out of windows,since the curtain shield airbagscould inflate with considerablespeed and force. Otherwise, he/shemay be killed or seriously injured.Special care should be taken espe-cially when you have a small childin the vehicle.

! Do not attach a cup holder or anyother device or object on or aroundthe door. When the side airbag in-flates, the cup holder or any otherdevice or object will be thrown withgreat force, or the side airbags maynot activate correctly, resulting indeath or serious injury. Likewise,the driver and front passengershould not hold objects in theirarms or on their knees.

75

13c800b

! Do not attach a microphone or anyother device or object around thearea where the curtain shield airbagactivates such as on the windshieldglass, side door glass, front, centerand roof side garnish, roof interioror assist grips. When the curtainshield airbag inflates, the micro-phone or other device or object willbe thrown away with great force orthe curtain shield airbag may notactivate correctly, resulting in deathor serious injury.

! Do not hook a hanger, heavy orsharp pointed objects on the coathook. If the curtain shield airbagsinflate, those items will be thrownaway with great force or the curtainshield airbags may not activate cor-rectly, resulting in death or seriousinjury. When you hang clothes,hang them on the coat hook direct-ly.

! Do not use seat accessories whichcover the parts where the side air-bags inflate. Such accessories mayprevent the side airbags from acti-vating correctly, causing death orserious injury.

! Do not modify or replace the seatsor upholstery of the seats with sideairbags. Such changes may preventthe side airbag system from activat-ing correctly, disable the system orcause the side airbags to inflate ac-cidentally, resulting in death or seri-ous injury.

! Do not disassemble or repair thefront and rear pillars and roof siderails containing the curtain shieldairbags. Such changes may disablethe system or cause the curtainshield airbags to inflate accidental-ly, resulting in death or serious in-jury.

! Do not modify or change the sus-pension system. Such changes maycause the curtain shield airbags toinflate accidentally, resulting indeath or serious injury.

! Do not use tires or wheels otherthan the manufacturer’s recom-mended size. Such a use may causethe curtain shield airbags to inflateaccidentally, resulting in death orserious injury. For details, see“Checking and replacing tires” onpage 323.

76

! Do not place luggage heavier thanspecified on the roof luggage carri-er. Such luggage may cause thecurtain shield airbags to inflate ac-cidentally, resulting in death or seri-ous injury. For details, see “Roofluggage carrier” on page 218.

Failure to follow these instructionscan result in death or serious injury.Consult your Toyota dealer about anyrepair and modification.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the followingchanges without consulting yourToyota dealer. Such changes can in-terfere with proper operation of theSRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system in some cases.! Installation of electronic devices

such as a mobile two- way radio,cassette tape player or compactdisc player.

! Modification of the side structure ofthe passenger compartment.

! Repairs made on or near the con-sole or front seat.

The indicator comes on when the igni-tion key is turned to the “ON” position.It goes off after about 6 seconds. Thismeans the SRS side airbags and curtainshield airbags are operating properly.This warning light system monitors theairbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-sors, side and curtain shield airbag sensorassemblies, curtain shield airbag sensorassemblies, driver’s seat position sensor,driver’s seat belt buckle switch, seat beltpretensioner assemblies, inflators, rollsensing of curtain shield airbags off indi-cator light, interconnecting wiring and pow-er sources. (For details, see “Service re-minder indicators and warning buzzers” onpage 124.)

77




In the following cases, contact your Toyotadealer as soon as possible:! Any of the SRS side airbags and cur-

tain shield airbags have been inflated.! The portion of the doors (shaded in the

illustration) was involved in an accidentthat was not severe enough to causethe SRS side airbags and curtainshield airbags to inflate.

! The surface of the seats with the sideairbag (shaded in the illustration) isscratched, cracked, or otherwise dam-aged.

! The portion of the front, center andrear garnish, or roof interior containingthe curtain shield airbags inside(shaded in the illustration) is scratched,cracked, or otherwise damaged.

NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cablesbefore contacting your Toyota dealer.

78

Toyota strongly urges the use of ap-propriate child restraint systems forchildren.The laws of all 50 states in the U.S.A.now require the use of a child restraintsystem.Your vehicle conforms to SAEJ1819.If a child is too large for a child restraintsystem, the child should sit in the rearseat and must be restrained using thevehicle’s seat belt. See “Seat belts” onpage 50 for details.

CAUTION

! For effective protection in automo-bile accidents and sudden stops, achild must be properly restrained,using a seat belt or child restraintsystem depending on the age andsize of the child. Holding a child inyour arms is not a substitute for achild restraint system. In an acci-dent, the child can be crushedagainst the windshield, or betweenyou and the vehicle’s interior.

! Toyota strongly urges use of aproper child restraint system whichconforms to the size of the child,installed on the rear seat. Accord-ing to accident statistics, the childis safer when properly restrained inthe rear seat than in the front seat.

! Never install a rear- facing child re-straint system on the front passen-ger seat. In the event of an acci-dent, the force of the rapid inflationof the front passenger airbag cancause death or serious injury to thechild if the rear- facing child re-straint system is installed on thefront passenger seat.

! A forward- facing child restraint sys-tem should be allowed to beinstalled on the front passengerseat only when it is unavoidable.Always move the seat as far backas possible, because the front pas-senger airbag could inflate withconsiderable speed and force.Otherwise, the child may be killedor seriously injured.

! On vehicle with side airbags andcurtain shield airbags, do not allowthe child to lean his/her head orany part of his/her body against thedoor or the area of the seat, frontor rear pillar, front, center or reargarnish or roof interior from whichthe side airbags or curtain shieldairbags deploy even if the child isseated in the child restraint system.It is dangerous if the side airbagand curtain shield airbag inflate,and the impact could cause deathor serious injury to the child.

! Do not use the seat belt extenderwhen installing a child restraintsystem on the front or rear passen-ger seat. If installing a child re-straint system with the seat beltextender connected to the seat belt,the seat belt will not securely holdthe child restraint system, whichcould cause death or serious injuryto the child or other passengers inthe event of collision.

Child restraint——Child restraint precautions

79

! Make sure you have complied withall installation instructions providedby the child restraint manufacturerand that the system is properly se-cured. It is not secured properly, itmay cause death or serious injuryto the child in the event of a stopor accident.

—Child restraint systemA child restraint system for a smallchild or baby must itself be properlyrestrained on the seat with the lap por-tion of the lap/shoulder belt. You mustcarefully consult the manufacturer’sinstructions which accompany the childrestraint system.To provide proper restraint, use a childrestraint system following the manufactur-er’s instructions about the appropriate ageand size of the child for the child restraintsystem.Install the child restraint system correctlyfollowing the instructions provided by itsmanufacturer. General directions are alsoprovided under the following illustrations.The child restraint system should beinstalled on the rear seat. According toaccident statistics, the child is safer whenproperly restrained in the rear seat thanin the front seat.When not using the child restraint system,keep it secured with the seat belt or placeit somewhere other than the passengercompartment. This will prevent it from in-juring passengers in the event of a sud-den stop or accident.

Child restraint systems are classified intothe following 3 types depending on thechild’s age and size.(A) Infant seat(B) Convertible seat(C) Booster seatInstall the child restraint system followingthe instructions provided by its manufac-turer.Your vehicle has anchor brackets for se-curing the top strap of a child restraintsystem. For instructions about how to usethe anchor bracket, see “Using a topstrap” on page 94.Child restraint lower anchorages approvedfor your vehicle may also be used. See“Installation with child restraint lower an-chorages” on page 96.

—Types of child restraint system

80

(A) Infant seat

(B) Convertible seat

(C) Booster seat(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATIONAn infant seat must be used in rear-facing position only.

—Installation with 2- pointtype seat belt

81

CAUTION

Do not install a child restraint systemon the third seat if it interferes withthe lock mechanism of the secondseats. Otherwise, the child or secondseat occupant(s) may be killed or se-riously injured in case of suddenbraking or a collision.

1. Run the center lap belt through oraround the infant seat following theinstructions provided by its manufactur-er and insert the tab into the buckletaking care not to twist the lap belt.

CAUTION



! If the seat belt does not functionnormally, it cannot protect yourchild from death or serious injury.Contact your Toyota dealerimmediately. Do not install the childrestraint system on the seat untilthe seat belt is fixed.

82

2. While pressing the infant seat firmlyagainst the seat cushion and seatback,tighten the lap belt by pulling its freeend to hold the infant seat securely.

CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint sys-tem in different directions to be sureit is secure. Follow all the installationinstruction provided by its manufac-turer.

3. To remove the infant seat, press thebuckle release button.

83

(B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATIONA convertible seat must be used in for-ward- facing or rear- facing position de-pending on the age and size of thechild. When installing, follow themanufacturer’s instruction about the ap-plicable age and size of the child aswell as directions for installing thechild restraint system.

CAUTION

Do not install a child restraint systemon the third seat if it interferes withthe lock mechanism of the secondseats. Otherwise, the child or secondseat occupant(s) may be killed or se-riously injured in case of suddenbraking or a collision.

1. Run the center lap belt through oraround the convertible seat followingthe instructions provided by itsmanufacturer and insert the tab intothe buckle taking care not to twist thelap belt.

84

CAUTION




2. While pressing the convertible seatfirmly against the seat cushion andseatback, tighten the lap belt by pullingits free end to hold the convertible seatsecurely.

CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint sys-tem in different directions to be sureit is secure. Follow all the installationinstructions provided by its manufac-turer.

85

3. To remove the convertible seat, pressthe buckle release button.

13c564

(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATIONAn infant seat must be used in rear-facing position only.

13c565

CAUTION

! Never install a rear- facing child re-straint system on the front passen-ger seat. In the event of an acci-dents, the force of the rapid infla-tion of the front passenger airbagcan cause death or serious injuryto the child if the rear- facing childrestraint system is installed on thefront passenger seat.

—Installation with 3- pointtype seat belt

86

! Do not install a child restraint sys-tem on the third seat if it interfereswith the lock mechanism of the sec-ond seats. Otherwise, the child orsecond seat occupant(s) may bekilled or seriously injured in caseof sudden braking or a collision.

! If the driver’s seat position doesnot allow sufficient space for safeinstallation, install the child re-straint system on the second rightseat.

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt throughor around the infant seat following theinstructions provided by its manufactur-er and insert the tab into the buckletaking care not to twist the belt. Keepthe lap portion of the belt tight.

CAUTION


! Do not insert coins, clips, etc. inthe buckle as this may prevent yourchild from properly latching the taband buckle.


87

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put itin the lock mode. When the belt isthen retracted even slightly, it cannotbe extended.

To hold the infant seat securely, makesure the belt is in the lock mode beforeletting the belt retract.

3. While pressing the infant seat firmlyagainst the seat cushion and seatback,let the shoulder belt retract as far asit will go to hold the infant seat secure-ly.

CAUTION


88

4. To remove the infant seat, press thebuckle release button and allow thebelt to retract completely. The belt willmove freely again and be ready towork for an adult or older child passen-ger.

13c566

(B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATIONA convertible seat must be used in for-ward- facing or rear- facing position de-pending on the age and size of thechild. When installing, follow themanufacturer’s instructions about theappropriate age and size of the child aswell as directions for installing thechild restraint system.

13c567

CAUTION

! Never install a rear- facing child re-straint system on the front passen-ger seat. In the event of an acci-dent, the force of the rapid inflationof the front passenger airbag cancause death or serious injury to thechild if the rear- facing child re-straint system is installed on thefront passenger seat.

89

13c568

Move seat fully back


! On vehicle with side airbags andcurtain shield airbags, do not allowthe child to lean his/her head orany part of his/her body against thedoor or the area of the seat, frontor rear pillar, front, center or reargarnish or roof interior from whichthe side airbags or curtain shieldairbags deploy even if the child isseated in a child restraint system.It is dangerous if the side airbagand curtain shield airbag inflate,and the impact could cause deathor serious injury to the child.

13c501b

! Do not install a child restraint sys-tem on the third seat if it interfereswith the lock mechanism of the sec-ond seats. Otherwise, the child orsecond seat occupant(s) may bekilled or serious injured in case ofsudden braking or a collision.

! If the driver’s seat position doesnot allow sufficient space for safeinstallation, install the child re-straint system on the second rightseat.

90

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt throughor around the convertible seat followingthe instructions provided by itsmanufacturer and insert the tab intothe buckle taking care not to twist thebelt. Keep the lap portion of the belttight.

CAUTION




2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put itin the lock mode. When the belt isthen retracted even slightly, it cannotbe extended.

To hold the convertible seat securely,make sure the belt is in the lock modebefore letting the belt retract.

91

3. While pressing the convertible seatfirmly against the seat cushion andseatback, let the shoulder belt retractas far as it will go to hold the convert-ible seat securely.

CAUTION


4. To remove the convertible seat, pressthe buckle release button and allow thebelt to retract completely. The belt willmove freely again and be ready towork for an adult or older child passen-ger.

92

13c569

(C) BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATIONA booster seat must be used in for-ward- facing position only.

13c570

Move seat fully back

CAUTION


! On vehicle with side airbags andcurtain shield airbags, do not allowthe child to lean his/her head orany part of his/her body against thedoor or the area of the seat, frontor rear pillar, front, center or reargarnish or roof interior from whichthe side airbags or curtain shieldairbags deploy even if the child isseated in a child restraint system.It is dangerous if the side airbagand curtain shield airbag inflate,and the impact could cause deathor serious injury to the child.

93

1. Sit the child on a booster seat. Runthe lap and shoulder belt through oraround the booster seat and across thechild following the instructions providedby its manufacturer and insert the tabinto the buckle taking care not to twistthe belt.

Make sure the shoulder belt is correctlyacross the child’s shoulder and that thelap belt is positioned as low as possibleon the child’s hips. See “Seat belts” onpage 50 for details.

CAUTION

! Always make sure the shoulder beltis positioned across the center ofchild’s shoulder. The belt should bekept away from child’s neck, butnot falling off child’s shoulder.Otherwise, the child may be killedor seriously injured in case of sud-den braking or a collision.

! Both high- positioned lap belts andloose- fitting belts could causedeath or serious injuries due tosliding under the lap belt during acollision or other unintended event.Keep the lap belt positioned as lowon child’s hips as possible.

! For child’s safety, do not place theshoulder belt under child’s arm.


! Do not insert coins, clips, etc. inthe buckle as this may prevent yourchild from properly latching the taband buckle.


94

2. To remove the booster seat, press thebuckle release button and allow thebelt to retract.

—Using a top strap

13C001

Follow the procedure below for a childrestraint system that requires the useof a top strap.

Symbol

Anchorbrackets

Use the anchor bracket located behind thesecond seat on the floor to attach the topstrap.Anchor brackets are installed for eachsecond seating position.This symbol indicates the locations of theanchor bracket.

95

13C003

TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET:1. Remove the head restraint.

13C004

2. Fix the child restraint system withthe seat belt.

3. Take off the cover, latch the hookonto the anchor bracket and tightenthe top strap.

For instructions to install the child re-straint system, see “Child restraint—” onpage 78.

CAUTION

Make sure the top strap is securelylatched, and check that the child re-straint system is secure by pushingand pulling it in different directions.Follow all installation instructionsprovided by its manufacturer.

13C005

4. Replace the head restraint.

96

13C529

The lower anchorages for the child re-straint system interfaced with theFMVSS225 specification are installed inthe second seat.The anchorages are installed in the clear-ance between the seat cushion and seat-back of left and center second seats.Child restraint system interfaced with theFMVSS213 specification can be fixed withthese anchorages. In this case, it is notnecessary to fix the child restraint systemwith a seat belt on the vehicle.

13c571Most uprightposition

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM INSTALLA-TION1. Fold down the seatback and back to

the most upright position until itlocks into place.

13C532f

2. Take off the cover between the seatcushion and seatback and confirmthe position of the lower anchoragesbelow the symbol in the seat back.

—Installation with childrestraint lower anchorages

97

13C009b

Type A

13C008b

Type B

3. Type A—Latch the hooks of lowerstraps onto the anchorages andtighten the lower straps.Type B—Latch the buckles onto theanchorages

If your child restraint system has a topstrap, it should be anchored. (For theinstallation of the top strap, see “—Usinga top strap” on page 94.)For installation details, refer to the instruc-tion manual equipped with each product.

CAUTION

! When using the lower anchoragesfor the child restraint system, besure that there are no irregular ob-jects around the anchorages or thatthe seat belt is not caught.

! Push and pull the child restraintsystem in different directions to besure it is secure. Follow all theinstallation instructions provided byits manufacturer.

! Do not install a child restraint sys-tem on the rear seat if it interfereswith the lock mechanism of thefront seats. Otherwise, the child orfront seat occupant(s) may be killedor seriously injured in case of sud-den braking or a collision.

98

99

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSSteering wheel and MirrorsPower tilt and telescopic steering wheel 100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outside rear view mirrors 101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anti- glare inside rear view mirror 102. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sun visors 107. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1- 4

100

ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING WHEELTILTTo adjust the tilt of the steering wheel,push the control switch upward ordownward to set it to the desired posi-tion.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile the vehicle is moving. Doing somay cause the driver to mishandlethe vehicle and an accident may oc-cur resulting in death or serious inju-ries.

ADJUSTMENT OF TELESCOPIC STEER-ING COLUMNTo adjust the steering column length,push the control switch forward orbackward to set the steering wheel tothe desired position.When the ignition key is removed, thesteering column moves forward away fromthe driver and also tilts up for easy exitand entry.When the key is inserted into the ignitionswitch, the steering column returns to thepreviously set position.This feature can be set inoperative. Askyour Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the steering columnwhile the vehicle is moving. Doing somay cause the driver to mishandlethe vehicle and an accident may oc-cur resulting in death or serious inju-ries.

Power tilt and telescopic steer-ing wheel

101

Outside rear view mirrors—

Adjust the mirror so that you can justsee the side of your vehicle in the mir-ror.Be careful when judging the size or dis-tance of any object seen in the outsiderear view mirror on the passenger’s sidebecause it is a convex mirror. Any objectseen in a convex mirror will look smallerand farther away than when seen in a flatmirror.When you push the outside rear view mir-ror heater switch, the heater panels in theoutside rear view mirrors will quickly clearthe mirror surface. (See “Outside rearview mirror heaters” on page 117.)

CAUTION

! Do not adjust the mirror while thevehicle is moving. Doing so maycause the driver to mishandle thevehicle and an accident may occurresulting in death or serious inju-ries.

! Since the mirror surfaces can gethot, do not touch them when themirror heater switch is on.

To adjust a mirror, use the switches.1. Master switch—To select the mirror to

be adjustedPlace the switch at “L” (left) or “R”(right).

2. Control switch—To move the mirrorPush the switch in the desired direc-tion.

Mirrors can be adjusted when the key isin the “ACC” or “ON” position.

—Power rear view mirror control

102

NOTICE

If ice should jam the mirror, do notoperate the control or scrape the mir-ror face. Use a spray de- icer to freethe mirror.

—Folding rear view mirrors

The rear view mirrors can be foldedbackward for parking in compact areas.To fold the rear view mirror, push back-ward.

CAUTION

Do not drive with the mirrors foldedbackward. Both the driver and pas-senger side rear view mirrors mustbe extended and properly adjustedbefore driving.

13C010b

Adjust the mirror so that you can justsee the rear of your vehicle in the mir-ror.Pushing the switch changes the modebetween “AUTO” and “DAY”.The indicator comes on when the “AUTO”mode is selected.“DAY” mode: The mirror surface is nor-mal.“AUTO” mode: If the mirror detectslight from the headlights of the vehiclebehind you, the mirror surface darkensslightly to reduce the reflected light.

Anti- glare inside rear viewmirror—

103

When the ignition key is inserted andturned on, the inside rear view mirror al-ways turns on in the “AUTO” mode.When the inside air temperature is low, itmay take a little longer for the mirror todarken in response to the detection ofheadlights.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while thevehicle is moving. Doing so maycause the driver to mishandle the ve-hicle and an accident may occur re-sulting in death or serious injuries.

13c570b

To ensure correct functioning of anti- glaremirror sensors located on both sides ofthe mirror, do not touch or cover the sen-sors with your finger or a piece of cloth,etc.

13c013

The compass indicates the direction inwhich the vehicle is heading. The illustra-tion shown above indicates the vehicle isheading north.

Displays DirectionsDisplays DirectionsN

NEE

SES

SWW

NW

NorthNortheast

EastSoutheast

SouthSouthwest

WestNorthwest

—Compass (vehicles withoutnavigation system)

104

Pushing the “AUTO” button for longer3 seconds turns on or off the compassdisplay.The compass may not show the correctdirection in the following conditions:! The vehicle is stopped immediately af-

ter turning. The compass does not ad-just while the vehicle is stopped.

! The ignition switch is turned off imme-diately after turning.

! The vehicle is on an inclined surface.! The vehicle is in a place where the

earth’s magnetic field is subject to in-terference by artificial magnetic fields(underground parking, under a steeltower, between buildings, roof parking,near a crossing, near a large vehicle,etc.).

! The vehicle is magnetized. (There is amagnet or a metal object on or nearthe inside rear view mirror.)

! The battery has been disconnected.! Any door is open.

If the deviation is small, the compassworks to calibrate the direction automati-cally while the vehicle is in motion.For obtaining additional precision or forcomplete calibrating, see “Calibrating thecompass” below.

NOTICE

Do not put magnets or a metal objectnear the inside rear view mirror. Do-ing this may cause malfunction of thecompass sensor.

CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (deviation calibration)The direction display on the compassdeviates from the true direction deter-mined by the earth’s magnetic field, Theamount of deviation varies according tothe geographic position of the vehicle.To adjust for this deviation, stop the ve-hicle and push the button for longer thanabout 6 seconds until the number (1- 15)appears on the display. Then push thebutton again, referring to the followingmap to select the number of the zonewhere the vehicle is.

105

If the direction is displayed several sec-onds after adjustment, the calibration isfinished.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the display while thevehicle is moving. Be sure to adjustthe display only when the vehicle isstopped.

13C015b

Zone number " Hawaii is included in zone 6.

106

13c011a

CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (circling calibration)“C” appears on the display in case thecircling calibration is required due to adrastic change in the magnetic field. Torectify this, follow the calibration proce-dure below.

13C012

Drive the vehicle slowly (at 8km/h (5mph)or lower) in a circle until the direction isdisplayed. If there is not enough space todrive in a circle, drive around the blockuntil the direction is displayed.After driving in 1 to 3 circles in the abovemethod, calibration is complete with thedirection shown on the display.If calibration cannot be performed becauseof the magnetized vehicle, etc., take yourvehicle to Toyota dealer.

! Do not perform circling calibration ofthe compass in a place where theearth’s magnetic field is subject to in-terference by artificial magnetic fields(underground parking, under a steeltower, between buildings, roof parking,near a crossing, near a large vehicle,etc.).

! During calibration, do not operate elec-tric systems (moon roof, power win-dows, etc.) as they may interfere withthe calibration.

CAUTION

! When doing the circling calibration,be sure to secure a wide space,and watch out for people and ve-hicles in the neighborhood. Do notviolate any local traffic rules whileperforming circling calibration.

! Do not adjust the display while thevehicle is moving. Be sure to adjustthe display only when the vehicle isstopped.

107

Sun visors—

To block out glare, move the sun visor.To block out glare from the front—Swingdown the main sun visor.To block out glare from the side—Swingdown the main sun visor, remove it fromthe hook and swing it to the lateral side.You can adjust its position as shown.

To block the glare from the front when themain sun visor is swung down, swingdown the second sun visor.

CAUTION

Slide the main sun visor only whenit is swung down to the lateral side.It can cover the anti- glare inside rearview mirror and obstruct the rearview.

—Vanity mirror

To use the vanity mirror, swing downthe main sun visor and open the cover.The vanity light comes on when you openthe cover.

108

109

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLSLights, Wipers and DefoggerHeadlight and turn signals 110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency flashers 112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument panel light control 112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front fog lights 113. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interior lights 113. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Personal lights 114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ignition switch light 115. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield wipers and washer 115. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear window wiper and washer 116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear window defogger 117. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outside rear view mirror heaters 117. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1- 5

110

Headlight and turn signals

HEADLIGHTSTo turn on the following lights: Twistthe headlight/turn signal lever knob.Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate,side marker and instrument panel lightsHowever, if the surroundings are brightand if the instrument panel light controldial is not turned fully on, the instrumentpanel lights do not come on.Position 2—Headlights and all of theabovePosition 3 (“AUTO”)—Headlights and/or allof the lights in position 1They automatically turn on or off depend-ing on the darkness of the surroundings.*

Manually twist the knob to the position 2to turn on the headlights if they are need-ed immediately when entering a dark tun-nel, parking structure, etc.NOTE: *The operating condition or sensi-tivity can be changed. Ask your Toyotadealer for details.

The automatic light control sensor is onthe top of the passenger’s side instrumentpanel.Do not place anything on the instrumentpanel, and/or do not affix anything on thewindshield to block this sensor.When the headlights come on, the lightsautomatically turn off about 30 secondsafter any of the doors is opened andclosed with the ignition key turned to the“ACC” or “LOCK” position.* To turn themon again, turn the ignition key to the ”ON”position, or turn the headlight switch offand then twist the knob until the first orsecond clickstop. If you are going to parkfor over one week, make sure the head-light switch is off.

111

When the headlight switch is on with allthe doors locked, pushing the “LOCK” but-ton on the wireless remote control keyturns off the headlights.NOTE: *The time before turning off thelights can be changed. Ask your Toyotadealer for details.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the lights onfor a long period when the engine isnot running.

Daytime running light systemThe headlights turn on at reduced intensi-ty when the parking brake is released withthe engine started, even with the lightswitch in the “OFF” position. They will notgo off until the ignition switch is turnedoff.To turn on the other exterior lights andinstrument panel lights, twist the knob tothe position 1.Twist the knob to the position 2 to turnthe headlights to full intensity for drivingat night.

High- Low beams—For high beams, turnthe headlights on and push the lever awayfrom you (position 1). Pull the lever to-ward you (position 2) for low beams.The headlight high beam indicator light(blue light) on the instrument panel willtell you that the high beams are on.Flashing the high beam headlights(position 3)—Pull the lever all the wayback. The high beam headlights turn offwhen you release the lever.You can flash the high beam headlightswith the knob turned to “OFF”.

TURN SIGNALSTo signal a turn, push the headlight/turn signal lever up or down to position1.The key must be in the “ON” position.The lever automatically returns after youmake a turn, but you may have to returnit by hand after you change lanes.To signal a lane change, move the leverup or down to the pressure point (position2) and hold it.If the turn signal indicator lights (greenlights) on the instrument panel flash fasterthan normal, a front or rear turn signalbulb is burned out. See “Replacing lightbulbs” on page 333.

112

Emergency flashers

To turn on the emergency flashers,push the switch.All the turn signal lights will flash. To turnthem off, push the switch once again.Turn on the emergency flashers to warnother drivers if your vehicle must bestopped where it might be a traffic hazard.Always pull your vehicle as far off theroad as possible.The turn signal light switch will not workwhen the emergency flashers are operat-ing.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the switch onlonger than necessary when the en-gine is not running.

Instrument panel light control

To adjust the brightness of the instru-ment panel lights, turn the dial.

113

Front fog lights

To turn on the front fog lights, twistthe band of the headlight/turn signallever. They will come on only when theheadlights are on low beam.

Interior lights

Center

Rear

To turn on the interior light, slide theswitch.The interior light switch has the followingpositions:“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.“OFF”—Turns the light off.“DOOR”——Center: Turn the light on when any ofside doors and back door are opened.—Rear: Turn the light on when any of therear side doors and back door areopened.

114

ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEMCenter—With the switch in the “DOOR” position,the light comes on when either side orback door is opened. After all the doorsare closed, the light remains on for acertain time and then goes out.*However, in the following cases, the lightgoes out immediately:! All the doors are closed when the igni-

tion key is in “ACC” or “ON” position.! The ignition key is turned to “ACC”,

“ON” or “START” when the light is stillon.

! All the doors are locked when the lightis still on.

! One front door will be closed with thelock knob pushed forward while theother doors are locked.

NOTE: *The interior lights can be set notto come on or the duration of lighting canbe changed. Ask your Toyota dealer fordetails.

INTERIOR LIGHTS CUT OFF OPERATIONWhen the ignition switch is “OFF” and anyinterior lights in the vehicle stay lightingon, the lights will cut off automaticallyafter 30 minutes.You can cancel the cut off operation by:! Turning the key to the “ACC” position.! Opening or closing any of side doors

and back door.All the lights are cut off when any of thedoors are locked or unlocked by key orwireless remote control key.

Personal lights

Front

Center

115

To turn on the personal light, push theswitch on 1 side. To turn the lights off,push the switch on 2 side.PERSONAL LIGHTS CUT OFF OPERA-TIONWhen the ignition switch is “OFF” and anypersonal lights in the vehicle stay lightingon, the lights will cut off automaticallyafter 30 minutes.You can cancel the cut off operation by:! Turning the key to the “ACC” position.! Opening or closing any of side doors

and back door.All the lights are cut off when any of thedoors are locked or unlocked by key orwireless remote control key.

Ignition switch light

For easy access to the ignition switch,the ignition switch light comes on whenany door is opened.The light remains on for a certain timeafter all the doors are closed.It goes off immediately when the ignitionswitch is turned to the “ACC” position orwhen all the doors are locked.

Windshield wipers and washer

To turn on the windshield wipers, movethe lever to the desired setting.The key must be in the “ON” position.There are 3 settings:1. “INT” position: Intermittent operation2. “LO” position: Low speed operation3. “HI” position: High speed operationTwist the interval adjuster upward to in-crease the wiping time interval betweensweeps, and downward to decrease it.

116

To squirt washer fluid, pull the levertoward you.If the windshield wipers are off, they willoperate a couple of times after the washersquirts.For instructions on adding washer fluid,see “Adding washer fluid” on page 333.In freezing weather, warm the windshieldwith the defroster before using the washer.This will help prevent the washer fluidfrom freezing on your windshield, whichcan block your vision.

NOTICE

Do not operate the wipers if the wind-shield is dry. It may scratch theglass.

When waxing your vehicle, make sure thatthe washer nozzles do not becomeblocked. If a nozzle becomes blocked,contact your Toyota dealer to have thevehicle serviced.

NOTICE

If a nozzle becomes blocked, do nottry to clear it with a pin or otherobject. The nozzle will be damaged.

Rear window wiper and washer

To turn on the rear window wiper, twistthe lever knob upward.The key must be in the “ON” position.There are 2 settings:1. “LO” position: Intermittent operation2. “HI” position: Normal operationTo squirt washer fluid on the rear window,twist the knob upward or downward as faras it will go (position 3 or 4). The knobautomatically returns from these positionsafter you release it.For instructions on adding washer fluid,see “Adding washer fluid” on page 333.

NOTICE

Do not operate the rear wiper if therear window is dry. It may scratch theglass.

117

Rear window defogger

To defog or defrost the rear window,push the switch.The key must be in the “ON” position.The thin heater wires on the inside of therear window will quickly clear the surface.An indicator light will illuminate to indicatethe defogger is operating.Push the switch once again to turn thedefogger off.The system will automatically shut off af-ter the defogger has operated about 15minutes.

Make sure you turn the defogger off whenthe surfaces are clear. Leaving the defog-ger on for a long time could cause thebattery to discharge, especially duringstop- and- go driving. The defogger is notdesigned for drying rain water or for melt-ing snow.

NOTICE

! When cleaning the inside of therear window, be careful not toscratch or damage the heater wiresor connectors.

! To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, turn the switch offwhen the engine is not running.

Outside rear view mirror heaters

To defog or defrost the outside rearview mirrors, push the switch.The key must be in the “ON” position.The heater panels in the outside rear viewmirrors will quickly clear the surfaces. Anindicator light will illuminate to indicate themirror heaters are operating.Push the switch once again to turn thedefoggers off.The system will automatically shut off af-ter the mirror heaters have operated about15 minutes.

118

CAUTION

Since the mirror surfaces can get hot,do not touch them when the mirrorheater switch is on.

Make sure you turn the mirror heaters offwhen the surfaces are clear. Leaving themirror heaters on for a long time couldcause the battery to discharge, especiallyduring stop- and- go driving. The mirrorheaters are not designed for drying rainwater or for melting snow.If the outside rear view mirrors are heavi-ly coated with ice, use a spray de- icerbefore operating the switch.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, turn the switch off when theengine is not running.

119

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLSGauges, Meters and Service reminder indicatorsFuel gauge 120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine coolant temperature gauge 120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine oil pressure gauge 121. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voltmeter 122. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tachometer 122. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Odometer and two trip meters 123. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers 124. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trip information display 132. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1- 6

120

Fuel gauge

15C004

The gauge indicates the approximatequantity of fuel remaining in the tankwhen the ignition switch is on.Nearly full—Needle at “F”Nearly empty—Needle at “E”It is a good idea to keep the tank over1/4 full.If the fuel level approaches “E” or the lowfuel level warning light comes on, fill thefuel tank as soon as possible.On inclines or curves, due to the move-ment of fuel in the tank, the fuel gaugeneedle may fluctuate or the low fuel levelwarning light may come on earlier thanusual.

If the fuel tank is completely empty, themalfunction indicator lamp comes on. Fillthe fuel tank immediately.The indicator lamp goes off after drivingseveral times. If the indicator lamp doesnot go off, contact your Toyota dealer assoon as possible.

The gauge indicates the engine coolanttemperature when the ignition switch ison. The engine operating temperaturewill vary with changes in weather andengine load.If the needle points to the red zone orhigher, stop your vehicle and allow theengine to cool.Your vehicle may overheat during severeoperating conditions, such as:! Driving up a long hill on a hot day.! Reducing speed or stopping after high

speed driving.! Idling for a long period with the air

conditioning on in stop- and- go traffic.! Towing a trailer.

Engine coolant temperaturegauge

121

NOTICE

! Do not remove the thermostat inthe engine cooling system as thismay cause the engine to overheat.The thermostat is designed to con-trol the flow of coolant to keep thetemperature of the engine withinthe specified operating range.

! Do not continue driving with anoverheated engine. See “If your ve-hicle overheats” on page 274.

Engine oil pressure gauge

Idling

Normaldriving

The engine oil pressure gauge indicatesengine oil pressure when the ignitionswitch is on. Check it while driving tomake sure the needle is in the properrange.If the engine oil pressure should stay be-low the normal range, pull off the road toa safe place and stop the engine immedi-ately. Call a Toyota dealer or qualifiedrepair shop for assistance.Engine oil pressure may not build upwhen the engine oil level is too low. Theengine oil pressure gauge is not designedto indicate oil level, and the engine oillevel must be checked using the leveldipstick.

NOTICE

Do not drive the vehicle with the en-gine oil pressure below the normalrange until the cause is fixed—it mayruin the engine.

122

Voltmeter

The voltmeter tells whether the batteryis charged or discharged. Check itwhile the engine is running—the needleshould always indicate as shown above.If the needle reads below or above thenormal range while the engine is running,it indicates the charging system needs im-mediate repair.However, it is normal for the needle todrop below the normal range during en-gine starting.

Tachometer

The tachometer indicates engine speedin thousands of rpm (revolutions perminute). Use it while driving to preventengine over-revving.Driving with the engine running too fastcauses excessive engine wear and poorfuel economy. Remember, in most casesthe slower the engine speed, the greaterthe fuel economy.

NOTICE

Do not let the indicator needle getinto the red zone. This may causesevere engine damage.

123

Odometer and two trip meters

This meter displays the odometer andtwo trip meters.1. Odometer—Shows the total distance

the vehicle has been driven.2. Two trip meters—Show two different

distances independently driven sincethe last time each trip meter was setto zero.You can use one trip meter to calculatethe fuel economy and the other tomeasure the distance on each trip. Alltrip meter data is cancelled if the elec-trical power source is disconnected.

3. Trip meter reset knob—Resets the twotrip meters to zero, and also changethe meter display.To change the meter display, quicklypush and release the knob. The meterdisplay changes in the order from theodometer to trip meter A to trip meterB, then back to the odometer eachtime you push.To reset the trip meter A to zero, dis-play the meter A reading, then pushand hold the knob until the meter isset to zero. The same process can beapplied for resetting the trip meter B.

124

Service reminder indicators and warning buzzersIf the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

(a)(indicators and buzzer)

If parking brake is off, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(b)(indicators and buzzer)

Fasten driver’s seat belt.

(c) Fasten front passenger’s seat belt.

(d) Stop and check.

(e) Replace engine oil.

(f) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(g) Fill up tank.

125

If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

(h) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer immediately.

(i) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer. If brake system warning light is also on, stop immedi-ately and contact Toyota dealer.

(j) Close all side doors and back door.

(k) Adjust tire inflation pressure (including spare tire). If light remains on, contract Toyota dealer.

(l) Shift four- wheel drive control out of “N”.

(m) Stop and check.

(n) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(o) Key reminder buzzer Remove key.

126

(a) Brake System Warning Light andBuzzer

This light comes on in the following caseswhen the ignition key is in the “ON” posi-tion.! When the parking brake is applied...

This light comes on for a few secondswhen the ignition key is in the “ON” posi-tion even after the parking brake is re-leased.! When the brake fluid level is low...

CAUTION

It is dangerous to continue drivingnormally when the brake fluid level islow.

! When the hydraulic brake boosterfails...

If the hydraulic booster causes an problemresulting in poor braking performance, thewarning light comes on and buzzer soundscontinuously.

Have your vehicle checked at yourToyota dealer in the following cases:! The light does not come on even if the

parking brake is applied when the igni-tion key is in the “ON” position.

! The light does not come on even if theignition key is turned on with the park-ing brake released.

A warning light turning on briefly duringoperation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION

If any of the following conditions oc-cur, immediately stop your vehicle ata safe place and contact your Toyotadealer.! The light does not turn off even

after the parking brake is releasedwhile the engine is running.

! The warning buzzer comes on to-gether with the warning light.

In either case, this can indicate thatthe brakes may not work properly andyour stopping distance will becomelonger. Depress the brake pedal firmlyand bring the vehicle to an immediatestop.

! The brake system warning light re-mains on together with the “ABS”warning light.

In this case, not only the anti- lockbrake system will fail but also thevehicle will become extremely unsta-ble during braking.

Any of the following conditions may oc-cur, but do not indicate a malfunction:! The light may stay on for about 60

seconds after the ignition key is turnedto “ON” position. It is normal if it goesout after a while.

! Depressing the brake pedal repeatedlymay turn on the warning light andbuzzer. It is normal if the light goesout and the buzzer stops sounding af-ter a few seconds.

! You may hear a small sound in theengine compartment after the engine isstarted or the brake pedal is depressedrepeatedly. This is a pump pulsatingsound of the brake system, and it isnot a malfunction.

127

(b) Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Lightand Buzzer

The light and buzzer act as a reminder tobuckle up the driver’s seat belt.Once the ignition key is turned to “ON” or“START”, the reminder light flashes andthe buzzer sounds if the driver’s seat beltis not fastened. Unless the driver fastensthe belt, the light continues flashing andthe buzzer sounds 4 to 8 seconds.(c) Front Passenger’s Seat Belt Re-

minder LightThe light acts as a reminder to have thefront passenger buckle up the seat belt.Once the ignition key is turned to “ON” or“START”, the reminder light flashes if apassenger sits in the front passenger seatand does not fasten the seat belt. Unlessthe front passenger fastens the belt, thelight continues flashing.If luggage or other load is placed on thefront passenger seat, depending on itsweight and how it is placed on the seat,built- in sensors in the seat cushion maydetect the pressure, causing the reminderlight to flash.

(d) Charging System Warning LightThis warning light comes on when theignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-tion, and goes off when the engine isstarted.When there are problems in the chargingsystem while the engine is running, thewarning light comes on.

NOTICE

When the charging system warninglight comes on while the engine isrunning, malfunctions such as the en-gine drive belt being broken may haveoccurred. If the warning light comeson, immediately stop the vehicle in asafe place and contact your Toyotadealer.

(e) Engine Oil Replacement ReminderLight

This light acts as a reminder to replacethe engine oil.This light will come on when the ignitionswitch is turned to “ON”, and will go offafter about a few seconds.

When you drive for about 7200 km (4500miles) after engine oil replacement, thislight illuminates for about 3 seconds andthen flashes for about 12 seconds withthe ignition key is turned to “ON” position.If you continue driving without engine oilreplacement, and if the driving range ex-ceeds 8000 km (5000 miles), the light willcome on after the ignition key is turnedto “ON” position. The light will remain onthereafter.If the light is flashing, we recommend thatyou replace the engine oil at an earlyopportunity depending on the driving androad condition. If the light comes on, re-place it as soon as possible.You need to reset the light after the en-gine oil replacement. Reset the light byfollowing the procedure below:1. Turn the ignition key to the “OFF” posi-

tion with the odometer reading shown.(For details, see “Odometer and trip me-ter” on page 123).

2. Turn the ignition key to the “ON” posi-tion while holding down the “ODO/TRIP” knob.

Hold down the knob until the light goesoff. Before the light goes off, it illuminatesfor 3 seconds, flashes for 2 seconds, illu-minates for 1 second.

128

If the system fails to reset, the light willremain flashing.(f) Malfunction Indicator LampThis lamp comes on when the ignitionkey is turned to the “ON” position andgoes off after the engine starts. Thismeans that the warning light system isoperating properly.If the lamp remains on, or the lampcomes on while driving, first check thefollowings.! Empty fuel tank

If the fuel tank is empty, refuel immedi-ately.

! Loose fuel tank capIf the fuel tank cap is loose, securelytighten it.

These cases are temporary malfunctions.The malfunction indicator lamp will go offafter taking several driving trips.If the lamp will not go off even after sev-eral trips, contact your Toyota dealer assoon as possible.

If the lamp will not go off even afterthe several trips...

orIf the fuel tank is not empty or the fueltank cap is not loose...! There is a problem somewhere in the

engine, emission control system, elec-tronic throttle control system, automatictransmission electrical system or warn-ing light system itself.

Contact your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible to service the vehicle.If engine speed does not increase whenthe accelerator pedal is depressed, theremay be a problem somewhere in the elec-tronic throttle control system.At this time, vibration may occur. Howev-er, if you depress the accelerator pedalmore firmly and slowly, you can drive yourvehicle at low speeds. Have your vehiclechecked by your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible.Even if the abnormality of the electronicthrottle control system is corrected duringlow speed driving, the system may not berecovered until the engine is stopped andthe ignition key is turned to “ACC” or“LOCK” position.

CAUTION

Be especially careful to prevent erro-neous pedal operation.

Emissions Inspection and Maintenance(I/M) programsYour vehicle may not pass a state emis-sion inspection if the malfunction indicatorlamp remains on. Contact your Toyotadealer to check your vehicle’s emissioncontrol system and OBD (On- Board Diag-nostics) system before taking your vehiclefor the inspection.For details, see “Emissions Inspection andMaintenance (I/M) programs” on page 306.(g) Low Fuel Level Warning LightThis light comes on when the fuel levelin the tank becomes nearly empty. Fill upthe tank as soon as possible.

129

(h) SRS Warning LightThis light will come on when the igni-tion key is turned to the “ON” position.After about 6 seconds, the light will gooff. This means the system of the air-bag and front seat belt pretensionersare operating properly.The warning light system monitors the air-bag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-sors, side and curtain shield airbag sensorassemblies, curtain shield airbag sensorassemblies, driver’s seat position sensor,driver’s seat belt buckle switch, front seatbelt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, rollsensing of curtain shield airbags off indi-cator light, interconnecting wiring and pow-er sources.If either of the following conditions occurs,this indicates a malfunction somewhere inthe components monitored by the warninglight system. Contact your Toyota dealeras soon as possible to service the ve-hicle.! The light does not come on when the


! The light comes on or flashes whiledriving.

If the light stays on, it indicates that thedriver and passenger airbags have a prob-lem. If the light flashes, the side and cur-tain shield airbags and/or the seat beltpretensioners have a problem.(i) “ABS” Warning LightThe light comes on when the ignitionkey is turned to the “ON” position. Ifthe anti- lock brake system and thebrake assist system work properly, thelight turns off after a few seconds.Thereafter, if either of the systems mal-functions, the light comes on again.When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti- lock brake system, the brake assistsystem, the vehicle stability control sys-tem and/or active traction control systemdo/does not operate, but the brake systemstill operates conventionally.When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti- lock brake system does not operateso that the wheels could lock up duringa sudden braking or braking on slipperyroad surfaces.

If either of the following conditions oc-curs, this indicates a malfunction some-where in the components monitored bythe warning light system. Contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible toservice the vehicle.! The light does not come on when the

ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-tion, or remains on.

! The light comes on while you are driv-ing.


CAUTION

If the “ABS” warning light remains ontogether with the brake system warn-ing light, immediately stop your ve-hicle at a safe place and contact yourToyota dealer.In this case, not only the anti- lockbrake system will fail but also thevehicle will become extremely unsta-ble during braking.

130

Either of the following conditions mayoccur, but do not indicate a malfunc-tion.! The light may stay on for about 60

seconds after the ignition key is turnedto “ON” position. It is normal if it turnsoff after a while.

! Depressing the brake pedal repeatedlymay turn on the light. It is normal if itturns off after a few seconds.

(j) Open Door Warning LightThis light remains on until all the sidedoors and back door are completelyclosed.(k) Low tire pressure warning lightThis light comes on when the ignition keyis turned to the “ON” position. If the tirepressure warning system works properlyand tire inflation pressure is appropriate,the light goes off after a few seconds.This light comes on or flashes in the fol-lowing cases when the ignition key isturned to the “ON” position.! When the low tire inflation pressure

is detected while driving...If any tire has low inflation pressure,the light comes on.

The light goes off after the tire inflationpressure is adjusted to a specified lev-el.

! When initializing the system...If initialization is completed, the lightblinks three times.

! When the system malfunctions...If the system malfunctions, the lightblinks.Although it is no problem to continuedriving, have your vehicle checked byyour Toyota dealer as soon as pos-sible.

(l) Unengaged “Park” Warning LightThis light warns that the transmission“Park” mechanism is not engaged. If thefour- wheel drive control is in the “N” posi-tion while the selector lever is in the “P”position, the transmission will disengageand the wheels will not lock.

CAUTION

To restore the park function, shift thefour- wheel drive control out of “N”,or the vehicle can move.

(m) Automatic Transmission Fluid Tem-perature Warning Light

This light warns that the automatic trans-mission fluid temperature is too high.If this light comes on while you are driv-ing, slow down and pull off the road. Stopthe vehicle at a safe place and put theselector lever in “P” and leave the engineidling until the light goes off. If the lightgoes off, you can start the vehicle again.If the light does not go off, call a Toyotadealer or qualified repair shop for assis-tance.

NOTICE

Continued driving with the warninglight on may damage the automatictransmission.

131

(n) Vehicle Stability Control System andActive Traction Control SystemWarning Light

This light warns that there is a problemsomewhere in the vehicle stability controlsystem and/or active traction control sys-tem.If the “VSC/TRAC” warning light and “VSCOFF” indicator light come on, have yourvehicle checked by Toyota dealer as soonas possible. However, it is no problemthat the “VSC/TRAC” warning light comeson when the brake actuator temperaturebecomes high. (For details, see “Activetraction control system” on page 144.)The lights will come on with the ignitionkey turned to “ON”, and will go off aftera few seconds.The lights may come on for 60 secondsafter the ignition key is turned to “ON”position. It is normal if they go out aftera while.Depressing the brake pedal repeatedlymay turn on the lights. it is normal if theygo out after a few seconds.

When the “VSC/TRAC” warning light and“VSC OFF” indicator light come on, thevehicle stability control system and/or ac-tive traction control system are not operat-ing, but there is no problem if you contin-ue to drive.(o) Key Reminder BuzzerThis buzzer acts as a reminder to removethe key when you open the driver’s doorwith the ignition key in the “ACC” or“LOCK” position.CHECKING SERVICE REMINDER INDICA-TORS (except the low fuel level warninglight)1. Apply the parking brake.2. Open one of the side doors or back

door.The open door warning light shouldcome on.

3. Close the door.The open door warning light should gooff.

4. Place the four- wheel drive control leverin “N” position and the selector leverin “P” position and turn the ignition keyto “ACC”.The “A/T P” should come on. It goesoff when you place the four- wheeldrive control lever in “H” or “L” posi-tion.

5. Turn the ignition key to “ON”, but donot start the engine.All the service reminder indicators ex-cept the open door warning light shouldcome on. The “ABS”, “VSC/TRAC”,“VSC OFF”, “TRAC”, and slip indicatorlight go off after a few seconds. TheSRS warning light goes off after about6 seconds.There may be the case that the “ABS”,“VSC/TRAC” and “VSC OFF” stay onfor about 60 seconds after the ignitionkey is turned to “ON” position. It isnormal if they go out after a while.

If any service reminder indicator or warn-ing buzzer does not function as describedabove, have it checked by your Toyotadealer as soon as possible.

132

The following information is shown withthe ignition key turned on. Each timeyou push the “MODE” button, the dis-played information is changed.! Average vehicle speed! Driving distance after engine starting! Available driving range! Average fuel consumption after refuel-

ing! Current fuel consumption

The displayed cruise information valuesindicate the general driving condition andmay not always reflect precise and actualconditions.

! Average vehicle speedThe average vehicle speed is calculatedand displayed based on the total driv-ing distance and the total driving timewith the engine running.The displayed value is updated every 10seconds.To begin recalculating, push the “RESET”button for about 1 second.

! Driving distance after engine startingThe driving distance after engine start-ing is displayed.To begin recalculating, push the “RESET”button for about 1 second.

Trip information display (vehicles without navigationsystem)

133

! Available driving rangeThe available driving range is calcu-lated and displayed depending on theamount of remaining fuel.

! Average fuel consumption after re-fueling

The average fuel consumption after re-fueling is calculated and displayedbased on the total driving distance andthe total fuel consumption after refuel-ing.The value is updated every 10 seconds.When refueling, be sure to stop your ve-hicle and turn the ignition key off.

! Current fuel consumptionThe current fuel consumption is calcu-lated and displayed based on the driv-ing distance and the fuel consumptionper 2 second interval with the enginerunning.The value is updated every 2 seconds.If you are driving at low speeds just be-fore stopping, the accurate figure may notbe shown.

134

135

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLSIgnition switch, Transmission and Parking brakeIgnition switch 136. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic transmission 137. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Four–wheel drive system 141. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Active traction control system 144. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle stability control system 146. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire pressure warning system 148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking brake 155. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise control 155. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Active height control suspension (AHC) 158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Skyhook TEMS (Skyhook Toyota electronic modulated suspension) . 166

SECTION 1- 7

136

“START”—Starter motor on. The keywill return to the “ON” position whenreleased.For starting tips, see page 252.“ON”—Engine on and all accessorieson.This is the normal driving position.

“ACC”—Accessories such as the radiooperate, but the engine is off.If you leave the key in the “ACC” or“LOCK” position and open the driver’sdoor, a buzzer will remind you to removethe key.“LOCK”—Engine is off and the steeringwheel is locked. The key can be re-moved only at this position.To turn the key from “ACC” to the “LOCK”position, you must put the selector leverin the “P” position.Once you remove the key, the engine im-mobilizer system is automatically set. (See“Engine immobilizer system” on page 12.)When starting the engine, the key mayseem stuck at the “LOCK” position. Tofree it, first be sure the key is pushed allthe way in, and then rock the steeringwheel slightly while turning the key gently.It is not a malfunction if the needles onall meters and gauges more slightly whenthe key is turned to the “ACC” or “START”position.

Several hours after the engine is turnedoff, you may hear a sound coming fromunderneath the luggage compartment forseveral minutes. This is normal operationand does not indicate a malfunction. (Seepage ix.)

NOTICE

Do not leave the key in the “ON”position if the engine is not running.The battery will discharge and theelectronic ignition system could bedamaged.

Ignition switch

137

Automatic transmission

! The shift position is displayed on the instrument cluster

P: Parking, engine starting and key removal positionR: Reverse positionN: Neutral positionD: Normal driving position (Shifting into overdrive position)4: Position for engine braking (Shifting into overdrive not possible)"3,2: Position for more powerful engine braking

Driving pattern selector button for selecting a driving pattern suited to existing drivingconditions

Normal mode for general driving condition

“PWR” (power) mode for powerful accelerationThis indicator lights on the instrument panel

Second start mode selector button for selecting either second start mode or normal driving mode

Second start modeThis indicator lights on the instrument panel in the second start mode

L: Position for maximum engine braking

# Shift while pressing the brake pedal.(Ignition switch must be in the “ON” posi-tion)

Selector lever position

" When the cruise control is being used, even if you downshift from “D” to “4”, engine braking will not be enabled because the cruise controlis not cancelled. For ways to decrease the vehicle speed, see “Cruise control” on page 155.

138

Your automatic transmission has a shiftlock system to minimize the possibility ofincorrect operation. This means you canonly shift out of “P” position when thebrake pedal is depressed with the ignitionswitch in “ON” position.(a) Normal driving1. Start the engine as instructed in “How

to start the engine” on page 252. Thetransmission must be in “P” or “N”.

2. With your foot holding down the brakepedal, shift the selector lever to “D”.

When the lever is in the “D” position, theautomatic transmission system will selectthe most suitable gear for running condi-tions such as normal cruising, hill climb-ing, hard towing, etc.Always use the “D” position for better fueleconomy and quieter driving. If the enginecoolant temperature is low, the transmis-sion will not shift into the overdrive geareven in the “D” position.

CAUTION

Never put your foot on the accelera-tor pedal while shifting.

3. Release the parking brake and brakepedal. Depress the accelerator pedalslowly for smooth starting.

(b) Using engine brakingTo use engine braking, you can downshiftthe transmission as follows:$ Shift into the “4” position. The trans-

mission will downshift to fourth gearand engine braking will be enabled.

$ Shift into the “3” position. The trans-mission will downshift to third gearwhen the vehicle speed drops down toor lower than following speed for thirdgear, and more powerful engine brakingwill be enabled.

Four–wheel drive control lever in “H” 129 km/h (80 mph). . . . . . . . . . .

Four–wheel drive control lever in “L” 51 km/h (32 mph). . . . . . . . . . .

$ Shift into the “2” position. The trans-mission will downshift to second gearwhen the vehicle speed drops down toor lower than following speed for sec-ond gear, and more powerful enginebraking will be enabled.



$ Shift into the “L” position. The trans-mission will downshift to first gearwhen the vehicle speed drops down toor lower than following speed for “L”position and maximum engine brakingwill be enabled.



When the cruise control is being used,even if you downshift from “D” to “4”,engine braking will not be enabled be-cause the cruise control is not cancelled.For ways to decrease the vehicle speed,see “Cruise control” on page 155.

CAUTION

Be careful when downshifting on aslippery surface. Abrupt shiftingcould cause the vehicle to skid orspin.

139

(c) Using “3”, “2” and “L” positionsThe “3”, “2” and “L” positions are used forstrong engine braking as described pre-viously.With the selector lever in “3”, “2” or “L”,you can start the vehicle in motion aswith the lever in “D”.With the selector lever in “3” and “2”, thevehicle will start in first gear and automat-ically shift to third or second gear.With the selector lever in “L”, the trans-mission is engaged in first gear.

NOTICE

! Be careful not to over-rev the en-gine. Watch the tachometer to keepengine rpm from going into the redzone. The approximate maximum al-lowable speed for each position isgiven below for your reference:

km/h (mph) Transmission Transfer

H L4 178 (111) 72 (45). . . . . . . 3 127 (79) 52 (32). . . . . . . 2 87 (54) 36 (22). . . . . . . L 51 (32) 20 (12). . . . . . .

! Do not continue hill climbing orhard towing for a long time in the“3”, “2” or “L” position. This maycause severe automatic transmis-sion damage from overheating. Toprevent such damage, “4” positionshould be used in hill climbing orhard towing.

(d) Backing up1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.2. With the brake pedal held down with

your foot, shift the selector lever to the“R” position.

NOTICE

Never shift into reverse while the ve-hicle is moving.

140

(e) Parking1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.2. Pull the parking brake lever up fully to

securely apply the parking brake.3. With the brake pedal pressed down,

shift the selector lever to the “P” posi-tion.

If the four–wheel drive control is in the“N” position while the selector lever is inthe “P” position, the transmission willdamage and the wheels will not lock.

CAUTION

While the vehicle is moving, neverattempt to move the selector leverinto “P” position under any circum-stances. Serious mechanical damageand loss of vehicle control may re-sult.

(f) Good driving practice$ If the transmission repeatedly shifts up

and down between fourth gear and ov-erdrive gears when climbing a gentleslope, shift the selector lever to the “4”position. Be sure to shift the selectorlever to the “D” position immediatelyafterward.

$ When towing a trailer, in order to main-tain engine braking efficiency, do notuse overdrive.

CAUTION

Always keep your foot on the brakepedal while stopped with the enginerunning. This prevents the vehiclefrom creeping.

NOTICE

Always use the brake pedal or theparking brake to hold the vehicle onan upgrade. Do not attempt to holdthe vehicle using the accelerator ped-al, as this can cause the transmissionto overheat.

(g) Driving in “PWR” (Power) modeIn the “PWR” mode, the transmission isshifted up and down at a higher vehiclespeed than in the Normal mode and amore powerful acceleration is achieved. Toset the “PWR” mode, push in the drivingpattern selector button. The “PWR” modeindicator light comes on.For ordinary driving, Toyota recommendsusing the Normal mode to improve fueleconomy.(h) Driving in “2nd STRT” (second

start) modeIn the “2nd STRT” (Second start) mode,the transmission system shifts up fromsecond gear. Use this mode when startingyour vehicle in sand, mud, ice or snow.To set the “2nd STRT” mode, push the“2nd” button. In the “2nd STRT” mode, the“2nd STRT” indicator light comes on.The “PWR” mode is automatically can-celled when you push the “2nd” button.

141

(i) If you cannot shift the selector le-ver out of “P” position

If you cannot shift the selector lever fromthe “P” position even though the brakepedal is depressed, use the shift lockoverride button. For instructions, see “Ifyou cannot shift automatic transmissionselector lever” on page 290.

Use the four- wheel drive control leverand center differential lock button toselect the transfer and center differen-tial modes.The “H” and “L” position of the four- wheeldrive control lever provides either lock orunlock mode of the center differential de-pending on the center differential lock but-ton position.

Use the center differential lock system ifyour wheels get stuck in a ditch, or whenyou are driving on a slippery or bumpysurface. When the center differential islocked, the vehicle stability control systemis automatically turned off and the centerdifferential lock and “VSC OFF” indicatorlights come on because the function thatcontrols engine performance interfereswith the process of freeing your wheels.

NOTICE

As soon as the center differential lockswitch is turned on, the “VSC OFF”indicator light comes on. After thewheels are out of the ditch or off theslippery or bumpy surface, turn thecenter differential lock switch off.Make sure the center differential lockindicator light and vehicle stabilitycontrol system off indicator light turnoff.

Four–wheel drive system—(a) Four–wheel drive control

142

“H” (high speed position, center differ-ential unlocked): Lever at “H”, center dif-ferential lock button left outUse this for normal driving on all types ofroads, from dry hard- surfaced roads towet, icy or snow- covered roads. Thisposition gives greater economy, quietestride, least wear and better vehicle control.“H” (high speed position, center differ-ential locked): Lever at “H”, center differ-ential lock button pushed inUse this for greater traction when youexperience a loss of power, such aswheel slipping, in the center differentialunlock mode.“N” (neutral position): Lever at “N”No power is delivered to the wheels. Thevehicle must be stopped.“L” (low speed position, center differen-tial unlocked): Lever at “L”, center differ-ential lock button left outUse this for maximum power and traction.Use this for climbing or descending steephills, off- road driving, and hard pulling insand or mud.

In this mode, the braking feeling that oc-curs when the wheels are negotiating asharp corner is further reduced than in the“L” (low position, center differential locked)mode.“L” (low speed position, center differen-tial locked): Lever at “L”, center differen-tial lock button pushed in.Use this for maximum power and traction.Use this for hard pulling in situations thevehicle cannot negotiate even in the “L”(low speed position, center differential un-locked) mode. Also, using this mode whendriving down steep off- road inclines willhelp contribute to increased vehicle stabil-ity.The indicator light tells when the differen-tial lock is engaged. Note that the differ-ential is not still locked as long as theindicator light remains off.When the operation is not completed, theindicator blinks. If the indicator light doesnot go off when you push out the centerdifferential lock switch, drive straightahead while accelerating or decelerating,or drive in reverse.

The center differential lock system opera-tion is not completed within 5 secondswhile the cruise control system is set,cancel the cruise control system. To can-cel the cruise control system, see “Cruisecontrol” on page 155.If the indicator light does not go off whenyou push out the center differential lockbutton, drive straight ahead while acceler-ating or decelerating, or drive in reverse.See “(b) Shifting procedure” for further in-structions.Advice for driving on slippery roads in“L” (low speed position) modeIf you shift the four- wheel drive controllever to “L” and the automatic transmis-sion lever to “2” when you drive in steepoff- road areas, the output of the brakecan be controlled effectively by the activetraction control system, which assists thedriver to control the driving power of 4wheels.

143

Use the “L” position of the automatictransmission lever for maximum powerand traction when your wheels get stuckor when you drive down a steep incline.In the following cases, the output of thebrake can be controlled by the active trac-tion control system if the engine speed isunder 3,000 rpm (normally engine speedis under 3,000 rpm when the wheels getunstuck).$ The four- wheel drive control lever in

the “L” position and the automatictransmission lever in the “L” position orthe automatic transmission lever in the“D”, “4”, “3” or “2” with the transmis-sion downshifting to the first gear

$ The four- wheel drive control lever inthe “L” position and the automatictransmission lever in the “R” position

(As for the automatic transmission leverpositions, see “Automatic transmission” onpage 137.)

(b) Shifting procedureSHIFTING BETWEEN “H” (UNLOCKED)AND “H” (LOCKED)To shift between unlock and lockmodes in “H”, push the center differentiallock button.SHIFTING BETWEEN “L” (UNLOCKED)AND “L” (LOCKED)To shift between unlock and lockmodes in “L”, push the center differentiallock button.SHIFTING BETWEEN “H” AND “L”Stop the vehicle, put the transmission into“N” and move the four- wheel drive controllever.

CAUTION

Never move the four–wheel drive con-trol lever if wheels are slipping. Waituntil the wheels have stopped slip-ping or spinning before shifting.

NOTICE

For normal driving on dry and hardsurface roads, unlock the center dif-ferential. To prevent damage to thecenter differential lock system, do notpush the center differential lock but-ton when the vehicle is cornering orwhen its wheels are spinning freelyoff the ground. If the indicator lightdoes not go off when unlocking thecenter differential, drive straightahead while accelerating or decelerat-ing, or drive in reverse.

144

Active traction control system indicatorlightThe active traction control system auto-matically helps control the spinning of4 wheels which may occur when accel-erating on slippery road surfaces, bycontrolling the output of the brake andengine. Thus, the system assists driverto control the driving power of 4wheels. When you turn the ignitionswitch on, the active traction controlsystem always turns on automatically,and the active traction control indicatorlight will come on. The indicator lightwill go off after a few seconds.

When active traction control is applied,the active traction control system indi-cator light blinks.You may hear a sound in the enginecompartment for a few seconds when theengine is started or just after the vehiclebegins to move. This means that the ac-tive traction control system is in the self-check mode, and does not indicate mal-function. When the active traction controlsystem is operating, you may feel vibra-tion or hear noise of your vehicle, causedby operation of the brakes. This indicatesthe system is functioning properly.When getting the vehicle out of mud ornewly fallen snow, etc., the active tractioncontrol system will help operate to preventthe wheels from spinning.

Active traction control system failurewarningThis light warns when there is a problemsomewhere in the active traction controlsystem.If the “VSC/TRAC” warning light comeson, have your vehicle checked by yourToyota dealer as soon as possible.

Active traction control system

145

The brake actuator temperature increasesduring the active traction control systemor vehicle stability control system operat-ing. If the brake actuator temperature be-comes too high while the active tractioncontrol system or vehicle stability controlsystem is operating, a buzzer will start tosound intermittently to indicate that theactive traction control system can no lon-ger operate. In this case, immediately stopyour vehicle at a safe place. If the systemcontinues to operate, the buzzer soundchanges from intermittent to continuous.(The continuous buzzer sounds for about3 seconds.) At the time, the “VSC/TRAC”warning light will come on and the activetraction control system temporarily stopsoperating in order to protect the brakeactuator. (Although the active traction con-trol system does not operate, there is noproblem to continue your driving.) Thesystem will be automatically restored aftera short time and “VSC/TRAC” warninglight goes off if the accelerator pedal isreleased.When the “ABS” warning light come on,the active traction control system is notoperating.The “VSC/TRAC” warning light will comeon when the ignition key is turned “ON”,and will go off after a few seconds.

The “VSC/TRAC” warning light may stayon for 60 seconds after the ignition keyis turned to “ON” position. It is normal ifit goes off after a few seconds.Depressing the brake pedal repeatedlymay turn on the “VSC/TRAC” warninglight. It is normal if it goes off after a fewseconds.When the “VSC/TRAC” warning lightcomes on the active traction control sys-tem is not operating, but there is no prob-lem if you continue to drive.In the following cases, contact your Toyotadealer:$ The “VSC/TRAC” warning light does not

come on after the ignition key is turned“ON”.

$ The “VSC/TRAC” remains on after theignition key is turned “ON”.

CAUTION

Under certain slippery road condi-tions, full traction of the vehicles andpower to 4 wheels may not be main-tained, even though the active trac-tion control system is in operation.Do not drive the vehicle under anyspeed or maneuvering conditionswhich will cause the vehicle to losetraction. In situations where the roadsurface is covered with ice or snow,your vehicle should be fitted withsnow tires or tire chains. Alwaysdrive at an appropriate and cautiousspeed for the road conditions pres-ent.

146

The vehicle stability control systemhelps provide integrated control of thesystems such as anti- lock brake, trac-tion control, engine control, etc. Thissystem automatically controls the out-put of the brakes or engine to helpprevent the vehicle from skidding underadverse conditions.The system activates when the vehiclespeed is about more than 15 km/h (9mph).You may hear a sound in the enginecompartment for a few seconds when theengine is started or just after the vehiclebegins to move. This means that the ve-hicle stability control system is in theself- check mode and does not indicate amalfunction.

CAUTION

$ Active traction control system, ve-hicle stability control system andanti- lock brake system are electron-ic systems designed to help thedriver maintain control under ad-verse conditions. They are not asubstitute for safe driving practices.Factors including speed, road con-ditions and driver steering inputcan all affect whether active trac-tion control system, vehicle stabilitycontrol system and anti- lock brakesystem will be effective in prevent-ing a loss of control. Always keepsafety driving in mind. If the slipindicator light flashes, sounding analarm, special care should be takenwhile driving.

$ Only use tires of specified size. Thesize, manufacturer, brand and treadpattern for all 4 tires should be thesame. If you use the tires otherthan specified, or different type orsize, the vehicle stability controlsystem may not function correctly.When replacing the tires or wheels,contact your Toyota dealer. (See“Checking and replacing tires” onpage 323.)

Vehicle stability control system

147

If the vehicle is going to skid during driv-ing, the slip indicator light flashes and analarm sounds intermittently.When you turn the ignition switch on, theslip indicator light will come on. The slipindicator light will go off after a few sec-onds.

Pushing the center differential lock buttonautomatically turns the vehicle stabilitycontrol system off. At this time, the “VSCOFF” indicator comes on with the centerdifferential lock indicator light. (For details,see “Four- wheel drive system—(a)Four-wheel drive control” on page 141.)

Vehicle stability control system failurewarningThese lights warn when there is a prob-lem somewhere in the vehicle stabilitycontrol system or active traction controlsystem.If the “VSC/TRAC” warning light and “VSCOFF” indicator light come on, have yourvehicle checked by your Toyota dealer assoon as possible. However, there is noproblem if the “VSC/TRAC” warning lightcomes on when the brake actuator tem-perature becomes high. (For details, see“Active traction control system” on page144.)

148

When the “ABS” warning light comes on,the vehicle stability control system is notoperating.The “VSC/TRAC” warning light and “VSCOFF” indicator light will come on when theignition key is turned “ON”, and will go offafter a few seconds.The “VSC/TRAC” warning light and “VSCOFF” indicator light may stay on for 60seconds after the ignition key is turned to“ON” position. It is normal if they go offafter a few seconds.Depressing the brake pedal repeatedlymay turn on the lights. It is normal if theygo off after a few seconds.When the “VSC/TRAC” warning light and“VSC OFF” indicator light come on, thevehicle stability control system is not op-erating, but there is no problem if youcontinue to drive.In the following cases, contact your Toyotadealer:$ The “VSC/TRAC” warning light, “VSC

OFF” indicator light and slip indicatorlight do not come on after the ignitionkey is turned “ON”.

$ The “VSC/TRAC” warning light and“VSC OFF” indicator light remain on af-ter the ignition key is turned “ON”.

$ The “VSC OFF” indicator light comeson while driving without pushing thecenter differential lock switch.

16C521a

Low tire pressure warning light

The light warns you that the tire infla-tion pressure is low.The low tire pressure warning light comeson when the ignition key is turned to the“ON” position and goes off after a fewseconds. This means the low tire pres-sure warning light is operating properly.If the tire inflation pressure becomes low,the light comes on again.

If the low tire pressure warning light doesnot go off or comes on during driving, itindicates that tire inflation pressure is low.Make sure there is no flat tire. If thelight comes on again even after tire infla-tion pressure adjustment, you may have aflat tire. If there is not adequate airpressure in the tires, the light will not gooff.The light may turn on due to naturalcauses such as natural air leaks or tireinflation pressure changes caused by tem-perature. In this case, adjusting the tireinflation pressure will turn off the light.The tire pressure warning system is nota substitute for checking tire inflationpressure.For details about adjusting the tireinflation pressure, see “Checking tireinflation pressure” on page 320.If the low tire pressure warning lightcomes on, the action you must take isdifferent depending on the type of tiresused.

Tire pressure warning system—

149

Stop your vehicle at a safe place as soonas possible and check that the tire infla-tion pressure is as specified on the tireand loading information label. If the lowtire pressure warning light comes on evenafter tire inflation pressure adjustment, itis probable that you have a flat tire. Ifthe tire goes flat, change to the sparetire. (See page 275.)The spare tire is not equipped with thetire pressure sensor. So, the low tirepressure warning light remains on even ifthe spare tire is mounted.The light goes off a few minutes after airis put into the deflated tire.

CAUTION

If the low tire pressure warning lightcomes on, observe the following in-structions:$ Decelerate as soon as possible to

the most appropriate speed thatconditions permit.

$ Avoid abrupt steering wheel maneu-vering and braking. If the vehicletires deteriorate, you could losecontrol of the steering wheel or thebrakes, causing death or serious in-jury.

$ The warning system may not acti-vate immediately if bursts or sud-den air leakage should occur.

Each tire, including the spare (if pro-vided), should be checked monthlywhen cold and inflated to the inflationpressure recommended by the vehiclemanufacture on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label. (If yourvehicle has tires of a different sizethan the size indicated on the vehicleplacard or tire inflation pressure la-bel, you should consult the appropri-ate section of the owner’s manual todetermine the proper tire inflationpressure.) When the low tire pressuretelltale is illuminated, one or more ofyour tires is significantly under- in-flated. You should stop and checkyour tires as soon as possible, andinflate them to the proper pressure asindicated on the vehicle’s tire infor-mation placard. Driving on a signifi-cantly under- inflated tire causes thetire to overheat and can lead to tirefailure. Under- inflation also reducesfuel efficiency and tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

150

Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction telltale toindicate when the system is not oper-ating properly. When the malfunctiontelltale is illuminated, the system maynot be able to detect or signal lowtire pressure as intended. TPMS mal-function may occur for a variety ofreasons, including the installation ofincompatible replacement tires on thevehicle. Always check the TPMS mal-function telltale after replacing one ormore tires on your vehicle to ensurethat the replacement tires are compat-ible with the TPMS.

NOTICE

! Do not use liquid sealants for a flattire as tire pressure sensors will bedamaged.

! When the tires must be repaired orreplaced, have them repaired or re-placed by the nearest Toyota dealeror authorized tire dealer. The tirepressure sensors will be affectedby the installation or removal oftires.

! The tire pressure warning system isnot to be used as a substitute forregular inspections. Be sure tocheck the air pressure in the tireson a regular basis.

! When the tires must be replaced,replace the grommets for tire pres-sure sensors as well.

! Tire inflation pressure should beadjusted for all 5 tires (including aspare tire).

! Warning tends to turn on whendriving at lower outside tempera-ture, such as in winter, because tireinflation pressure will be decreaseddue to the low temperature. In thiscase, after adjustment and initializa-tion, leave the ignition on for about20 minutes and increase the tireinflation pressure by 20 to 30 kPa.

151

SYSTEM MALFUNCTIONIf the low tire pressure warning lightblinks, it indicates a system malfunc-tion. Contact your Toyota dealer.The system will be disabled in the condi-tions below:$ Electric devices or facilities using simi-

lar radio wave frequencies are nearby.$ If a radio set at similar frequencies is

in use.$ Much snowflakes or ice gets on the

vehicle, in particular, around the wheelsor wheel housings.

$ Non- genuine Toyota wheels are used.$ Snow tires or tire chains are used.$ The sensor battery is expired.$ The tires not equipped with tire pres-

sure sensor are used.$ Radio waves from the air pressure sen-

sor installed on the spare tire cannotbe received.

$ Although the tires are equipped withtire pressure sensors, the selectorswitch (see page 154) is set to othertire setting.

NOTICE

! The use of non- genuine wheels willcause the tire pressure sensors totransmit the electronic code in dif-ferent manner, resulting in the fail-ure of the system.

! The use of tires other than origi-nally installed with genuine wheelsmay also cause the malfunction ofthe system.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept any interfer-ence received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.NOTICE:This equipment has been tested andfound to comply with the limits for aClass B digital device, pursuant to Part15 of the FCC Rules. These limits aredesigned to provide reasonable protec-tion against harmful interference in aresidential installation. This equipmentgenerates, uses and can radiate radiofrequency energy and, if not installedand used in accordance with the instruc-tions, may cause harmful interference toradio communications. However, there isno guarantee that interference will notoccur in a particular installation. If thisequipment does cause harmful interfer-ence to radio or television reception,which can be determined by turning theequipment off and on, the user is en-couraged to try to correct the interfer-ence by one or more of the followingmeasures:

152

$ Reorient or relocate the receiving an-tenna.

$ Increase the separation between theequipment and receiver.

$ Connect the equipment into an outleton a circuit different from that towhich the receiver is connected.

$ Consult the dealer or an experiencedradio / TV technician for help.

FCC WARNING:Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party respon-sible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equip-ment.

—Replacing tires and wheelsAs you might have difficulty in locatinga flat or deflated tire, a tire pressurewarning system should be installed onthe tires of this vehicle.When replacing the wheels, be sure toinstall tire pressure sensors on thewheels.There are 3 ways to set up the tire pres-sure sensors:a. Remove the sensor from the old wheel

and install it to the new wheel.b. Keep the same wheel with tire pres-

sure sensor and replace the tire alone.c. Use a new wheel and sensor.

You have to register an ID code for anew sensor. Up to 2 sets of codescan be registered. As one ID for theoriginally installed sensor is registeredat “MAIN” of the selector switch, usethe “2nd” position to register an ID forthe new sensor.You do not need to re- register the IDcode for any other replacements. Forthe use of the originally installed tires,put the selector switch at “MAIN” andfor the use of tires set purchased later,put the switch at “2nd”. For the sen-sor selector switch, see page 154.

NOTICE

! Have the tires, wheels or sensorsreplaced and ID codes registered byToyota dealer. If you need sensors,purchase from Toyota dealer.

! The sensor nuts should always betightened to a torque of 4 N·m (0.4kgf·m, 2.9 ft·lbf).

! The use of non- genuine wheels willcause the tire pressure sensors totransmit the electronic code in dif-ferent manner, resulting in the fail-ure of the system.

! Initialization should be performedwith the tires adjusted with thetires adjusted at the specified settire inflation pressure. If they arenot adjusted properly, tire inflationpressure to be warned will not beappropriate. It takes about 20 min-utes for initialization. Leave theignition on for about 20 minutesafter initialization.

153

16C523

TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM RE-SET SWITCHThe tire pressure warning system needsto be initialized in the following condi-tions:$ After changing the set pressure

along with the change of the loadingcondition or vehicle speed condition

$ After replacing the ECU$ After replacing or tires or wheels$ After replacing the tire pressure sen-

sorWhen initializing the system, the pres-ent tire condition is stored as a stan-dard.

To initialize the system, perform the fol-lowing:1. Park the vehicle at a safe place and

apply the parking brake. Stop the en-gine.

2. Adjust the pressure of all the installedtires to the specified level. (See“Tires” on page 344.)

3. Start the engine.4. Push and hold the reset switch until

the low tire pressure warning lightblinks three times.

Do not turn the engine off for about 20minutes until initialization is complete.

16C522a

When initializing the system, make surethe low tire pressure warning light blinksthree times. If the warning light does notblink three times, initialization failed andthe tire pressure warning system will notfunction properly. In this case, initializethe system again.Do not push the reset switch without ad-justing the tire inflation pressure to thespecified level. Otherwise, the low tirepressure warning light may not come oneven if the tire inflation pressure is low,or it may come on when the tire inflationpressure is actually normal.If you push the reset switch while thevehicle is moving, initialization is not per-formed.

154

If the low tire pressure warning light doesnot blink when you push and hold thereset switch, have the tire pressure warn-ing system checked at your Toyota dealer.

NOTICE

! Do not turn the engine switch offduring initialization, or the systemmay not function properly due toincomplete initialization.

! Check which tires are being usedbefore initialization of the system,and also check the selector switchposition. (See the following “Selec-tor switch”.)

—Selector switch

16C524a

1. Main position2. 2nd positionThe selector switch is located in theglove box.The ID code is given in the tire pres-sure sensor. To activate the tire pres-sure warning system, it is necessary toregister the ID code of the sensor onthe selector switch in the vehicle.2 sets of ID codes can be registered.The code of the tires originally installedon the vehicle is registered on the switchat “MAIN”. Have a new tires set withnew tire pressure sensors registered at“2nd” by Toyota dealer.

ID codes should be registered by Toyotadealer. Once registered, change the set-ting position each time you purchase tiresand wheels. Re- registration is not re-quired.When purchasing new tires, consult yourToyota dealer.

CAUTION

When the tires whose ID code isregistered at “MAIN” are used, thesystem does not work properly withthe selector switch set at “2nd”. Ifthe tires whose ID code is registeredat “2nd” are stored nearby, the sys-tem will detect their tire inflationpressure (and vice versa).

155

Parking brake

When parking, firmly apply the parkingbrake to avoid inadvertent creeping.To set: Pull up the lever. For better hold-ing power, first depress the brake pedaland hold it while setting the parkingbrake.To release: Pull up the lever slightly (1),press the lock release button (2), and low-er (3).To remind you that the parking brake isset, the parking brake reminder light inthe instrument panel remains on until yourelease the parking brake.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure the parkingbrake is fully released and the park-ing brake reminder light is off.

Cruise control The cruise control allows you to cruisethe vehicle at a desired speed overabout 40 km/h (25 mph) even with yourfoot off the accelerator pedal.Your cruising speed can be maintainedwithin the limits of engine performance,although a slight speed change may occurwhen driving up or down the grades. Onsteeper hills, a greater speed change willoccur so it is better to drive without thecruise control.When the cruise control is on, the drivingpattern of the automatic transmission isfixed in the normal position, regardless ofthe position of the driving pattern selectorswitch.

156

CAUTION

$ To help maintain maximum controlof your vehicle, do not use thecruise control when driving inheavy or varying traffic, or on slip-pery (rainy, icy or snow–covered) orwinding roads.

$ Avoid vehicle speed increases whendriving downhill. If the vehiclespeed is too fast in relation to thecruise control set speed, cancel thecruise control then downshift thetransmission to use engine brakingto slow down.

TURNING THE SYSTEM ONTo operate the cruise control, push the“ON- OFF” switch. This turns the systemon. The indicator light in the instrumentpanel shows that you can now set thevehicle at a desired cruising speed. Anoth-er push on the switch will turn the systemcompletely off.

CAUTION

To avoid accidental cruise control en-gagement, keep the “ON- OFF” switchoff when not using the cruise control.

SETTING AT A DESIRED SPEEDThe transmission must be in “D” or “4”before you set the cruise control speed.Bring your vehicle to the desired speed,push the lever down in the “– SET” direc-tion and release it. This sets the vehicleat that speed.If the speed is not satisfactory, tap thelever up for a faster speed, or tap it downfor a slower speed. Each tap changes theset speed by 1.6 km/h (1.0 mph). You cannow take your foot off the acceleratorpedal.

157

If you need acceleration—for example,when passing—depress the acceleratorpedal enough for the vehicle to exceedthe set speed. When you release it, thevehicle will return to the speed set priorto the acceleration.CANCELLING THE PRESET SPEEDYou can cancel the preset speed by:a. Pulling the control lever in the

“CANCEL” direction and releasing it.b. Depressing the brake pedal.c. Pushing the “ON- OFF” switch.If the vehicle speed falls below about 40km/h (25 mph), the preset speed will auto-matically cancel out.If the vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10mph) below the preset speed, the presetspeed will also automatically cancel out.If the preset speed automatically cancelsout for other than the above cases, haveyour vehicle checked by your Toyota deal-er at the earliest opportunity.

RESETTING TO A FASTER SPEEDPush the lever up in the “+ RES” directionand hold it. Release the lever when thedesired speed is attained. While the leveris held up, the vehicle will gradually gainspeed.However, a faster way to reset is to ac-celerate the vehicle and then push thecontrol lever down in the “– SET” direc-tion.RESETTING TO A SLOWER SPEEDPush the lever down in the “– SET” direc-tion and hold it. Release the lever whenthe desired speed is attained. While thelever is held down, the vehicle speed willgradually decrease.However, a faster way to reset is to de-press the brake pedal and then push thecontrol lever down in the “– SET” direc-tion.Even if you downshift the transmissionfrom the “D” position to “4” with the cruisecontrol on, engine braking will not be ap-plied because the cruise control is notcancelled. To decrease the vehicle speed,reset to a slower speed with the cruisecontrol lever or depress the brake pedal.If you use the brake pedal, cruise controlis cancelled.

RESUMING THE PRESET SPEEDIf the preset speed is cancelled by pullingthe control lever or by depressing thebrake pedal, pushing the lever up in the“+ RES” direction will restore the speedset prior to cancellation.If the preset speed is cancelled when ve-hicle speed falls below about 40 km/h (25mph), the preset speed will be resumedwhen vehicle speed exceeds about 40km/h (25 mph) again.CRUISE CONTROL FAILURE WARNINGIf the “CRUISE” indicator light in theinstrument cluster flashes when using thecruise control, press the “ON- OFF” switchto turn the system off and then press itagain to turn it on.If any of the following conditions then oc-curs, there is some trouble in the cruisecontrol system.$ The indicator light does not come on.$ The indicator light flashes again.$ The indicator light goes out after it

comes on.If this is the case, contact your Toyotadealer and have your vehicle inspected.

158

This active height control suspensioncontrols the vehicle height dependingon the vehicle driving condition. Selectyour desired height among the “HI”(high), “N” (normal) and “LO” (low)modes with the height select switch.

(a) Vehicle height modes“HI” (high) mode—The vehicle height is about 40 mm (1.6in.) higher at front and about 50 mm(2.0 in.) higher at rear than the normalmode height.This mode is suitable when driving on thebumpy roads and through water.This mode is available when the vehiclespeed is under about 30 km/h (19 mph).

CAUTION

The “HI” (high) or “Extra high” modeshould be used for severe off- roaddriving condition only. Because thevehicle’s center of gravity is higher inthis setting, the vehicle may becomeunstable when turning abruptly, re-sulting in an accident.

When the four- wheel drive control lever isput at “L”, this mode may change to theextra high mode automatically in accor-dance with the driving condition.

When the vehicle exceeds the specifiedvehicle speed, the vehicle heightchanges to the following:With the four- wheel drive control leverat “H” and at the vehicle speed of 30km/h (19 mph) or over, the normal modeis automatically selected.With the four- wheel drive control leverat “L” and at the vehicle speed of 50km/h (30 mph) or over, the vehicle heightbecomes automatically about 25 mm (1.0in.) higher than the normal mode height.If the vehicle speed is lowered about 20km/h (12 mph) or less after that, the highmode automatically resumes.

Active height controlsuspension (AHC)

159

Extra high mode—This mode is automatically selectedfrom the high mode with the four- wheeldrive control lever placed in “L” posi-tion depending on the vehicle drivingcondition.If the vehicle becomes stuck, the vehicleheight rises automatically to the extra highmode (slightly higher or at about 70 mm(2.8 in.) higher than normal mode height).In the following cases, the extra highmode changes to the high mode automati-cally:$ When your vehicle is no longer stuck.$ When the four- wheel drive control lever

is put in a position other than “L”.When you push the height select switchon the “ ” side in the extra highmode, the normal mode is selected.Since the extra high mode is automaticallyselected, you cannot select this mode onpurpose with the height select switch.

“N” (normal) mode—The vehicle height in this mode is stan-dard.This mode is suitable for ordinary driving.“LO” (low) mode—The vehicle height is about 50 mm (2.0in.) lower at front and about 40 mm(1.6 in.) lower at rear than the normalmode height.This mode allows you easy access to thevehicle (getting in and out) and easy load-ing and unloading operation.This mode is available when the vehicleis stopped. When you start the vehicle,the normal mode is automatically selected.

NOTICE

The normal mode is automatically se-lected when the vehicle begins tomove in the low mode. So be carefulwhen you drive in any place wherethe overhead height is limited.

(b) Automatic leveling functionRegardless of the number of occupantsor the luggage loading condition, thevehicle height is always automaticallyadjusted to a fixed height in any mode.However, the vehicle height cannot beraised if the vehicle load exceeds the lim-its. (See “(d) Vehicle height adjustment”described below.)

160

(c) Vehicle height mode changingcondition

To change the vehicle height, it is nec-essary to meet the following 3 condi-tions.$ The engine should be running.$ All the side doors and back door

should be closed.$ The height control “OFF” indicator

light should go off.When selecting a mode with the four-wheel drive control lever at “H”, there isa vehicle speed limit. Refer to the follow-ing table.

Yes = The mode can be selected.No = The mode cannot be selected.

Lowmode

Normalmode

Highmode

At vehiclestoppage Yes Yes Yes

Under about 30km/h (19 mph) No Yes Yes

About 30 km/h(19 mph) or over No Yes No

In the following cases the active heightcontrol suspension does not operateeven if the above conditions are allmet.$ The brake pedal has been depressed

for longer than about 5 seconds withthe vehicle stopped.

$ The suspension fluid temperature islower than –30%C (–22%F). If the en-gine is warmed up, the suspensionfluid temperature will be raised as theinside of the engine compartment be-comes warmer. Then the active heightcontrol system becomes operable.

$ Driving on the bumpy roads, whichmay cause the suspension to fullyelongate.

$ The steering wheel is operated abruptlymore than 3/4 turns with center differ-ential lock system activated.

(d) Vehicle height adjustmentTo change the mode, push the heightselect switch on either side of“ ”(higher) and “ ”(lower).

The height control indicator light indicateswhich mode is selected. (See “(f) Heightcontrol indicator lights” described below.)

161

NOTICE

! If you change the vehicle height fre-quently, the pump may overheat. Toprevent this, the active height con-trol suspension should be stoppedtemporarily for a minute betweenselections. Operate it again.

! Before you lower the vehicle heightwith the height select switch, checkunder the vehicle to make surenothing to damage the vehicle orno one to be injured is there andthat the underbody of the vehicledoes not touch the ground.

! After unloading, the height of a ve-hicle equipped with the activeheight control suspension becomesslightly higher than the normal ve-hicle height. Take sufficient carewhere the overhead height is re-stricted.

The vehicle height cannot be raised ifthe vehicle load exceeds the followinglimits:$ Up to 4 occupants∗ plus about 280 kg

(617 lb.) in the normal mode$ Up to 4 occupants∗ plus about 150 kg

(331 lb.) in the high mode∗: About 75 kg (165 lb.) for a personIf the above load capacity is exceeded,the desired vehicle height may not be ob-tained even if the height select switch ispushed. (If the vehicle height cannot beraised in the normal mode and the heightcontrol indicator indicates “LO”, this is be-cause the vehicle is loaded too heavily.Under these conditions, drive your vehiclewith due care.)If the vehicle height cannot be raisedeven after unloading, push the height se-lect switch on the “ ” side and then onthe “ ” side. If this does not work, turnoff the ignition once and then turn on.Operate the select switch again.If the vehicle height is adjusted on theslope, or with the selector lever in a posi-tion other than “P” or “N” while the vehicleis stopped, you may hear a sound causedby the expansion and contraction of thepropeller shaft.

Selecting the high mode—Push the height select switch on the “ ”side when the vehicle speed is underabout 30 km/h (19 mph).To change the normal mode to high,push the switch once.To change the low mode to high, pushthe switch twice. It takes about 30 se-conds until the low mode changes to thehigh mode.Selecting the normal mode—To change the high mode to normal,push the height select switch on the “ ”side once.To change the low mode to normal,push the height select switch on the “ ”side once.Selecting the low mode—Push the height control switch on the“ ” side while the vehicle is stopped.To change the high mode to low, pushthe switch twice.To change the normal mode to low,push the switch once.

162

NOTICE

Do not select the low mode in thebumpy roads. If the underbody of thevehicle touches the rugged road sur-face, the vehicle may be damaged.

Even if the engine is stopped while thevehicle height is being lowered, the op-eration continues for up to 12 seconds.

(e) Turning off the active height controlsuspension

To turn off the active height controlsuspension with the vehicle stopped,push the height control switch. Theheight control “OFF” indicator lightcomes on and the vehicle height isfixed in the same mode as the heightcontrol switch is pushed.This status is memorized in the systemeven after the engine is stopped.If you push the switch again, the heightcontrol “OFF” indicator light goes out andthe active height control suspension isturned on.

CAUTION

If you drive through deep water overabout 500 mm (20 in.) in depth, putthe vehicle height in the HI (High)mode with the active height selectswitch and then turn off the activeheight control suspension by pushingthe height control switch. Drive yourvehicle at 30 km/h (19 mph) or lowerspeed.

NOTICE

! When jacking up or installing tirechains, be sure to turn off the ac-tive height control suspension andstop the engine. Otherwise, the ve-hicle height may change because ofthe automatic leveling function, re-sulting in an accident.

! If your vehicle must be towed, putthe vehicle height in the normalmode and turn off the active heightcontrol suspension. Otherwise, thevehicle height may change becauseof the automatic leveling function,resulting in an accident.

163

! If your vehicle gets ditched, turn offthe active height control suspensionwith the height control switch.Otherwise, the vehicle height maychange because of the automaticleveling function, resulting in an ac-cident.

Even after the active height controlsuspension is turned off with the heightcontrol switch, if the vehicle speed ex-ceeds 30 km (19 mph), the active heightcontrol automatically selects the normalmode. (f) Height control indicator lights

1. Height control indicator lights2. Height control “OFF” indicator lightWhen the ignition switch is turned on,all the indicator lights come on. Theindicator light showing the presentmode only remains on and all otherlights go off after a few seconds. Thismeans the system operates correctly.

If you change the vehicle height mode,the indicator lights change as follows:When changing the vehicle height fromthe normal mode to high:1. The “N” (normal) mode indicator light

goes off and the “HI” (high) mode indi-cator light blinks.

2. After the vehicle height control reachesthe high mode, the high mode indicatorlight remains on.

164

With the active height control suspen-sion turned off, if you operate theheight select switch or the vehicleheight is changing depending on thevehicle speed, the vehicle height con-trol enters the ready mode. In thiscase, the height control indicator lightschange as follows:1. The present mode indicator light comes

on and at the same time the readymode indicator light blinks.

2. When the active height control suspen-sion is turned on, the present modeindicator light goes off and the readymode indicator light blinks. (The vehicleheight changes.)

3. After the vehicle height has changedcompletely, the changed mode indicatorlight stays on.

If the vehicle is loaded heavily, the ve-hicle height cannot be raised even ifthe height select switch is operated. Ifthe underbody of the vehicle hastouched the surface on bumpy roads,the vehicle height cannot be loweredwith the height select switch. Theheight control indicator lights changeas follows:1. The present mode indicator light goes

off and the selected mode indicatorlight blinks.

2. The selected mode indicator light goesoff. (The vehicle height does notchange.) The present mode indicatorlight comes on again.

Height control “OFF” indicator light:When the ignition switch is turned on, thislight comes on. If it goes out after a fewseconds, the active height control suspen-sion operates correctly. If you push theheight control switch, the active heightcontrol is turned off. The height control“OFF” indicator light comes on.In the following cases, there is a problemsomewhere in your active height controlsuspension. Although there is no problemto continue normal driving, have the activeheight control suspension checked by yourToyota dealer as soon as possible.$ The height control “OFF” indicator light

does not come on when the ignitionswitch is turned on.

$ The height control “OFF” indicator lightblinks.

165

(g) Operation in cold weatherThe active height control suspensiondoes not operate in cold weather whenthe suspension fluid temperature dropsbelow –30%C (–22%F).In this case, operating the height controlswitch does not change the vehicle height.The vehicle height control enters theready mode and the selected height con-trol indicator light blinks. The active heightcontrol becomes operable if the engine iswarmed up with the suspension fluid tem-perature being raised within normal operat-ing limits. The vehicle changes to the se-lected height when the vehicle heightcontrol is in the ready mode.When the suspension fluid temperature isaround –30%C (–22%F), the vehicle heightcannot be raised even within the availableload capacity. After warming up the en-gine, push the control switch on the “ ”side once and then on the “ ” side toselect the desired vehicle height.It takes longer to change the vehicleheight when the suspension fluid tem-perature drops below –15%C (5%F).

(h) Parking and stopping tipsIf you immediately stop the engine to parkthe vehicle after off- road driving, the ve-hicle height is lowered slightly as the ve-hicle becomes cool. When parking, makesure there is nothing that will be in con-tact with the underbody of the vehicle.When you start the engine, the vehiclereturns to the previous height.If you park the vehicle for a long time,the vehicle height may be gradually low-ered. When parking for a long time, makesure there is nothing that will be in con-tact with the underbody of the vehicle.When you start the engine, the vehiclereturns to the previous height.If you stop the engine, the vehicle heightmay change in accordance with thechange in the temperature. When youstart the engine, the vehicle returns to theprevious height.

(i) Installing or removing heavy equip-ment

If you install or remove heavy equipmentexceeding 15 kg (33 lb.), the front torsionbar should be adjusted. Consult your To-yota dealer.(j) Active height control failure warningIf there is a problem somewhere in theactive height control suspension, the nor-mal mode is automatically selected. If thisoccurs, the height control “OFF” indicatorlight blinks and the vehicle height controlcannot be activated until the malfunctionis corrected.Stop the engine and start it again. If theheight control “OFF” indicator light goesout, the active height control suspensionreturns to normal. If the height control“OFF” indicator blinks again, bring yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible and have it checked.

166

This skyhook TEMS adjusts the damp-ing effect on the shock absorbers withthe damping mode select switch. Selectone of the 4 modes which is suited tothe driving conditions with the dampingmode select switch to provide good rid-ing comfort and stability.1. For driving on a bumpy road2. For ordinary driving such as in the city

traffic3. For moderate high speed driving4. For sporty type driving such as on

winding mountain roads and high speeddriving

We recommend you to select the mode 2for ordinary driving. The damping effectwill be changed automatically to providegood riding comfort.When your vehicle is loaded heavily oryou are driving in an unpaved road, themode 3 or 4 will be recommended. Toprovide good vehicle stability, the dampingeffect will be harder than for ordinary driv-ing mode.With the four- wheel drive control lever at“L”, the damping effect suitable for off-road driving will be harder in any mode.

Skyhook TEMS (Skyhook Toyota electronicmodulated suspension)

167

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLSAudio systemReference 168. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using your audio system 168. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio system operating hints 181. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear seat audio system 186. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio remote controls (steering switches) 187. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

For vehicle equipped with Navigation system, please refer to theseparate “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

SECTION 1- 8

168

Reference

17c509c

AM·FM radio/cassette player/compactdisc changer controller/compact discplayer with changer (with XM satelliteradio* controller)*: Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner

and service. Contact your Toyota dealerfor details.

This section describes some of the basicfeatures on Toyota audio systems. Someinformation may not pertain to your sys-tem.Your audio system works when the ignitionkey is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFFPush “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio systemon and off.Push “AM·SAT”, “FM”, “TAPE” or “DISC”to turn on that function without pushing“PWR·VOL”.You can turn on each player by insertinga cassette tape or compact disc.You can turn off each player by ejectingthe cassette tape or compact disc. If theaudio system was previously off, then theentire audio system will be turned offwhen you eject the cassette tape or com-pact disc. If the another function was pre-viously playing, it will come on again.*: Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner


SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONSPush “AM·SAT”, “FM”, “TAPE” or “DISC”if the system is already on but you wantto switch from one function to another.*: Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner


LISTENING TO THE XM SATELLITE RA-DIO BROADCAST*To listen to a satellite radio broadcast inyour vehicle, an additional genuine Toyotasatellite receiver and antenna (or equiva-lents) must be purchased and installed. Asubscription to the XM satellite radio ser-vice is also necessary.How to subscribe to an XM satelliteradioAn XM satellite radio is a tuner designedexclusively to receive broadcasts providedunder a separate subscription. Availabilityis limited to the 48 contiguous states.

Using your audio system——some basics

169

How to subscribe:You must enter into a separate serviceagreement with the XM radio in order toreceive satellite broadcast programming inthe vehicle. Additional activation and ser-vice subscription fees apply that are notincluded in the purchase price of the ve-hicle and optional digital satellite tuner.For complete information on subscriptionrates and terms, or to subscribe to theXM radio, visit XM on the web atwww.xmradio.com or call an XM’s ListenerCare at (800) 852- 9696. The XM radio issolely responsible for the quality, availabil-ity and content of the satellite radio ser-vices provided, which are subject to theterms and conditions of the XM radio cus-tomer service agreement.Customers should have their radio IDready; the radio ID can be found by tun-ing to “channel 000” on the radio. Fordetails, see “Displaying the radio ID” be-low.All fees and programming are the respon-sibility of the XM satellite radio and aresubject to change.

Satellite tuner technology notice:Toyota’s satellite radio tuners are awardedType Approval Certificates from XM Satel-lite Radio Inc. on “March 10, 2003” and“April 15, 2003” as proof of compatibilitywith the services offered by the XM satel-lite radio.Displaying the radio IDEach XM tuner is identified with a uniqueradio ID. You will need the radio ID whenactivating XM service or when reporting aproblem.If you select the “CH 000” using the“AUDIO- TUNE” knob, the ID code of 8alphanumeric characters appears. If youselect another channel, display of the IDcode is canceled. The channel (000) alter-nates the display between the radio IDand the specific radio ID code.*: Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner


TONE AND BALANCEFor details about your system’s tone andbalance controls, see the description ofyour own system.ToneHow good an audio program sounds toyou is largely determined by the mix ofthe treble, midrange, and bass levels. Infact, different kinds of music and vocalprograms usually sound better with differ-ent mixes of treble, midrange, and bass.BalanceA good balance of the left and right stereochannels and of the front and rear soundlevels is also important.Keep in mind that if you are listening toa stereo recording or broadcast, changingthe right/left balance will increase the vol-ume of one group of sounds while de-creasing the volume of another.

170

YOUR RADIO ANTENNALowering the antennaThe antenna automatically extends whenthe radio is on, and retracts when theradio mode is off. However, even if youturn off the radio when the radio on therear seat audio system is on, the antennadoes not retract. To lower a power anten-na, push the “!” (down) switch. Also, theantenna automatically goes down when theradio mode is switched off to turn on thecassette tape player or compact disc play-er, turning off the audio system by push-ing “PWR·VOL” or turning the ignition keyto “LOCK” position.

NOTICE

! Retract the antenna when enteringor passing through low structures,such as a garage or an automaticcar wash. Failure to do so maydamage the antenna.

! The antenna mast has to be ex-tended higher than 100 mm (3.94in.) length when the audio is on.Extend the antenna mast when theradio signal is weak.

! Putting a window tint (especially,conductive or metallic type) on theright- hand rear quarter window mayaffect the reception of radio or mo-bile telephone. For the installationof the window tint, consult withyour Toyota dealer.

Down Up

Adjusting the power antennaTo adjust the antenna height, push theswitch at either side, this may also beperformed during antenna extension. Themaximum extension length is 850 mm(33.5 in.).Every time you turn the radio on, theantenna will extend to its previous posi-tion.Clean the antenna mast periodically witha clean dry cloth.

171

CAUTION

Before extending the antenna, confirmthat no one is close enough to getinjured.

YOUR CASSETTE PLAYERWhen you insert a cassette, the exposedtape should be to the right.

NOTICE

Do not oil any part of the player anddo not insert anything other than cas-sette tapes into the slot, or the tapeplayer may be damaged.

YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYERWhen you insert a disc, gently push it inwith the label side up.The discs set in the player are playedcontinuously, starting with disc number 1.The disc number of the disc currently be-ing played, the track number and the timefrom the beginning of the program appearon the display.When play of one disc ends, the firsttrack of the following disc starts. Whenplay of the final disc ends, play of thefirst disc starts again.The player will skip any empty disc num-ber.

NOTICE

! Do not stack up two discs for in-sertion, or it will cause damage thecompact disc player. Insert only onecompact disc into slot at a time.

! Never try to disassemble or oil anypart of the compact disc player. Donot insert anything other than com-pact discs into the slot.

The player is intended for use with 12 cm(4.7 in.) discs only.

172

—Controls and featuresDetails of specific buttons, controls, andfeatures are described in the alphabeticallist that follows.

17c517d

173

1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)These buttons are used to preset andtune in radio stations.To preset a station to a button: Tune inthe desired station (see “AUDIO- TUNE”knob or “SEEK TRACK” button). Push andhold down the button until you hear abeep—this will set the station to the but-ton. The button number will appear on thedisplay.To tune in to a preset station: Push thebutton for the station you want. The but-ton number and station frequency will ap-pear on the display.These systems can store one AM and twoFM stations for each button (The displaywill show “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when youpush “AM·SAT” or “FM” button).XM satellite radio*—These buttons are used to preset andtune in radio channels.To preset a channel to a button: Tune inthe desired channel. (See “AUDIO- TUNE”or “SEEK TRACK”.) Push and hold downthe button until you hear a beep—this willset the channel to the button. The presetbutton number will appear on the display.

To recall a preset channel: Push the but-ton for the channel you want. The presetbutton number and channel number willappear on the display.This radio can store three XM channelsfor each button. (The display will show“SAT1”, “SAT2” or “SAT3” when you push“AM·SAT” button*: Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner


(Eject button)Cassette tapePush the cassette tape eject button toeject a cassette.Compact discTo eject one compact disc only: Push andrelease the compact disc eject button. Ifyou hold the button too long (if the audiosystem is on at this time, you hear abeep.), the mechanism will change to themode for ejecting all the discs loaded inthe changer. You can also eject any spe-cific one of the discs loaded in the playeras follows:1. Push either side of the “!DISC"”

button until the number of the disc youwant to eject is displayed.

2. Push and release the compact disceject button.

To eject all the discs loaded in the player:Push and hold the compact disc eject but-ton (until you hear a beep when the audiosystem is on). The last compact discplayed before pushing the button will beejected first. If a disc is left in the slotfor a long time, the function to eject allthe discs will be automatically cancelled.

(Program)

Push “ ” to select the other side of acassette tape. The display indicates whichside is currently selected (“ ” indicatestop side, “ ” indicates bottom side).Auto- reverse feature: After the cassetteplayer reaches the end of a tape side, itautomatically reverses and begins to playthe other side. This is true whether thecassette was playing or fast forwarding.

174

(Reverse/Fast forward buttons)Cassette PlayerPush the fast forward button to fast for-ward a cassette tape. “FF” will appear onthe display. Push the reverse button torewind a tape. “REW” will appear on thedisplay.To stop the tape while it is fast forward-ing, push the fast forward button or“TAPE”; to stop the tape while it is re-winding, push the reverse button or“TAPE”.If a tape side rewinds completely, the cas-sette player will stop and then play thatsame side. If a tape fast forwards com-pletely, the cassette player will play theother side of the tape, using the auto- re-verse feature.Compact Disc PlayerIf you want to fast forward or reversethrough a compact disc track, push andhold in the fast forward or reverse button.When you release the button, the compactdisc player will resume playing.

AM buttonPush “AM·SAT” to turn on the radio andselect the AM band. “AM” will appear onthe display.If the audio system is off, you can turnon the radio by pushing “AM”. Also, push“AM” to switch from cassette or compactdisc operation to radio operation.AUDIO- TUNE KnobThis knob is used to adjust the tone andbalance or to tune the station manually onthe radio mode.Tone and sound balance adjustment func-tion—Each time you push the “AUDIO- TUNE”knob, the display changes as in the fol-lowing. To adjust the tone and balance orturn on or off the automatic sound leveliz-er, turn the knob.BAS: Adjusts low- pitched tones.MID: Adjusts mid- pitched tones.TRE: Adjusts high- pitched tones.BAL: Adjusts the sound balance betweenthe right and left speakers.FAD: Adjusts the sound balance betweenthe front and rear speakers.

Manual tuning function—Turn the knob. The radio will step up ordown to another frequency.XM satellite radio*—Turn the knob. The radio will step up ordown the channel.*: Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner


DISC (Compact Disc) buttonPush “DISC” to switch from radio or cas-sette operation to compact disc operation.If the audio system is off, you can turnon the compact disc player by pushing“DISC”. In both cases, a disc must alrea-dy be loaded in the player.When the audio is set into compact discoperation, the display shows the track or,track and disc number currently beingplayed.If the player or another unit equipped withthe player malfunctions, your audio systemwill display one of the four following errormessages.

175

If “WAIT” appears on the display, it indi-cates that the inside of the player unitmay be too hot due to the very high ambi-ent temperature. Remove the disc fromthe player and allow the player to cooldown.If “ERROR 1” appears on the display,it indicates the disc is dirty, damaged orlabel face down. Clean the disc or insertit correctly.If “ERROR 3” or “ERROR 4” appearson the display, it indicates there is atrouble inside the system. Eject the disc.Set the disc again.If the malfunction is not rectified, takeyour vehicle to your Toyota dealer.DISC !"

By using this button, you can select adisc you wish to listen to.Push either side of the button until thenumber of the disc you want to listen toappears on the display.

Dolby! B NR∗

If you are listening to a tape that wasrecorded with Dolby! B Noise Reduction,push the “ ” button. The “ ” will ap-pear on the display. Push the button againto turn off Dolby! B NR.The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noiseby about 10 dB. For best sound reproduc-tion, play your tapes with this button onor off according to the mode used forrecording the tape.∗: Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY” and thedouble D symbol are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

FM buttonPush “FM” to turn on the radio and selectthe FM band. “FM1” or “FM2” will appearon the display. This system allows you toset six stations in FM1 and six stationsin FM2.If the audio system is off, you can turnon the radio by pushing “FM”. Also, push“FM” to switch from cassette or compactdisc operation to radio operation.

LOAD buttonThis button is used to load the compactdiscs in the compact disc auto changerwhich is integrated with the radio and cas-sette player. This compact disc autochanger can store up to 6 discs.The key must be in the “ACC” or “ON”position.Loading one compact disc only—To load one compact disc only, quicklypush and release the button. If you holdthe button too long (if the audio systemis on at this time, you hear a beep.), themechanism will change to the mode forloading multiple compact discs. Afterpushing the button, insert a compact disc.At this time, the indicators on both sidesof the slot are flashing. After the disc isloaded, the shutter of the slot will closeand the indicators will stop flashing.If no compact disc is inserted, the shutterwill close after 15 seconds.

176

Loading multiple compact discs—To load multiple compact discs, push andhold (until you hear a beep when the au-dio system is on). After pushing the but-ton, insert the first compact disc. At thistime, the indicators on both sides of theslot are flashing. After the disc is loaded,the shutter of the slot will close and theindicators will stop flashing. After a fewseconds, the shutter will automaticallyopen again so the next disc can be in-serted. The same process can be appliedfor loading the rest of the discs.If no compact disc is inserted, the shutterwill close after 15 seconds.PWR·VOL (Power and Volume) knobPush “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio systemon and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust thevolume.

RAND (Random)There are two random features—you caneither listen to the tracks on all the com-pact discs in the player in random order,or only listen to the tracks on a specificcompact disc in random order.To randomly play for the tracks on a disc:Quickly push and release “ ”. “ ”will appear on the display. The disc youare listening to will play in random order.If you hear a beep, you held the buttontoo long, and the player will play all thetracks in the player in random order. Toturn off the random feature, push this but-ton again.To randomly play for all the tracks in theplayer:Push and hold “ ” until you hear abeep. “ ” will appear on the dis-play and the player will perform all thetracks on all the discs in the player inrandom order. To turn off the random fea-ture, push this button again.

RDS (Radio Data System) displayThe radio will automatically switch to theRDS mode to receive an RDS stationwhile turned to FM broadcasts. “RDS” willappear on the display.RPT (Repeat)Cassette PlayerPush “ ” while the track is playing.“ ” will appear on the display. Whenthe track ends, it will automatically berewound and replayed. This process willbe continued until you push the buttonagain to turn off the repeat feature.There must be at least 3 seconds of blankspace between tracks in order for the re-peat feature to work correctly.

177

Compact Disc PlayerThere are two repeat features—You caneither replay a disc track or a whole com-pact disc.Repeating a track:Quickly push and release “ ” while thetrack is playing. “ ” will appear on thedisplay. If you hear a beep, you held thebutton too long, and the player will repeatthe whole disc. When the track ends, itwill automatically be replayed. This pro-cess will be continued until you push thebutton again to turn off the repeat feature.Repeating a disc:Push and hold “ ” until you hear abeep. “ ” will appear on the display.The player will repeat all the tracks on thedisc you are listening to. When the discends, the player will automatically go backto the first track on the disc and replay.This process will be continued until youpush the button again to turn off the re-peat feature.

SAT* (Satellite radio)Push the “AM·SAT” button to turn on theradio and select the XM band. “SAT1”,“SAT2” or “SAT3” will appear on the dis-play. This system allows you to set eigh-teen XM channels, three for each of thepreset button.Error messagesIf the satellite radio tuner malfunction,your audio system will display one of thesix following error messages.“ANTENNA”:" The XM antenna is not connected.

Check whether the XM antenna cableis attached securely.

" A short- circuit occurs in the antenna orthe surrounding antenna cable. See aToyota certified dealer.

“UPDATING”:" You have not subscribed to the XM

satellite radio. The radio is being up-dated with the latest encryption code.Contact the XM satellite radio for sub-scription information. When a contact iscanceled, you can choose the “CH000”and all free- to- air channels.

" The premium channel you selected isnot authorized. Wait for about 2 sec-onds until the radio returns to the pre-vious channel or “CH001”. If it doesnot change automatically, select anoth-er channel. If you want to listen to thepremium channel, contact the XM satel-lite radio.

“NO SIGNAL”: The XM signal is tooweak at the current location. Wait untilyour vehicle reaches a location with astronger signal.“LOADING”: The unit is acquiring audioor program information. Wait until the unithas received the information.“OFF AIR”: The channel you selected isnot broadcasting any programming. Selectanother channel.“– – –”: The channel you selected is nolonger available. Wait for about 2 secondsuntil the radio returns to the previouschannel or “CH001”. If it does not changeautomatically, select another channel.The XM Listener Care Center is alsoavailable on the phone, please call (800)852- 9696 during the following hours:Monday – Saturday: 7 a.m. – 1 a.m.Sunday: 12 p.m. – 12 a.m.

178

*: Use of satellite radio requires XM tunerand service. Contact your Toyota dealerfor details.

SCAN buttonRadioYou can either scan all the frequencies ona band or scan only the preset stationsfor that band.To scan the preset stations: Push and hold “SCAN” until you hear abeep. The radio will tune in the next pres-et station up the band, stay there for 5seconds, and then move to the next pre-set station. To select a station, push“SCAN” again.To scan all the frequencies: Quickly push and release “SCAN”. If youhear a beep, you held the button too long,and the radio will scan the preset sta-tions. The radio will find the next stationup the station band, stay there for 5 se-conds, and then scan again. To select astation, push “SCAN” again.

XM satellite radio*—You can either scan the currently selectedchannel category or scan only the presetchannels for that band.To scan the preset channels:Push and hold the “SCAN” button untilyou hear a beep. “SCAN” appears on thedisplay. The radio will tune in the nextpreset channel up the band, stay there for5 seconds, and then move to the nextpreset channel. To stop scanning, pushthis button again.To scan the currently selected channelcategory:Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-ton. “SCAN” appears on the display. Theradio will find the next channel in thesame channel category up the band, staythere for 5 seconds, and then scan again.To stop scanning, push this button again.*: Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner


Compact Disc PlayerThere are two scan features—you can ei-ther scan the tracks on a specific disc orscan the first tracks of all the discs in theplayer.Scanning the tracks on a disc:Quickly push and release “SCAN”. “SCAN”will appear on the display and the playerwill scan all the tracks on the disc youare listening to. If you hear a beep, youheld the button too long, and the playerwill scan the first track of all the discs inthe player. To select a track, push “SCAN”again. If the player scanned all the trackson the disc, it will stop scanning.Scanning the first track of all the discs inthe player:Push “SCAN” until you hear a beep.“ ·SCAN” will appear on the displayand the player will perform the first trackof the next disc. To select a disc, pushthe “SCAN” again. If the player hasscanned all the discs, it will stop scan-ning.

179

SEEK TRACK buttonRadioIn the seek mode, the radio finds andplays the next station up or down thestation band.To seek a station, quickly push and re-lease the “"” or “!”. Do this again tofind another station.XM satellite radio*—To select the next channel within the cur-rent channel category, push the “"” or“!” side of the “SEEK TRACK” button.Repeat until a desired channel is found.*: Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner


Cassette PlayerBy using this button, you can skip up ordown to a different track.You can skip up to nine tracks at a time.Push the right or left side of the button.“FF 1” or “REW 1” will appear on thedisplay.Next, push either side of the “SEEKTRACK” button until the number on thedisplay reaches the number of tracks youwant to skip. If you push the button tentimes, the skip feature will be turned off.

When counting the number of tracks youwant to rewind, remember to count thecurrent track as well. For example, if youwant to rewind to a song that is two be-fore the song you are listening to, pushon the left side of the button until “REW3” appears on the display.If you have pushed the track button morethan you wanted to, push the other sideof the button. The track number will bereduced.The track number you select is not validif it is higher than the number of tracksremaining on the current cassette side." After the beginning of the tape is

reached, the player will automaticallystart playing the same side.

" After the end of the tape is reached,the player will automatically reversesides and start playing the other side.

There must be at least 3 seconds of blankspace between tracks for the track buttonto work correctly. In addition, the featuremay not work well with some spokenword, live, or classical recordings.

Compact Disc PlayerBy using this button, you can skip up ordown to a different track.Push either side of the “SEEK TRACK”button until the number of the track youwant to listen to appears on the display.If you want to return to the beginning ofthe current track, push the left side of thebutton one time, quickly.ST (Stereo reception) displayYour radio automatically changes to stereoreception when a stereo broadcast is re-ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If thesignal becomes weak, the radio reducesthe amount of channel separation to prev-ent the weak signal from creating noise.If the signal becomes extremely weak, theradio switches from stereo to mono recep-tion.TAPE buttonPush “TAPE” to switch from radio or com-pact disc operation to cassette operation.If the audio system is off, you can turnon the cassette player by pushing “TAPE”.In both cases, a cassette must already beloaded in the player.

180

TEXT buttonRadioThis button is operational only in RDSmode.To display the station name and text mes-sage, push this button while “RDS” ap-pears on the display. Each time you pushthe button, indication on the display willchange from the band to the station nameto radio text in this order. After 6 secondspasses, indication returns to the band.If the radio receives a radio text fromRDS station, “MSG” appears on the dis-play. Push the button, and a text messageis displayed.If the entire the message is not displayed,“#” will appear on the display. To displaythe rest of the message, push and holdthe button until you hear a beep.After the entire message has been dis-played, the message will disappear.XM satellite radio*1—When you push the “TEXT” button, thedisplay changes as follows:CH NAME → TITLE (SONG/PROGRAMTITLE) → NAME (ARTIST NAME/FEA-TURE) → CH NUMBER → CH NAME

Up to 10 alphanumeric characters can bedisplayed. (Some information will not befully displayed.)The message display will be canceled ifany button that affects the display ispushed.If there is no song/program title or artistname/feature associated with the channelat that time, “– – – – –” will appear onthe display.This XM tuner supports “Audio Services”(Music and Talk) of only XM satellite radioand “Text Information”*2 linked to the re-spective audio services.*1: Use of satellite radio requires XM tun-

er and service. Contact your Toyotadealer for details.

*2: Text information includes, ChannelName, (Artist) Name, (Song) Title andCategory Name.

Compact disc playerThis button is used to change the displayfor the compact disc that contains textdata.To change the display, quickly push andrelease the “TEXT” button while the com-pact disc is playing. The display changesin the order from the elapsed time to disctitle to track title, then back to theelapsed time.If this button is pushed while a compactdisc that does not contain text data isplaying, “NO TITLE” will appear on thedisplay.If the entire disc or track title does notappear on the display, push and hold thebutton until you hear a beep. The rest ofthe title will appear.

181

TRAF (Traffic announcement function)buttonWhen you push the “TRAF” button, “TRAFSEEK” appears on the display and theradio will start seeking any traffic programstation.If no traffic program station is found, “NOTRAF INFO” appears on the display for afew seconds and the display returns tothe previous mode.TYPE (Program type) buttonWhen you push this button, the currentprogram type receiving from RDS stationappears on the display.If the system receives no RDS stations,“NO PTY” appears on the display.Each time you push the “!” or “"”, theprogram type changes as in the following:" ROCK" EASY LIS (Easy listening)" CLS/JAZZ (Classical music and jazz)" R&B (Rhythm and Blues)" INFORM (Information)" RELIGION

" MISC" ALERT (Emergency message)

With the program type displayed, push the“SEEK/TRACK” or “SCAN” button. You canseek or scan for the station broad castingthe same type of program.XM satellite radio*—When you push the “"” or “!” side ofthe “TYPE” button while receiving a XMchannel, the current channel category ap-pears on the display.When the channel category appears, pusheither “"” or “!” side of the “TYPE” but-ton to switch to the next or previous cate-gory.*: Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner


NOTICE

To ensure correct audio system op-erations:! Be careful not to spill beverages

over the audio system.! Do not put anything other than a

cassette tape or Compact Disc intothe slot.

! The use of a cellular phone insideor near the vehicle may cause anoise from the speakers of the au-dio system which you are listeningto. However, this does not indicatea malfunction.

RADIO RECEPTIONUsually, a problem with radio receptiondoes not mean there is a problem withyour radio—it is just the normal result ofconditions outside the vehicle.For example, nearby buildings and terraincan interfere with FM reception. Powerlines or telephone wires can interfere withAM signals. And of course, radio signalshave a limited range. The farther you arefrom a station, the weaker its signal willbe. In addition, reception conditionschange constantly as your vehicle moves.

Audio system operating hints

182

Here are some common reception prob-lems that probably do not indicate a prob-lem with your radio:FMFading and drifting stations—Generally, theeffective range of FM is about 40 km (25miles). Once outside this range, you maynotice fading and drifting, which increasewith the distance from the radio transmit-ter. They are often accompanied by distor-tion.Multi- path—FM signals are reflective,making it possible for two signals to reachyour antenna at the same time. If thishappens, the signals will cancel each oth-er out, causing a momentary flutter orloss of reception.Static and fluttering—These occur whensignals are blocked by buildings, trees, orother large objects. Increasing the basslevel may reduce static and fluttering.Station swapping—If the FM signal youare listening to is interrupted or weak-ened, and there is another strong stationnearby on the FM band, your radio maytune in the second station until the origi-nal signal can be picked up again.

AMFading—AM broadcasts are reflected bythe upper atmosphere—especially at night.These reflected signals can interfere withthose received directly from the radio sta-tion, causing the radio station to soundalternately strong and weak.Station interference—When a reflected sig-nal and a signal received directly from aradio station are very nearly the samefrequency, they can interfere with eachother, making it difficult to hear the broad-cast.Static—AM is easily affected by externalsources of electrical noise, such as hightension power lines, lightening, or electri-cal motors. This results in static.XM*Alternation or modification carried outwithout appropriate authorization may in-validate the user’s right to operate theequipment.*: Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner


NOTICE

This equipment has been tested andfound to comply with the limits for aclass B digital device, pursuant toPart 15 of the FCC Rules. These lim-its are designed to provide reasonableprotection against harmful interfer-ence in a residential installation. Thisequipment generates, uses and canradiate radio frequency energy and, ifnot installed and used in accordancewith the instructions, may causeharmful interference to radio commu-nications. However, there is no guar-antee that interference will not occurin a particular installation.

183

If this equipment does cause harmfulinterference to radio or television re-ception, which can be determined byturning the equipment off and on, theuser is encouraged to try to correctthe interference by one or more ofthe following measures:—Reorient or relocate the receivingantenna.—Increase the separation between theequipment and receiver.—Connect the equipment into an out-let on a circuit different from that towhich the receiver is connected.—Consult the dealer or an experi-enced radio/TV technician for help.

NOTICE

This XM tuner supports “Audio Ser-vices” (Music and Talk) of only XMsatellite radio and “Text Information”*linked to the respective audio ser-vices.*Text Information includes, ChannelName, (Artist) Name, (Song) Title andCategory Name.

CARING FOR YOUR CASSETTE PLAYERAND TAPESFor the best performance for your cas-sette player and tapes:Clean the tape head and other parts regu-larly." A dirty tape head or tape path can

decrease sound quality and tangle yourcassette tapes. The easiest way toclean them is by using a cleaning tape.(A wet type is recommended.)

Use high- quality cassettes." Low- quality cassette tapes can cause

many problems, including poor sound,inconsistent playing speed, andconstant auto- reversing. They can alsoget stuck or tangled in the cassetteplayer.

" Do not use a cassette if it has beendamaged or tangled or if its label ispeeling off.

" Do not leave a cassette in the playerif you are not listening to it, especiallyif it is hot outside.

" Store cassettes in their cases and outof direct sunlight.

" Avoid using cassettes with a total play-ing time longer than 100 minutes (50minutes per side). The tape used inthese cassettes is thin and could getstuck or tangled in the cassette player.

184

CARING FOR YOUR COMPACT DISCPLAYER AND DISCS" The player is intended for use with 12

cm (4.7 in.) discs only." Extremely high temperatures can keep

your compact disc player from working.On hot days, use the air conditioningto cool the vehicle interior before youlisten to a disc.

" Bumpy roads or other vibrations maymake your compact disc player skip.

" If moisture gets into your compact discplayer, you may not hear any soundeven though your compact disc playerappears to be working. Remove thedisc from the player and wait until itdries.

CAUTION

Compact disc players use an invisiblelaser beam which could cause hazard-ous radiation exposure if directedoutside the unit. Be sure to operatethe player correctly.

" Use only compact discs marked asshown above. The following productsmay not be playable on your compactdisc player.Copy- protected CDCD- R (CD- Recordable)CD- RW (CD- Re- writable)CD- ROM

Special shaped discs

Z17058

Transparent/translucent discs

185

Low quality discs

Labeled discs

NOTICE

Do not use special shaped, transpar-ent/translucent, low quality or labeleddiscs such as those shown in the il-lustrations. The use of such discsmay damage the player or changer, orit may be impossible to eject thedisc.

Correct Wrong

" Handle compact discs carefully, espe-cially when you are inserting them.Hold them on the edge and do notbend them. Avoid getting fingerprintson them, particularly on the shiny side.

" Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes, orother disc damage could cause theplayer to skip or to repeat a section ofa track. (To see a pin hole, hold thedisc up to the light.)

" Remove discs from the compact discplayer when you are not listening tothem. Store them in their plastic casesaway from moisture, heat, and directsunlight.

186

To clean a compact disc: Wipe it with asoft, lint- free cloth that has been damp-ened with water. Wipe in a straight linefrom the center to the edge of the disc(not in circles). Dry it with another soft,lint- free cloth. Do not use a conventionalrecord cleaner or anti- static device.

Rear seat audio system

17c529

In the rear seat, you can enjoy a differ-ent mode from the one used on thefront audio system, using headphones.(a) Turning the system on and off“ON/SOURCE” button: Use this button toturn system on when the system is off.When the system is turned on, the modechanges by pushing this button.“OFF” button: Use this button to turn offthe system.“Volume adjusting” knob: Use this knobto adjust the volume.

(b) When the radio mode is selected“ CH ” button: Push this button toselect a preset station on the preset but-ton of the front audio system. Each pushof the button changes to the station withhigher numbered preset button.“ TUNE ” button: Push this buttonfor manual tuning or seek tuning." Push this button briefly. Each time you

push the button, the radio will step upor down to another frequency.

" Push this button and hold it until youhear a beep. The radio will begin seek-ing up or down for a station, and willstop on reception. Each time you pushthe button, the stations will besearched automatically one after anoth-er.

187

(c) When the “TAPE” mode is selected“ PROG ” button: Push this buttonto select the other side of a cassettetape.“ TRACK ” button: Push the left orright side to skip forward or backward tolocate the song you want to hear. Fordetails, see “SEEK TRACK button” onpage 179.(d) When the “CD” or “DVD” mode is

selected“ DISC ” button: Use this button tosearch a desired disc.“ TRACK ” button: Use this buttonto search a desired track or push thisbutton and hold it to fast forward or rever-se.

(e) Some basicsThis system cannot be used if the audiosystem is not turned on.You cannot select “AM” or “FM” mode inthe rear seat if the “FM” or “AM” modeis used on the front seats side.If you select the same mode as the frontseats side, operating the controller willaffect the mode on the front seats side.Vehicles with navigation system only:" When the XM satellite radio* is se-

lected in the front seat, the “CD” or“DVD” mode cannot be selected in therear seat.

" When the “CD” or “DVD” mode is se-lected in the rear seat, selecting theXM satellite radio* in the front seat willautomatically change the “CD” or“DVD” to “AM” mode in the rear seat.

CAUTION

This system is not designed for adriver. So, the driver should not usethis system while driving.

The switches are installed on the left sideof the steering wheel.“MODE” switch: Use this switch tochange the mode. If a tape or compactdisc is not inserted, the “TAPE” or “CD”mode is skipped. When you push theswitch with the audio system turned off,the audio system turns on.

“ ” switches: Use this switches to ad-just the volume. Push “+” to increase thevolume and “–” to decrease the volume.The volume continues to increase or de-crease while the switch is being pressed.

Audio remote controls (steering switches)

188

(a) When the radio mode is selected“ ” or “ ” switch: Push this switch forseek tuning or to select a station." To select a preset station, push the

switch briefly. Do this again to selectthe next preset station.

" To seek a station, push and hold theswitch until you hear a beep. Do thisagain to find the next station. If youpush the switch on either side of the“!” or “"” during the seek mode,seeking will be canceled.

" To step up or down the frequency,push and hold the switch even afteryou hear a beep. When you releasefrom the switch, the radio will beginseeking up or down for a station. Dothis again to find the next station.

XM satellite radio*—To select a preset channel, push the “"”or “!” side of the switch. Repeat until adesired channel is found.*: Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner


(b) When the “TAPE” mode is selected“ ” or “ ” switch: Push this switch tofast forward or rewind the tape or forautomatic program selection." Push this switch until you hear a beep

to fast forward or rewind the tape. Tostop fast forwarding or rewinding, pushthe same side on the switch until youhear a beep.

" Push this switch briefly for automaticprogram selection. When automaticallyselecting a program, you can skip upto 9 programs at a time. For details,see “SEEK TRACK button” on page179.

(c) When the “CD” or “DVD” mode isselected

“ ” or “ ” switch: Use this switch toselect a desired track or disc." Push this switch briefly to select a de-

sired track." To select a desired disc, push and hold

this switch until the desired number ofthe disc appears and you hear a beep.

CAUTION

Operate the switches with due carewhile you are driving to avoid acci-dents.

189

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLSAir conditioning systemFront air conditioning system:

Controls 190. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air flow selector settings 194. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating tips 195. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument panel vents 197. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear air conditioning system:Controls 198. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air flow selector settings 200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

For vehicle equipped with Navigation system, please refer to theseparate “ Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

SECTION 1- 9

190

1. Temperature selector knob2. “AUTO” button3. Temperature display4. Fan speed display5. Air flow display6. “MODE” button7. “A/C” button8. Windshield air flow button9. Fan speed control button

10. Air intake control button11. “OFF” button

Front air conditioning system——Controls

191

“AUTO” buttonFor automatic operation of the air condi-tioning, press the “AUTO” button. An indi-cator light will illuminate to show that theautomatic operation mode has been se-lected.In the automatic operation mode, the airconditioning selects the most suitable fanspeed and air flow according to the tem-perature.You may use manual controls if you wantto select your own settings.To turn off the automatic operation, pressthe “MODE” or fan speed control button.Fan speed control buttonPush the “!” (increase) or “"” (decrease)button to adjust the fan speed.In automatic operation, you do not haveto adjust the fan speed unless you desireanother fan speed mode.Temperature selector knobTo increase the temperature, turn the knobto right side, to decrease it, turn the knobto left side.

“MAX COLD” appears when you adjust tomaximum cooling, and “MAX HOT” ap-pears when you adjust to maximum warm-ing.“OFF” buttonPush the button to turn off the air condi-tioning system.

“MODE” buttonPush the button to select the vents usedfor air flow.In automatic operation, you do not haveto select the air flow unless you desireanother air flow mode.1. Panel—Air flows mainly from the

instrument panel vents.2. Bi- level—Air flows from both the floor

vents and the instrument panel vents.3. Floor—Air flows mainly from the floor

vents.It is recommended that you close thelower vent. For details about this, see“Instrument panel vents” described be-low.

192

4. Floor/Windshield—Air flows mainlyfrom the floor vents and windshieldvents.It is recommended that you close thelower vent. For details about this, see“Instrument panel vents” described be-low.

For details about air flow selector settings,see “Air flow selector settings” describedbelow.

Windshield air flow buttonWhen this button is pressed, air flowsmainly from the windshield vents.Pressing the button once again returns theair flow mode to the last one used.Pressing the windshield air flow buttonturns on the defroster- linked air condition-ing. At this time, the “A/C” button indicatorcomes on when the air intake control isin recirculate mode regardless of whetheror not the “A/C” button is pressed in. Thisis to clean up the front view more quickly.To turn off the air conditioning alone,press the “A/C” button once again.

When the “A/C” button is not pressed in,pressing “MODE” button turns off the airconditioning.For details about air flow selector setting,see “Air flow selector settings” describedbelow.

193

Air intake control buttonPress the button to select the air source.An indicator light will illuminate to showwhich air intake mode is being selected.1. Recirculate—Recirculates the air inside

the vehicle.2. Fresh—Draws outside air into the sys-

tem.

“A/C” buttonTo turn on the air conditioning, press the“A/C” button. The “A/C” button indicatorwill come on. To turn the air conditioningoff, press the button again.If the “A/C” button indicator flashes, thereis a problem in the air conditioning systemand the air conditioning automaticallyshuts off. If this happens, take your ve-hicle to a Toyota dealer for service.

194

—Air flow selector settings

See “Instrument panel vents” described below.

17C001a

195

—Operating tips! To cool off your Toyota after it has

been parked in the hot sun, drive withthe windows open for a few minutes.This vents the hot air, allowing the airconditioning to cool the interior morequickly.

! Make sure the air intake grilles in frontof the windshield are not blocked (byleaves or snow, for example).

! On humid days, do not blow cold airon the windshield. The windshield couldfog up because of the difference in airtemperature on the inside and outsideof the windshield.

! Keep the area under the front seatsclear to allow air to circulate through-out the vehicle.

! On cold days, set the fan speed tohigh for a minute to help clear theintake ducts of snow or moisture. Thiscan reduce the amount of fogging onthe windows.

! When driving on dusty roads, close allwindows. If dust thrown up by the ve-hicle is still drawn into the vehicle afterclosing the windows, it is recommendedthat the air intake control button be setto FRESH and the fan speed controlbutton to any setting except “OFF”.

! If following another vehicle on a dustyroad, or driving in windy and dustyconditions, it is recommended that theair intake control button be temporarilyset to RECIRCULATE, which will closeoff the outside passage and preventoutside air and dust from entering thevehicle interior.

HeatingFor best results, set controls to:

Fan speed—“AUTO”Temperature— To the desired

temperatureAir intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—“AUTO”Lower vent—CLOSEDAir conditioning—OFF

! For quick heating, select recirculatedair for a few minutes. To keep thewindows from fogging, select fresh af-ter the vehicle interior has been war-med.

! Press the “A/C” button on for dehumidi-fied heating.

! Choose floor/windshield air flow to heatthe vehicle interior while defrosting ordefogging the windshield.

196

Air conditioningFor best results, set controls to:


temperatureAir intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—“AUTO”Air conditioning—ON

! For quick cooling, select recirculatedair for a few minutes.

VentilationFor best results, set controls to:


temperatureAir intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—“AUTO”Air conditioning—OFF

DefoggingThe inside of the windshieldFor best results, set controls to:

Temperature— Towards high temperatureto heat;low temperature to cool

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—WINDSHIELDLower vent—CLOSED

When pressing the windshield air flow but-ton, the air intake selects “Fresh” auto-matically. This is to clean up the frontview more quickly.Press the “A/C” button for dehumidifiedheating or cooling. This setting clears thefront view more quickly.! On humid days, do not blow cold air

on the windshield—the difference be-tween the outside and inside tempera-tures could make the fogging worse.

DefrostingThe outside of the windshieldFor best results, set controls to:

Temperature—Towards high temperatureAir intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—WINDSHIELDLower vent—CLOSED

When pressing the windshield air flow but-ton, the air intake selects “Fresh” auto-matically. This is to clean up the frontview more quickly.Press the “A/C” button for dehumidifiedheating or cooling. This setting clears thefront view more quickly.! To heat the vehicle interior while de-

frosting the windshield, choosefloor/windshield air flow.

197

—Instrument panel vents

Center vents

Side vents

Lower vent

If air flow control is not satisfactory, checkthe instrument panel vents. The instrumentpanel vents may be opened or closed asshown.For removing frost or fog, it is recom-mended that you close the lower ventwhen you use the “Floor”, the “Floor/Wind-shield” or the “Windshield” mode.

198

1. Rear air conditioning on- off switch2. “AUTO” button3. Air flow selector4. Fan speed selector5. Temperature selector6. “OFF” button

Rear air conditioning system——Controls

18c507b

199

Rear air conditioning on- off switchTo turn the rear air conditioning on, pressthe “REAR” switch. To turn the rear airconditioning off, press the switch again.“AUTO” buttonFor automatic operation of the rear airconditioning, press the “AUTO” button. Anindicator light will illuminate to show thatthe automatic operation mode has beenselected.In the automatic operation mode, the rearair conditioning selects the most suitablefan speed and air flow according to thetemperature.You may use manual controls if you wantto select your own settings.Fan speed selectorPress the buttons to adjust the fan speed.In automatic operation, you do not haveto adjust the fan speed unless you desireanother fan speed mode.

Temperature selectorMove the lever to adjust the tempera-ture—to the right to warm, to the left tocool.

“OFF” buttonPush the button to turn off the rear airconditioning system.

Air flow selectorPress one of the buttons to select thevents used for air flow. An indicator lightwill illuminate to show which air flowmode is being selected.In automatic operation, you do not haveto select the air flow unless you desireanother air flow mode.1. Panel—Air flows mainly from the roof

vents.2. Bi- level—Air flows from both the floor

vents and the roof vents.3. Floor—Air flows mainly from the floor

vents.Air at higher than room temperature doesnot flow from the roof vents.

200

—Air flow selector settings

18c508a

Warm air Cool air

201

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSOther equipmentClock 202. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outside temperature display 202. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear view monitor system 203. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cigarette lighter and ashtray 206. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power outlets 207. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off switch 208. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear console box 209. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glove box 209. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Garage door opener 209. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary boxes 214. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cup holders 215. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Card holder 217. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tie- down hooks 217. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cargo net hooks 218. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Roof luggage carrier 218. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor mat 220. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coat hooks 221. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1- 10

202

Clock

18C510

Vehicles with navigation system

Vehicles without navigation system

To reset the hour: Push the “H” button.To reset the minutes: Push the “M” button.The key must be in the “ACC” or “ON”position.If quick adjustment to a full hour is de-sired, push the “:00” button.For example, if the “:00” button is de-pressed when the time is between1:01 – 1:29, the time will change to 1:00.If the time is between 1:30 – 1:59, thetime will change to 2:00.If the electrical power source has beendisconnected from the clock, the time dis-play will automatically be set to 1:00.When the instrument panel lights areturned on, the brightness of the time in-dication will be reduced.

Outside temperature display

18C511

Vehicles with navigation system

Vehicles without navigation system

203

The display indicates between the rangeof –22°F and 122°F.The key must be in the “ON” position.

The rear view monitor system assiststhe driver by displaying an image ofthe rear of the vehicle while backingup. The displayed image on the screenis a horizontally reversed mirror imageof the inside rear view mirror.To display the rear view image on thescreen, place the selector lever in the“R” position when the ignition switchin the “ON” position.If you move the selector lever out of the“R” position, the screen returns to theprevious screen. Operating another func-tion of the navigation system will displayanother screen.The rear view monitor system is a supple-ment device intended to assist back up.When backing up, be sure to check be-hind and all around the vehicle visually.

CAUTION

! Never depend on the rear viewmonitor system entirely when back-ing up. Always make sure your in-tended path is clear.Use caution just as you would whenbacking up any vehicle.

! Never back up while looking only atthe screen. The image on thescreen is different from actual con-ditions. Depicted distances betweenobjects and flat surfaces will differfrom actual distances. If you backup while looking only at the screen,you may hit a vehicle, a person oran object. When backing up, besure to check behind and all aroundthe vehicle visually and with mir-rors before proceeding.

! Do not use the system when theback door is not completely closed.

Rear view monitor system

204

! If the back of the vehicle is hit, theposition and mounting angle of thecamera may change. Be sure tohave the camera’s position andmounting angle checked at yourToyota dealer.

! If the temperature changes rapidly,such as when hot water is pouredon the vehicle in cold weather, thesystem may not operate normally.

! If the camera lens becomes dirty, itcannot transmit a clear image. Ifwater droplets, snow, or mud ad-here to the lens, rinse with waterand wipe with a soft cloth. If thelens is extremely dirty, wash it witha mild cleanser and rinse.

! Use your own eyes to confirm thevehicle’s surroundings, as the dis-played image may become faint ordark, and moving images will bedistorted, or not entirely visiblewhen the outside temperature islow. When backing up, be sure tocheck behind and all around the ve-hicle visually and with mirror beforeproceeding.

When replacing the tires, please consultyour Toyota dealer. If you replace thetires, the area displayed on the screenmay change.

19C508

On screen

Corners of bumper

Check surroundings for safety.

205

AREA DISPLAYED ON SCREENImage is displayed approximately levelon screen.! The area detected by the camera is

limited. Objects which are close toeither corner of the bumper or underthe bumper cannot be seen on thescreen.

! The area displayed on the screenmay vary according to vehicle orien-tation or road conditions.

19C509a

THE REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEMCAMERAThe rear view monitor system camera islocated on the back door as shown in theillustration. The camera uses a speciallens. The distance of the image that ap-pears on the screen differs from the actu-al distance.In the following cases, it may becomedifficult to see the images on the screen,even when the system is functioning.! In the dark (for example, at night)! When the temperature near the lens is

extremely high or low

! When water droplets are adhering tothe camera, or when humidity is high(for example, when it rains)

! When foreign matter (for example,snow or mud) adheres to the cameralens

! When the sun or the beam of head-lights is shining directly into the cam-era lens

206

Check surroundings for safety.

If a bright light (for example, sunlight re-flected off the vehicle body) is picked upby the camera, the smear effect∗ peculiarto the camera may occur.∗: Smear effect—A phenomenon that oc-curs when a bright light (for example, sun-light reflected off the vehicle body) ispicked up by the camera; when trans-mitted by the camera, the light sourceappears to have a vertical streak aboveand below it.

Cigarette lighter and ashtray

CIGARETTE LIGHTERTo use the cigarette lighter, press it in.After it finishes heating up, it automati-cally pops out ready for use.If the engine is not running, the key mustbe in the “ACC” position to use the light-er.Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressedin.Use a Toyota genuine cigarette lighter orequivalent for replacement.

ASHTRAYTo use the ashtray, pull it out.When finished with your cigarette, thor-oughly extinguish it in the ashtray to pre-vent other cigarette butts from catchingfire. After using the ashtray, close the lidcompletely.To remove the ashtray, press down on thelock spring plate and pull out.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or sudden stopwhile driving, always close the ash-tray completely after use.

207

Power outletsThe power outlets are designed forpower supply for car accessories. Touse them, open the lids as shown inthe following illustrations.The key must be in the “ACC” or “ON”position to be used.

NOTICE

! To prevent the fuse from beingblown, do not use the electricityover the total vehicle capacity of12V/120W (all the outlets together).

! To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, do not use the poweroutlets longer than necessary whenthe engine is not running.

! Close the power outlet lids whenthe power outlets are not in use.Inserting anything other than an ap-propriate plug that fits the outlet,or allowing any liquid to get intothe outlet may cause electrical fail-ure or short circuits.

Instrument panel

Rear console box (Vehicles without navigation system)

Rear console box (Vehicles with navigation system)

Luggage compartment

208

The roll sensing of curtain shield airbagsoff switch can turn off the curtainshield airbags and front seat belt pre-tensioners in a vehicle rollover. Thisswitch should only be used in a situa-tion where the inflation is not desired(such as extreme off- road driving).When you push the roll sensing of curtainshield airbags off switch for a few secondswith the ignition switch on, the roll sens-ing of curtain shield airbags off indicatorlight comes on and the roll sensing func-tion is turned off. When you push theswitch again, the indicator light goes offand the roll sensing function is turned on.

In a severe side impact, the curtain shieldairbags on impacted side will inflate evenif the roll sensing function is turned off.If the ignition switch is turned to “ACC” or“LOCK” with the roll sensing function offand then the ignition switch is turned backto “ON”, the roll sensing function will beback on automatically.For details, “Seat belt pretensioners” onpage 57 or “SRS side airbags and curtainshield airbags with roll sensing function”on page 67.

CAUTION

! Make sure the roll sensing of cur-tain shield airbags off indicator lightis not on.

! When the roll sensing of curtainshield airbags off switch is turnedon (and the roll sensing of curtainshield airbags off indicator light ison), the curtain shield airbags andfront seat belt pretensioners willnot inflate in a vehicle rollover andturning off the curtain shield air-bags can reduce the occupantprotection which your vehicle safetysystems can provide to you in cer-tain accidents and increase the like-lihood of death or serious injuries.

Roll sensing of curtain shieldairbags off switch

209

Rear console box

To use the rear console box, open asshown in the illustration.1. For upper box2. For lower box

Glove box

To use the glove box, do this.To open: Pull the lever.With the instrument panel lights on, theglove box light will come on when theglove box is open.To lock: Insert the master key and turn itclockwise.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stop,always keep the glove box doorclosed while driving.

Garage door opener

Indicatorlight

Buttons

The garage door opener (HomeLink"

Universal Transceiver) is manufactured un-der license from HomeLink" and can beprogrammed to operate garage doors,gates, entry doors, door locks, home light-ing systems, and security systems, etc.(a) Programming the HomeLink"

The HomeLink" in your vehicle has 3buttons and you can store one programfor each button.To ensure correct programming into theHomeLink", install a new battery in thehand- held transmitter prior to program-ming.

210

The battery side of the hand- held trans-mitter must be pointed away from theHomeLink" during the programming pro-cess.For Canadian users, follow the procedurein “Programming an entrance gate/Pro-gramming all devices in the Canadianmarket”.1. Decide which of 3 HomeLink" buttons

you want to program. Push and holddown one of the buttons until the indi-cator corresponding to the selectedchannel begins to flash.

19C514

HomeLink"

25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.)

Hand- heldgaragetransmitter

2. Place your hand- held garage transmit-ter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.) away fromthe surface of the HomeLink".Keep the indicator light on theHomeLink" in view while programming.

19C515

3. Simultaneously press and hold thehand- held garage transmitter buttonalong with the selected HomeLink" but-ton.

Do not release the buttons until step4 hasbeen conpleted.4. When the indicator light on the

HomeLink" changes from a slow to arapid flash after 20 seconds, you canrelease both buttons.

211

19C516

5. Test the operation of the HomeLink" bypressing the newly programmed button.If programming a garage door opener,check to see if the garage door opensand closes.If the garage door does not operate,identify if your garage transmitter is ofthe “Rolling Code” type. Press and holdthe programmed HomeLink" button.The garage door has the rolling codefeature if the indicator light (on theHomeLink") flashes rapidly and thenremains lit after 2 seconds. If yourgarage transmitter is the “Rolling Code”type, proceed to the heading “Program-ming a rolling code system”.

6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each re-maining HomeLink" button to programanother device.

Programming a rolling code systemIf your device is “Rolling Code”equipped, it is necessary to followsteps 1 through 4 under the heading“Programming the HomeLink"” beforeproceeding with the steps listed below.

1. Locate the “training” button on the ceil-ing mounted garage door opener motor.The exact location and color of thebutton may vary by brand of garagedoor opener. Refer to the owner’sguide supplied by the garage dooropener manufacturer for the location ofthis “training” button.

2. Press the “training” button on the ceil-ing mounted garage door opener motor.Following this step, you have 30 sec-onds in which to initiate step 3 below.

3. Press and release the vehicle’s pro-grammed HomeLink" button twice.The garage door may open. If the doordoes open, the programming process iscomplete. If the door does not open,press and release the button a thirdtime. This third press and release willcomplete the programming process byopening the garage door.The ceiling mounted garage door open-er motor should now recognize theHomeLink" unit and be able activatethe garage door up/down.

4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each re-maining HomeLink" button to programanother rolling code system.

212

Programming an entrance gate/Program-ming all devices in the Canadian market1. Decide which of the 3 HomeLink" but-

tons you want to program.2. Place your hand- held gate/device

transmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.)away from the surface of theHomeLink".Keep the indicator light on theHomeLink" in view while programming.

3. Press and hold the selectedHomeLink" button.

4. Continuously press and release (cycle)the hand- held gate/device transmitterbutton every two seconds until step 5is complete.

5. When the indicator light on theHomeLink" changes from a slow to arapid flash after 20 seconds, you canrelease both buttons.

6. Test the operation of the HomeLink" bypressing the newly programmed button.Check to see if the gate/device oper-ates correctly.

7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each re-maining HomeLink" button to programanother device.

Programming other devicesTo program other devices such as homesecurity systems, home door locks orlighting, contact your authorized Toyotadealer for assistance.Reprogramming a buttonIndividual HomeLink" buttons cannot beerased, however, to reprogram a singlebutton, follow the procedure “Programmingthe HomeLink"”.(b) Operating the HomeLink"

To operate the HomeLink", press the ap-propriate HomeLink" button to activate theprogrammed device. The HomeLink" indi-cator light should come on. TheHomeLink" continues to send the signalfor up to 20 seconds as long as the but-ton is pressed.

19C517

(c) Erasing the entire HomeLink"memory (all three programs)

To erase all previously programmed codesat one time, press and hold down the 2outside buttons for 20 seconds until theindicator light flashes.If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erasethe programs stored in the HomeLink"memory.

213

For additional programming assistancewith your HomeLink" Universal Trans-celver call the:! Toyota Customer Experience Center at

1- 800- 331- 4331 (U.S.A.)Refer to HomeLink" on the internet at :WWW.HOMELINK.COM

CAUTION

! When programming the HomeLink"Universal Transceiver, you may beoperating a garage door or otherdevice. Make sure people and ob-jects are out of the way of the ga-rage door or other device to pre-vent potential harm or damage.

! Do not use this HomeLink" Univer-sal Transceiver with any garagedoor opener that lacks the safetystop and reverse feature as re-quired by federal safety standards.(This includes any garage dooropener model manufactured beforeApril 1, 1982.) A garage door open-er which cannot detect an object(signaling the door to stop and re-verse), does not meet current feder-al safety standards. Using a garagedoor opener without these featuresincreases risk of serious injury ordeath.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and with RSS- 210 of the ICRules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept any interfer-ence received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.WARNING: This transmitter has beentested and complies with FCC and ICRules. Changes or modifications notexpressly approved by the party re-sponsible for compliance could voidthe user’s authority to operate thedevice.

214

Auxiliary boxes—To use the auxiliary boxes, open asshown in the following illustrations.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stop,always keep the auxiliary box closedwhile driving.

Type A (luggage compartment)

Type B (luggage compartment)

Type C (rear console)

215

—First- aid kit holder

An auxiliary box is equipped with aband to hold the first- aid kit.Although the first- aid kit itself is not in-cluded as an original equipment, this aux-iliary box can be used to store the first-aid kit.Hold the first- aid kit with a band.Make sure the first- aid kit is securelyheld.

—Warning reflector holder

An auxiliary box is equipped with aband to hold the warning reflector.Although the warning reflector itself is notincluded as an original equipment, thisauxiliary box can be used to store thewarning reflector.Hold the warning reflector kit with a band.Make sure the warning reflector is secure-ly held.

Cup holdersThe cup holder is designed for holdingcups or drink- cans securely. To usethem, observe the following illustra-tions.

CAUTION

! Do not place anything else otherthan cups or drink- cans in the cupholder, as such items may bethrown about in the compartmentand possibly injure people in thevehicle during a sudden braking oran accident.

! To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a suddenstop while driving, keep the cupholder closed when it is not in use.

216

For front seats

The cup holder can be adjusted to thesize of cups by changing the separatorposition or moving the separator arms.You can use it as an accessory box byremoving the separator inside.

19C008

For front seat

To use a cup holder in the console box.1. Open the console box lid. Pull down

the knob so that the cup holder swingsdown.

2. While holding the console box lid withyour hand, push down the cup holderto be secured.

NOTICE

! When you use the cup holder in theconsole box, make sure it is se-curely locked.

! Do not rest your arm on the cupholder in the console box.

! Wipe up spilt drink at once.

For second seats

For third seats (right- hand side)

217

For third seats (left- hand side)

Card holder

You can store a card in the slot asshown in the illustration.

Tie- down hooks

To secure your luggage, use the tie-down hooks as shown above.See “Cargo and luggage” on page 247 forprecautions when loading luggage.

NOTICE

Do not use the seat anchors insteadof the tie- down hooks.

218

Cargo net hooks

These hooks are designed to hang car-go net.To hang the cargo net, use the cargo nethooks and rear tie- down hooks.Although the cargo net itself is not in-cluded as an original equipment, thesehooks can be used to hang the cargo net.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the hook, avoidhanging things other than a cargo neton it.

Roof luggage carrier

Roof rails

Crossrails

The roof luggage carrier consists ofroof rails and sliding cross rails.

Sideknobs

Upperknob

ADJUSTING THE POSITION OF CROSSRAILS:1. Turn the upper and side knobs coun-

terclockwise to loosen the crossrails.

219

2. Slide the cross rails to the appropri-ate position for loading the luggagesand turn the side knobs clockwise totighten the cross rails securely.

There are cross rail stoppers on the roofrails which help you prevent the crossrails being touched with the tilted up moonroof.

NOTICE

Do not remove the cross rail stop-pers, or the moon roof may be dam-aged when it is tilted.

3. In order to fix the cross rails to theappropriate length, turn the upperknobs clockwise after tightening allof the side knobs.

CAUTION

Make sure the cross rails are fixedsecurely by pushing forward and rear-ward them. Failure to do so maycause an unexpected accident or se-vere injury in the event of emergencybraking or a collision.

Follow the manufacture’s instructions andprecautions when installing the attach-ments or their equivalent.

CAUTION

When you load cargo on the roof lug-gage carrier, observe the following:! Place the cargo so that its weight

is distributed evenly between thefront and rear axles.

! If loading long or wide cargo, neverexceed the vehicle overall length orwidth. (See “Dimensions andweights” on page 340 for informa-tion on your vehicle overall lengthand width.)

! Before driving, make sure the cargois securely fastened on the roofluggage carrier.

! Loading cargo on the roof luggagecarrier will make the center of thevehicle gravity higher. Avoid highspeeds, sudden starts, sharp turns,sudden braking or abrupt maneu-vers, otherwise it may result in lossof control or vehicle rollover due tofailure to operate this vehicle cor-rectly.

220

! If driving for a long distance, onrough roads, or at high speeds,stop the vehicle now and then dur-ing the trip to make sure the cargoremains in its place.

! Do not exceed 70 kg (154 lb.) cargoweight on the roof luggage carrier.

NOTICE

When loading the luggages, be carefulnot to scratch the surface of themoon roof.

Floor mat

Use a floor mat of the correct size.If the floor carpet and floor mat have ahole, then it is designed for use with alocking clip. Fix the floor mat with lockingclip into the hole in the floor carpet.

CAUTION

Make sure the floor mat is properlyplaced on the floor carpet. If the floormat slips and interferes with themovement of the pedals during driv-ing, it may cause an accident.

221

Coat hooks

To use the coat hook, push the hook.

CAUTION

Do not hook a hanger, heavy or sharppointed object on the coat hook. Ifthe curtain shield airbags inflate,those items will be hurled away withgreat force or the curtain shield air-bags may not active correctly. Whenyou hang clothes, hang them on thecoat hook directly.

222

223

INFORMATION BEFORE DRIVINGYOUR TOYOTA Off- road vehicle precautionss 224. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Break- in period 225. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel 225. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel pump shut off system 227. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation in foreign countries 227. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Three- way catalytic converter 228. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine exhaust cautions 229. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Facts about engine oil consumption 230. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Iridium- tipped spark plugs 231. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake system 231. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake pad wear limit indicators 235. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear step bumper 235. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limited- slip differential 236. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Your Toyota’s identification 236. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Theft prevention labels 237. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suspension and chassis 237. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire information 238. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle load limits 246. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cargo and luggage 247. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of tires 250. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 2

224

Off- road vehicle precautionsThis vehicle belongs to the utility ve-hicle class, which has higher groundclearance and narrower tread in relationto the height of its center of gravity tomake it capable of performing in a widevariety of off- road applications. Specif-ic design characteristics give it a high-er center of gravity than ordinary pas-senger cars. This vehicle designfeature causes this type of vehicle tobe more likely to rollover. And, utilityvehicles have a significantly higher rol-lover rate than other types of vehicles.An advantage of the higher groundclearance is a better view of the roadallowing you to anticipate problems. Itis not designed for cornering at thesame speeds as ordinary passengercars any more than low- slung sportscars designed to perform satisfactorilyunder off- road conditions. Therefore,sharp turns at excessive speeds maycause rollover.

CAUTION

Always observe the following precau-tions to help minimize the risk of se-rious personal injury or damage toyour vehicle:! In a rollover crash, an unbelted per-

son is significantly more likely todie than a person wearing a seatbelt. Therefore, the driver and allpassengers should fasten their seatbelts whenever the vehicle is mov-ing.

! Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu-vers, if at all possible. Failure tooperate this vehicle correctly mayresult in loss of control or vehiclerollover causing death or seriousinjury.

! Loading cargo on the roof luggagecarrier will make the center of thevehicle gravity higher. Avoid highspeeds, sudden starts, sharp turns,sudden braking or abrupt maneu-vers, otherwise it may result in lossof control or vehicle rollover due tofailure to operate this vehicle cor-rectly.

225

! Always slow down in gusty cross-winds. Because of its profile andhigher center of gravity, your ve-hicle is more sensitive to sidewinds than an ordinary passengercar. Slowing down will allow youto have better control.

! When driving off- road or in ruggedterrain, do not drive at excessivespeeds, jump, make sharp turns,strike objects, etc. This may causeloss of control or vehicle rollovercausing death or serious injury.You are also risking expensive dam-age to your vehicle’s suspensionand chassis.

! Do not drive horizontally acrosssteep slopes. Driving straight upor straight down is preferred. Yourvehicle (or any similar off- road ve-hicle) can tip over sideways muchmore easily than forward or back-ward.

Break- in periodDrive gently and avoid high speeds.Your vehicle does not need an elaboratebreak- in. But following a few simple tipsfor the first 1600 km (1000 miles) can addto the future economy and long life ofyour vehicle:! Avoid full- throttle acceleration when

starting and driving.! Avoid racing the engine.! Try to avoid hard stops during the first

300 km (200 miles).! Do not drive for a long time at any

single speed, either fast or slow.! Do not tow a trailer during the first 800

km (500 miles).

FuelFUEL TYPEYour new vehicle must use only un-leaded gasoline.To help prevent gas station mix- ups, yourToyota has a smaller fuel tank opening.The special nozzle on pumps with un-leaded fuel will fit it, but the larger stan-dard nozzle on pumps with leaded gas willnot.At a minimum, the gasoline you useshould meet the specifications of ASTMD4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB 3.5- M93in Canada.

NOTICE

Do not use leaded gasoline. Use ofleaded gasoline will cause the three-way catalytic converter to lose its ef-fectiveness, the emission control sys-tem to function improperly, and dam-age to the engine. Also, this can in-crease maintenance costs.

226

OCTANE RATINGSelect Octane Rating 87 (Research Oc-tane Number 91) or higher. For im-proved vehicle performance, the use ofpremium unleaded gasoline with an Oc-tane Rating of 91 (Research OctaneNumber 96) or higher is recommended.Use of unleaded gasoline with an octanerating or research octane number lowerthan stated above will cause persistentheavy knocking. If it is severe, this willlead to engine damage.If your engine knocks...If you detect heavy knocking even whenusing the recommended fuel, or if youhear steady knocking while holding asteady speed on level roads, consult yourToyota dealer.However, occasionally, you may noticelight knocking for a short time while accel-erating or driving up hills. This is normaland there is no need for concern.

GASOLINE CONTAINING DETERGENTADDITIVESToyota recommends the use of gasolinethat contains detergent additives toavoid buildup of engine deposits.However, all gasoline sold in the U.S.contains detergent additives to keep cleanand/or clean intake systems.QUALITY GASOLINEAutomotive manufacturers in the U.S.,Europe and Japan have developed aspecification for quality fuel namedWorld- Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) thatis expected to be applied world wide.The WWFC consists of four categoriesthat depend on required emission lev-els. In the U.S., category 3 has beenadopted. The WWFC improves air quali-ty by providing for better emissions invehicle fleets, and customer satisfactionthrough better vehicle performance.CLEANER BURNING GASOLINECleaner burning gasoline, including re-formulated gasoline that contains oxy-genates such as ethanol or MTBE isavailable in many areas.

Toyota recommends the use of cleanerburning gasoline and appropriately blendedreformulated gasoline. These types of gas-oline provide excellent vehicle perfor-mance, reduce vehicle emissions, and im-prove air quality.OXYGENATES IN GASOLINEToyota allows the use of oxygenateblended gasoline where the oxygenatecontent is up to 10% ethanol or 15%MTBE. If you use gasohol in your Toyota,be sure that it has an octane rating no low-er than 87.Toyota does not recommend the use ofgasoline containing methanol.GASOLINE CONTAINING MMTSome gasoline contain an octane en-hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).Toyota does not recommend the use ofgasoline that contains MMT. If fuel con-taining MMT is used, your emission con-trol system may be adversely affected.The Malfunction Indicator Lamp on the in-strument cluster may come on. If this hap-pens, contact your Toyota dealer for ser-vice.

227

GASOLINE QUALITYIn a very few cases, you may experiencedriveability problems caused by the partic-ular gasoline that you are using. If youcontinue to have unacceptable driveability,try changing gasoline brands. If that doesnot rectify your problem, then consult yourToyota dealer.

NOTICE

! Do not use gasohol other thanstated above. It will cause fuel sys-tem damage or vehicle performanceproblems.

! If drive ability problems are occur(poor hot starting, vaporizing, en-gine knock, etc.), discontinue theuse.

! Take care not to spill gasohol dur-ing refueling. Gasohol may causepaint damage.

FUEL TANK CAPACITY96 L (25.4 gal., 21.1 Imp.gal.)

Fuel pump shut off systemThe fuel pump shut off system stops sup-plying fuel to the engine when the enginestalls or an airbag inflates upon collision.To restart the engine after the fuel pumpshut off system activates, turn the ignitionswitch to “ACC” or “LOCK” once and startit.

CAUTION

Inspect the ground under the vehiclebefore restarting the engine. If youfind that liquid has leaked onto theground, it is the fuel system hasbeen damaged and it is in need ofrepair. In this case, do not restart theengine.

Operation in foreign countriesIf you plan to drive your Toyota inanother country...First, comply with the vehicle registrationlaws.Second, confirm the availabi l i ty of thecorrect fuel (unleaded and minimum oc-tane number).

228

Three- way catalytic converter

i20018a

The three- way catalytic converter is theemission control devices installed inthe exhaust system.Its purpose is to reduce pollutants in theexhaust gas.

CAUTION

! Keep people and combustible mate-rials away from the exhaust pipewhile the engine is running. Theexhaust gas is very hot.

! Do not idle or park your vehicleover anything that might burn easi-ly such as grass, leaves, paper orrags.

NOTICE

A large amount of unburned gasesflowing into the three- way catalyticconverter may cause it to overheatand create a fire hazard. To preventthis and other damage, observe thefollowing precautions:! Use only unleaded gasoline.! Do not drive with an extremely low

fuel level; running out of fuel couldcause the engine to misfire, creat-ing an excessive load on the three-way catalytic converter.

! Do not allow the engine to run atidle speed for more than 20 min-utes.

! Avoid racing the engine.! Do not push- start or pull- start your

vehicle.! Do not turn off the ignition while

the vehicle is moving.! Keep your engine in good running

order. Malfunctions in the engineelectrical system, electric ignitionsystem or fuel system could causean extremely high three- way cata-lytic converter temperature.

! If the engine becomes difficult tostart or stalls frequently, take yourvehicle in for a check- up as soonas possible. Remember, your Toyotadealer knows your vehicle and itsthree- way catalytic converter sys-tem best.

229

! To ensure that the three- way cata-lytic converter and the entire emis-sion control system operate proper-ly, your vehicle must receive theperiodic inspections required by theToyota Maintenance Schedule. Forscheduled maintenance information,refer to the “Scheduled MaintenanceGuide” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment”.

Engine exhaust cautions

CAUTION

! Avoid inhaling the engine exhaust.It contains carbon monoxide, whichis a colorless and odorless gas. Itcan cause unconsciousness or evendeath.

! Make sure the exhaust system hasno holes or loose connections. Thesystem should be checked fromtime to time. If you hit something,or notice a change in the sound ofthe exhaust, have the systemchecked immediately.

! Do not run the engine in a garageor enclosed area except for thetime needed to drive the vehicle inor out. The exhaust gases cannotescape, making this a particularlydangerous situation.

! Do not remain for a long time in aparked vehicle with the engine run-ning. If it is unavoidable, however,do so only in an unconfined areaand adjust the heating or coolingsystem to force outside air into thevehicle.

! Keep the back door and quarterwindows closed while driving. Anopen or unsealed back door andquarter windows may cause exhaustgases to be drawn into the vehicle.

! To allow proper operation of yourvehicle’s ventilation system, keepthe inlet grilles in front of the wind-shield clear of snow, leaves, or oth-er obstructions.

! If you smell exhaust fumes in thevehicle, drive with the windowsopen and the back door closed.Have the cause immediately locatedand corrected.

230

FUNCTIONS OF ENGINE OILEngine oil has the primary functions oflubricating and cooling the inside of theengine, and plays a major role in main-taining the engine in proper working order.ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTIONIt is normal that an engine should con-sume some engine oil during normalengine operation. The causes of oilconsumption in a normal engine are asfollows.! Oil is used to lubricate pistons, piston

rings and cylinders. A thin film of oilis left on the cylinder wall when a pis-ton moves downwards in the cylinder.High negative pressure generated whenthe vehicle is decelerating sucks someof this oil into the combustion chamber.This oil as well as some part of the oilfilm left on the cylinder wall is burnedby the high temperature combustiongases during the combustion process.

! Oil is also used to lubricate the stemsof the intake valves. Some of this oilis sucked into the combustion chambertogether with the intake air and isburned along with the fuel. High tem-perature exhaust gases also burn theoil used to lubricate the exhaust valvestems.

The amount of engine oil consumed de-pends on the viscosity of the oil, thequality of the oil and the conditions thevehicle is driven under.More oil is consumed by high- speed driv-ing and frequent acceleration and decel-eration.A new engine consumes more oil, sinceits pistons, piston rings and cylinder wallshave not become conditioned.Oil consumption: Max. 1.0 L per 1000km (1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 Imp.qt/600miles)When judging the amount of oil con-sumption, note that the oil may becomediluted and make it difficult to judgethe true level accurately.

As an example, if a vehicle is used forrepeated short trips, and consumes a nor-mal amount of oil, the dipstick may notshow any drop in the oil level at all, evenafter 1000 km (600 miles) or more. Thisis because the oil is gradually becomingdiluted with fuel or moisture, making itappear that the oil level has not changed.The diluting ingredients evaporate outwhen the vehicle is then driven at highspeeds, as on an expressway, making itappear that oil is excessively consumedafter driving at high speeds.IMPORTANCE OF ENGINE OIL LEVELCHECKOne of the most important points in prop-er vehicle maintenance is to keep the en-gine oil at the optimum level so that oilfunction will not be impaired. Therefore, itis essential that the oil level be checkedregularly. Toyota recommends that the oillevel be checked every time you refuelthe vehicle.

NOTICE

Failure to check the oil level regularlycould lead to serious engine troubledue to insufficient oil.

Facts about engine oilconsumption

231

For detailed information on oil level check,see “Checking the engine oil level” onpage 314.

Your engine is fitted with iridium- tippedspark plugs.

NOTICE

Use only iridium- tipped spark plugsand do not adjust gaps for your en-gine performance and smooth drivabil-ity.

Brake systemBRAKE SYSTEMThis brake system has two independenthydraulic circuits. If either circuit shouldfail, the other will still work. However, thepedal will be harder to press, and yourstopping distance will increase. Also, thebrake system warning light may come on.

CAUTION

Do not drive your vehicle with only asingle brake system. Have yourbrakes fixed immediately.

BRAKE BOOSTERThe brake booster uses brake fluid pres-surized by the pump to power- assist thebrakes. If the brake booster fails duringdriving, the brake system warning lightcomes on and buzzer sound continuously.In this case, the brakes may not workproperly. If they do not work well, depressthe brake pedal firmly. If the brake systemwarning light comes on, immediately stopyour vehicle and contact your Toyota deal-er.

Iridium- tipped spark plugs

232

The brake system warning light may stayon for about 60 seconds after the ignitionkey is turned to “ON” position. It is nor-mal if the light turns off after a while.Depressing the brake pedal repeatedlymay turn on the brake system warninglight and buzzer. It is normal if the lightturns off and the buzzer stops soundingafter a few seconds.You may hear a small sound in the enginecompartment after the engine is started orthe brake pedal is depressed repeatedly.This is a pump pulsating sound of thebrake system, and it is not a malfunction.

CAUTION

! Do not pump the brake pedal if theengine stalls. Each push on thepedal uses up your brake fluidpressure reserve.

! Even if the power assist is com-pletely lost, the brakes will stillwork. But you will have to push thepedal hard, much harder than nor-mal. And your braking distance willincrease.

ANTI- LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (with “ABS” warning light)The anti- lock brake system is designedto automatically help prevent lock- up ofthe wheels during a sudden braking orbraking on slippery road surfaces. Thisassists in providing stability and steer-ing performance of the vehicle underthese circumstances.

Effective way to press the ABS brakepedal: When the anti- lock brake systemfunction is in action, you may feel thebrake pedal pulsating and hear a noise.In this situation, to let the anti- lockbrake system work for you, just hold thebrake pedal down more firmly. Do notpump the brake in a panic stop. Thiswill result in reduced braking perfor-mance.

The anti- lock brake system becomes op-erative after the vehicle has acceleratedto a speed in excess of approximately 10km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when thevehicle decelerates to a speed belowapproximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

Depressing the brake pedal on slipperyroad surfaces such as on a manhole cov-er, a steel plate at a construction site,joints in a bridge, etc. on a rainy daytends to activate the anti- lock brake sys-tem.You may hear a click or motor sound inthe engine compartment for a few secondswhen the engine is started or just afterthe vehicle begins to move. This meansthat the anti- lock brake system is in theself check mode, and does not indicate amalfunction.When the anti- lock brake system is ac-tivated, the following conditions mayoccur. They do not indicate a malfunc-tion of the system:! You may hear the anti- lock brake sys-

tem operating and feel the brake pedalpulsating and the vibrations of the bodyand steering wheel. You may also hearthe motor sound in the engine compart-ment even after the vehicle is stopped.

! At the end of the anti- lock brake sys-tem activation, the brake pedal maymove a little forward.

233

CAUTION

Do not overestimate the anti- lockbrake system: Although the anti- lockbrake system assists in providing ve-hicle control, it is still important todrive with all due care and maintaina moderate speed and safe distancefrom the vehicle in front of you, be-cause there are limits to the vehiclestability and effectiveness of steeringwheel operation even with the anti-lock brake system on.If tire grip performance exceeds itscapability, or if hydroplaning occursduring high speed driving in the rain,the anti- lock brake system does notprovide vehicle control.

Anti- lock brake system is not de-signed to shorten the stopping dis-tance: Always drive at a moderatespeed and maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front of you.Compared with vehicles without ananti- lock brake system, your vehiclemay require a longer stopping dis-tance in the following cases:! Driving on rough, gravel or snow-

covered roads.! Driving with tire chains installed.! Driving over the steps such as the

joints on the road.! Driving on roads where the road

surface is pitted or has other differ-ences in surface height.

Install all 4 tires of specified size atappropriate pressure: The anti- lockbrake system detects vehicle speedsusing the speed sensors for respec-tive wheels’ turning speeds. The useof tires other than specified may failto detect the accurate turning speed,resulting in a longer stopping dis-tance.

“ABS” warning lightThe light comes on when the ignitionkey is turned to the “ON” position. Ifthe anti- lock brake system and thebrake assist system work properly, thelight turns off after a few seconds.Thereafter, if either of the systems mal-functions, the light comes on.

234

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti- lock brake system, the brake assistsystem, the vehicle stability control sys-tem and/or active traction control systemdo/does not operate, but the brake systemstill operates conventionally.When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti- lock brake system does not operateso that the wheels could lock up duringa sudden braking or braking on slipperyroad surfaces.If either of the following conditions oc-curs, this indicates a malfunction some-where in the components monitored bythe warning light system. Contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible toservice the vehicle.! The light does not come on when the

ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-tion, or remains on.

! The light comes on while you are driv-ing.


CAUTION

If the “ABS” warning light remains ontogether with the brake system warn-ing light, immediately stop your ve-hicle at a safe place and contact yourToyota dealer.In this case, not only the anti- lockbrake system will fail but also thevehicle will become extremely unsta-ble during braking.

Either of the following conditions mayoccur, but do not indicate a malfunc-tion.! The light may stay on for about 60

seconds after the ignition key is turnedto “ON” position. It is normal if it turnsoff after a while.

! Depressing the brake pedal repeatedlymay turn on the light. It is normal if itturns off after a few seconds.

DRUM- IN- DISC TYPE PARKING BRAKESYSTEMYour vehicle has a drum- in- disc typeparking brake system. This type of brakesystem needs bedding- down of the brakeshoes periodically or whenever the parkingbrake shoes and/or drums are replaced.Have your Toyota dealer perform the bed-ding- down.BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEMWhen you slam the brakes on, thebrake assist system judges as an emer-gency stop and provides more powerfulbraking for a driver who cannot holddown the brake pedal firmly.When you slam the brakes on, more pow-erful braking will be applied. At this time,you may hear a sound in the enginecompartment and feel the vibrations of thebrake pedal. This does not indicate a mal-function.The brake assist system becomes opera-tive after the vehicle has accelerated toa speed in excess of approximately 10km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when thevehicle decelerates to a speed belowapproximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

235

The brake assist system may not work forabout 60 seconds after the engine isstarted.For an explanation of this system’s warn-ing light, see “Service reminder indicatorsand warning buzzers” on page 124.

Brake pad wear limit indicators

The brake pad wear limit indicators onyour disc brakes give a warning noisewhen the brake pads are worn to wherereplacement is required.If you hear a squealing or scraping noisewhile driving, have the brake padschecked and replaced by your Toyotadealer as soon as possible. Expensive ro-tor damage can result if the pads are notreplaced when necessary.

Rear step bumper

The rear step bumper is for rear endprotection and easier step- up loading.To get on the rear step bumper, use theshaded area between the arrows in theillustration.

CAUTION

! Do not allow more than one personto get on the rear step bumper ata time. It is designed for only oneperson.

! Never drive the vehicle with anyoneon the rear step bumper.

236

Limited- slip differentialSome Toyotas are equipped with a lim-ited- slip differential. If one of the rearwheels begins to spin, the limited- slip dif-ferential is designed to aid traction byautomatically transmitting driving force tothe other rear wheel. If you are not surewhether your vehicle is equipped with one,you can ask your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Do not start or run the engine whileyour vehicle is supported by a jack.The vehicle could be driven off thejack and could pose a danger or re-sult in serious injury.

NOTICE

Use only a spare tire of the samesize, construction and load capacityas the original tires on your Toyotabecause damage to the limited- slipdifferential could possibly occur withanother tire type.

The vehicle identification number (VIN)is the legal identifier for your vehicle.This number is on the left top of theinstrument panel, and can be seenthrough the windshield from outside.This is the primary identification numberfor your Toyota. It is used in registeringthe ownership of your vehicle.

20c508a

The vehicle identification number (VIN) isalso on the Certification Label.

Your Toyota’s identification——Vehicle identification number

237

—Engine number

The engine number is stamped on theengine block as shown.

Theft prevention labelsYour new vehicle carries theft preven-tion labels which are approximately 56mm (2.20 in.) by 16 mm (0.63 in.).The purpose of these labels is to reducethe incidence of vehicle thefts by facilitat-ing the tracing and recovery of parts fromstolen vehicles. The label is designed sothat once it is applied to a surface, anyattempt to remove it will result in destroy-ing the integrity of the label. Transferringthese labels intact from one part to anoth-er, will be impossible.

NOTICE

You should not attempt to remove thetheft prevention labels as it may vio-late certain state or federal laws.

Suspension and chassis

CAUTION

Do not modify the suspension/chassiswith lift kits, spacers, springs, etc. Itcan cause dangerous handling charac-teristics, resulting in loss of control.

238

This illustration indicates typical tiresymbols.1. Tire size—For details, see “Tire

size” on page 240.2. DOT and Tire Identification

Number (TIN)—For details, see“DOT and Tire Identification Num-ber (TIN)” on page 239.

3. Tire ply composition and materi-als—Plies mean a layer of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords meanthe strands forming the plies in thetire.

4. Location of tread wear indica-tors—For details, see “Checkingand replacing tires” on page 323.

5. Summer tire or all season tire—An all season tire has “M+S” onthe sidewall. The tire not markedwith “M+S” is a summer tire. Fordetails, see “Types of tires” onpage 250.

6. Radial tires or bias- ply tires—Aradial tire has “RADIAL” on thesidewall. A tire not marked with“RADIAL” is a bias- ply tire.

Tire information——Tire symbols

20c505a

239

7. “TUBELESS” or “TUBE TYPE”—A tubeless tire does not have atube inside the tire and air is direct-ly filled in the tire. A tube type tirehas a tube inside the tire and thetube maintains the air pressure.

8. Uniform tire quality grad-ing—For details, see “Uniform tirequality grading” that follows.

9. Load limit at maximum cold tireinflation pressure—For details,see “Checking and replacing tires”on page 323.

10. Maximum cold tire inflationpressure—This means the pres-sure to which a tire may be in-flated. For recommended cold tireinflation pressure, see “Tires” onpage 344.

21A009a

This illustration indicates typical DOTand Tire Identification Number (TIN).1. “DOT” symbol2. Tire Identification Number (TIN)3. Tire manufacturer ’s identification

mark4. Tire size code5. Manufacturer ’s optional tire type

code (3 or 4 letters)6. Manufacturing week7. Manufacturing year

The “DOT” symbol certifies that thetire conforms to applicable FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standards.

—DOT and Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN)

240

20c506a

This illustration indicates typical tiresize.1. Tire use (P=Passenger car,

T=Temporary use)2. Section width (in millimeters)3. Aspect ratio (tire height to section

width)4. Tire construction code (R=Radial,

D=Diagonal)5. Wheel diameter (in inch)6. Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)7. Speed symbol (alphabet with one

letter)

21A007a

1. Section width2. Tire height3. Wheel diameter

21A006a

1. Bead2. Sidewall3. Shoulder4. Tread5. Belt6. Inner liner7. Reinforcing rubber8. Carcass9. Rim lines

10. Bead wires11. Chafer

—Tire size —Name of each section of tire

241

—Uniform tire quality gradingThis information has been preparedin accordance with regulations issuedby the National Highway Traffic Safe-ty Administration of the U.S. Depart-ment of Transportation. It providesthe purchasers and/or prospectivepurchasers of Toyota vehicles with in-formation on uniform tire quality grad-ing.Your Toyota dealer will help answerany questions you may have as youread this information.DOT quality grades—All passengervehicle tires must conform to Fed-eral Safety Requirements in addi-tion to these grades. Qualitygrades can be found where appli-cable on the tire sidewall betweentread shoulder and maximum sec-tion width. For example: Treadwear200 Traction AA Temperature A.

Tread wear—The tread wear gradeis a comparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when tested un-der controlled conditions on a speci-fied government test course. For ex-ample, a tire graded 150 would wearone and a half (1- 1/2) times as wellon the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performanceof tires depends upon the actualconditions of their use, however, andmay depart significantly from thenorm due to variations in driving hab-its, service practices and differencesin road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B, C—The tractiongrades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C, and they representthe tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-ment as measured under controlledconditions on specified governmenttest surfaces of asphalt and concrete.A tire marked C may have poor trac-tion performance.Warning: The traction grade assignedto this tire is based on braking(straight ahead) traction tests anddoes not include cornering (turning)traction.

242

Temperature A, B, C—The tempera-ture grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resis-tance to the generation of heat andits ability to dissipate heat whentested under controlled conditions ona specified indoor laboratory testwheel. Sustained high temperaturecan cause the material of the tire todegenerate and reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead tosudden tire failure. The grade C cor-responds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of per-formance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.Warning: The temperature grades forthis tire are established for a tire thatis properly inflated and not over-loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, either sep-arately or in combination, can causeheat buildup and possible tire failure.

243

Tire related term Meaning

Cold tire inflation pressuretire inflation pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hoursor more, or it has not been driven more than 1.5 km or 1 mile under thatcondition

Maximum inflation pressure the maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated and it isshown on the sidewall of the tire

Recommended inflation pressure cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer

Accessory weightthe combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced)of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, pow-er seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these items are available asfactory- installed equipment (whether installed or not)

Curb weightthe weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximumcapacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, air conditioning and addi-tional weight optional enginethe sum of—the sum of—(a) curb weight;

Maximum loaded vehicle weight(a) curb weight(b) accessory weight;Maximum loaded vehicle weight (b) accessory weight(c) vehicle capacity weight; and(d) d ti ti i ht( ) y g(d) production options weight

Normal occupant weight 68 kg (150 lb.) times the number of occupants specified in the second columnof Table 1 that follows

—Glossary of tire terminology

244


Production options weightthe combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over2.3 kg (5 lb.) in excess of those standard items which they replace, not pre-viously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy dutybrakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim

Vehicle capacity weight(Total load capacity)

the rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lb.) times the vehicle’s desig-nated seating capacity

Intended outboard sidewall

(A) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeperthan the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire orIntended outboard sidewall than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or

(B) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particularside that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle

Occupant distribution distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table1 that follows

Rim a metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beadsare seated

Rim diameter (Wheel diameter) nominal diameter of the bead seatRim size designation rim diameter and widthRim type designation the industry of manufacturer ’s designation for a rim by style or codeRim width nominal distance between rim flanges

Vehicle maximum load on the tire the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axleits share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two

245


Vehicle normal load on the tirethe load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axleits share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight(distributed in accordance with Table 1 that follows) and dividing by two

Weather side the surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire

Table 1– Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacitiesDesignated seating capacity, numberof occupants

Vehicle normal load, number of occu-pants

Occupant distribution in a normallyloaded vehicle

2 through 4 2 2 in front5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second seat

246

Vehicle load limits include total loadcapacity, seating capacity, towing ca-pacity and cargo capacity. Follow theload limits shown below. Total load ca-pacity and seating capacity are alsodescribed on the tire and loading in-formation label. For location of the tireand loading information label, see“Checking tire information pressure”on page 320.Total load capacity:

545 kg (1200 lb.)Total load capacity means combinedweight of occupants, cargo and lug-gage. Tongue load is included whentrailer towing.Seating capacity:

Total 8 (Front 2, Rear 6)Seating capacity means the maximumnumber of occupants whose esti-mated average weight is 68 kg (150lb.) per person. Depending on theweight of each person, the seating ca-pacity given may exceed the totalload capacity.

NOTICEEven if the number of occupantsare within the seating capacity,do not exceed the total load ca-pacity.

Towing capacity: 2948 kg (6500 lb.)

Towing capacity means the maximumgross trailer weight (trailer weight plusits cargo weight) that your vehicle isable to tow.Cargo capacityCargo capacity may increase or de-crease depending on the size (weight)and the number of occupants. For de-tails, see “Capacity and distribution”that follows.

CAUTION

Do not apply the load more thaneach load limit. That may causenot only damage to the tires, butalso deterioration to the steeringability and braking ability, whichmay cause an accident.

Vehicle load limits

247

When stowing cargo and luggage inor on the vehicle, observe the follow-ing:! Put cargo and luggage in the lug-

gage compartment when at allpossible. Be sure all items are se-cured in place.

! Be careful to keep the vehicle bal-anced. Locating the weight as farforward as possible helps maintainthe balance.

! For better fuel economy, do notcarry unneeded weight.

CAUTION

! To prevent cargo and luggagefrom sliding forward duringbraking, do not stack anythingin the luggage compartmenthigher than the seatbacks.

! Do not place anything on theflattened seat or it may slideforward during braking.

! Never allow anyone to ride inthe luggage compartment. It isnot designed for passengers.They should ride in their seatswith their seat belts properlyfastened. Otherwise, they aremuch more likely to suffer seri-ous bodily injury, in the eventof sudden braking or a colli-sion.

! Do not place anything on theluggage cover. Such items maybe thrown about and possiblyinjure people in the vehicleduring sudden braking or anaccident. Secure all items in asafe place.

! Do not drive with objects lefton top of the instrument panel.They may interfere with thedriver’s field of view. Or theymay move during sharp vehicleacceleration or turning, and im-pair the driver’s control of thevehicle. In an accident theymay injure the vehicle occu-pants.

NOTICEDo not load the vehicle beyondthe vehicle capacity weight giv-en in Section 8.

Cargo and luggage——Stowage precautions

248

Cargo capacity depends on the to-tal weight of the occupants.(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capac-ity) – (Total weight of occupants)STEPS FOR DETERMINING COR-RECT LOAD LIMIT1. Locate the statement “The com-

bined weight of occupants and car-go should never exceed XXXpounds” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that willbe riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kilograms or XXX pounds.

4. The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo and lug-gage load capacity. For example,if the “XXX” amount equals 1400lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo and lug-gage load capacity is 650 lbs.(1400–750 (5x150)=650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded onthe vehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the available cargoand luggage load capacity calcu-lated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trail-er, load from your trailer will betransferred to your vehicle. Consultthis manual to determine how thisreduces the available cargo andluggage load capacity of your ve-hicle.

For details about trailer towing, seepage 257.

Total loadcapacity

Cargocapacity

EXAMPLE ON YOUR VEHICLEIn case that 2 people with the com-bined weight of 166 kg (366 lb.) areriding in your vehicle with the totalload capacity of 545 kg (1200 lb.), theavailable amount of cargo and lug-gage load capacity will be as follows:545 kg – 166 kg = 379kg.(1200 lb. – 366 lb. = 834 lb.)From this condition, if 3 more passen-gers with the combined weight of 176kg (388 lb.) get on, the available car-go and luggage load will be reducedas follows:

—Capacity and distribution

249

379 kg – 176 kg = 203 kg.(834 lb. – 388 lb. = 446 lb.)As shown in the above example, if thenumber of occupants increases, thecargo and luggage load equaling thecombined weight of occupants whogot on later must be reduced. In otherwords, if the increase in the numberof occupants causes the excess ofthe total load capacity (combinedweight of occupants plus cargo andluggage load), you have to reduce thecargo and luggage on your vehicle.For details about total load capacity,see “Vehicle load limits” on page 246.

CAUTION

Even if the total load of occu-pant’s weight and the cargo loadis less than the total load capac-ity, do not apply the load uneven-ly. That may cause not only dam-age to the tire but also deteriora-tion to the steering ability due tounbalance of the vehicle, causingan accident.

Cargocapacity

Weight of removedthird seat

SEATING CONFIGURATION VARI-ATIONIn case of removing the third seat, itis possible to load as much cargo asthe weight of the removed seat.(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capac-ity) – (Total weight of occupants) +(weight of the removed third seat)Third seat weight, kg (lb.):

Right 20 (44)Left 20 (44)

250

Types of tiresDetermine what kind of tires yourvehicle is originally equipped with.1. Summer tiresSummer tires are high- speed capabil-ity tires best suited to highway drivingunder dry conditions.Since summer tires do not have thesame traction performance as snowtires, summer tires are inadequate fordriving on snow- covered or icy roads.For driving on snow- covered or icyroads, we recommend using snowtires. If installing snow tires, be sureto replace all four tires.2. All season tiresAll season tires are designed to pro-vide better traction in snow and to beadequate for driving in most winterconditions, as well as for use all yearround.

All season tires, however, do not haveadequate traction performancecompared with snow tires in heavy orloose snow. Also, all season tires fallshort in acceleration and handlingperformance compared with summertires in highway driving.The details about how to distinguishsummer tires from all season tires aredescribed on page 238.

CAUTION

! Do not mix summer and all sea-son tires on your vehicle asthis can cause dangerous han-dling characteristics, resultingin loss of control.

! Do not use tires other than themanufacturer’s designatedtires, and do not mix tires orwheels of the sizes differentfrom the originally equippedtires and wheels as this couldresult in loss of control andcould cause death or seriousinjury.

251

STARTING AND DRIVING Before starting the enginee 252. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to start the engine 252. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tips for driving in various conditions 253. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off- road driving precautions 254. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Winter driving tips 256. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dinghy towing 257. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trailer towing 257. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer, too 266. . . . . . . . .

SECTION 3

252

Before starting the engine1. Check the area around the vehicle be-

fore entering it.2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle,

head restraint height and steeringwheel angle.

3. Adjust the inside and outside rear viewmirrors.

4. Lock all doors.5. Fasten seat belts.

Once you turn the ignition key to “START”position and release it, the cranking holdfunction continues to crank the engine in“ON” position until it starts.The function stops cranking the engineafter about 25 seconds maximum if theengine has not started yet. When youcrank the engine again, wait a few sec-onds and restart it.If you hold the key in “START” position,the function will keep cranking for about30 seconds maximum.

(b) Before cranking1. Apply the parking brake firmly.2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-

sories.3. Put the selector lever in “P”. If you

need to restart the engine while thevehicle is moving, put the selector le-ver in “N”. A starter safety device willprevent the starter from operating if theselector lever is in any drive position.

4. Depress the brake pedal and hold itto the floor until driving off.

How to start the engine—(a) Cranking hold function

253

(c) Starting the engineBefore starting the engine, be sure to fol-low the instructions in “(b) Before crank-ing”.Normal starting procedureThe multiport fuel injection system/sequen-tial multiport fuel injection system in yourengine automatically controls the properair- fuel mixture for starting.You can start a cold or hot engine asfollows:With your foot off the accelerator pedal,turning the ignition key to “START” posi-tion, then release it.Engine should be warmed up by driving,not in idle. For warming up, drive withsmoothly turning engine until engine cool-ant temperature is within normal range.If the engine stalls...Simply restart it, using the correct proce-dure given in normal starting.If the engine will not start...See “If your vehicle will not start” on page270.

NOTICE

! Do not race a cold engine.! If the engine becomes difficult to

start or stalls frequently, have theengine checked immediately.

! Always slow down in gusty crosswinds.This will allow you much better control.

! Drive slowly onto curbs and, if pos-sible, at a right angle. Avoid drivingonto high, sharp- edged objects andother road hazards. Failure to do socan lead to severe tire damage suchas a tire burst.Drive slowly when passing over bumpsor travelling on a bumpy road. Other-wise, the impact could cause severedamage to the tires and/or wheels.

! When parking on a hill, turn the frontwheels until they touch the curb sothat the vehicle will not roll. Apply theparking brake, and place the transmis-sion in “P”. If necessary, block thewheels.

! Washing your vehicle or driving throughdeep water may get the brakes wet. Tosee whether they are wet, check thatthere is no traffic near you, and thenpress the pedal lightly. If you do notfeel a normal braking force, the brakesare probably wet. To dry them, drivethe vehicle cautiously while lightlypressing the brake pedal with the park-ing brake applied. If they still do notwork safely, pull to the side of the roadand call a Toyota dealer for assistance.

Tips for driving in variousconditions

254

CAUTION

! Before driving off, make sure theparking brake is fully released andthat the parking brake reminderlight is off.

! Do not leave your vehicle unat-tended while the engine is running.

! Do not rest your foot on the brakepedal while driving. It can causedangerous overheating, needlesswear, and poor fuel economy.

! To drive down a long or steep hill,reduce your speed and downshift.Remember, if you ride the brakesexcessively, they may overheat andnot work properly.

! Be careful when accelerating, up-shifting, downshifting or braking ona slippery surface. Sudden accelera-tion or engine braking could causethe vehicle to spin or skid.

! Do not drive in excess of the speedlimit. Even if the legal speed limitpermits it, do not drive over 140km/h (85 mph) unless your vehiclehas high- speed capability tires.Driving over 140 km/h (85 mph) mayresult in tire failure, loss of controland possible injury. Be sure to con-sult a tire dealer to determinewhether the tires on your vehicleare high- speed capability tires ornot before driving at such speeds.

! Do not continue normal drivingwhen the brakes are wet. If they arewet, your vehicle will require alonger stopping distance, and itmay pull to one side when thebrakes are applied. Also, the park-ing brake will not hold the vehiclesecurely.

Off- road driving precautionsWhen driving your vehicle off- road, pleaseobserve the following precautions to en-sure your driving enjoyment and to helpprevent the closure of areas to off- roadvehicles.a. Drive your vehicle only in areas where

off- road vehicles are permitted to trav-el.

b. Respect private property. Get owner’spermission before entering private prop-erty.

c. Do not enter areas that are closed.Honor gates, barriers and signs that re-strict travel.

d. Stay on established roads. Whenconditions are wet, driving techniquesshould be changed or travel delayed toprevent damage to roads.

For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii andPuerto Rico:To obtain additional information pertainingto driving your vehicle off- road, consultthe following organizations.! State and Local Parks and Recreation

Departments! State Motor Vehicle Bureau! Recreational Vehicle Clubs

255

! U.S. Forest Service and Bureau ofLand Management

CAUTION

Always observe the following precau-tions to help minimize the risk of se-rious personal injury or damage toyour vehicle:! Drive carefully when off the road.

Do not take unnecessary risks bydriving in dangerous places.

! Do not grip the steering wheelspokes when driving off- road. Abad bump could jerk the wheel andinjure your hands. Keep bothhands and especially your thumbson the outside of the rim.

! Always check your brakes for effec-tiveness immediately after driving insand, mud, water or snow.

! After driving through tall grass,mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc., checkthat there is no grass, bush, paper,rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering ortrapped on the underbody. Clearoff any such matter from the under-body. If the vehicle is used withthese materials trapped or adheringto the underbody, a breakdown orfire could occur.

! In a rollover crash, an unbelted per-son is significantly more likely todie than a person wearing a seatbelt. Therefore, the driver and allpassengers should fasten their seatbelts whenever the vehicle is mov-ing.

! When driving off- road or in ruggedterrain, do not drive at excessivespeeds, jump, make sharp turns,strike objects, etc. This may causeloss of control or vehicle rollovercausing death or serious injury.You are also risking expensive dam-age to your vehicle’s suspensionand chassis.

NOTICE

! If driving through water, such aswhen crossing shallow streams,first check the depth of the waterand the bottom of the river bed forfirmness. Drive slowly and avoiddeep water.

! Take all necessary safety measuresto ensure that water damage to theengine or other components doesnot occur.

! Water entering the engine air intakewill cause severe engine damage.

! Water entering the automatic trans-mission will cause deterioration inshift quality, locking up of yourtransmission accompanied by ribra-tion, and ultimately damage.

! Water can wash the grease fromwheel bearings, causing rusting andpremature failure, and may also en-ter the differentials, transmissionand transfer case, reducing the gearoil’s lubricating qualities.

256

! Sand and mud that has accumulatedin brake drums and around brakediscs may affect braking efficiencyand may damage brake system com-ponents.

! Always perform a maintenance in-spection after each day of off- roaddriving that has taken you throughrough terrain, sand, mud, or water.For scheduled maintenance informa-tion, refer to the “Scheduled Main-tenance Guide” or “Owner’s ManualSupplement”.

Winter driving tipsMake sure your coolant is properly pro-tected against freezing.Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”or similar high quality ethylene glycolbased non- silicate, non- amine, non- nitrite,and non- borate coolant with long- lifehybrid organic acid technology. (Coolantwith longlife hybrid organic acidtechnology is a combination of lowphosphates and organic acids.)See “Checking the engine coolant level”on page 316 for details of coolant typeselection.“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mix-ture of 50% coolant and 50% deionizedwater. This coolant provides protectiondown to about –35°C (–31°F).

NOTICE

Do not use plain water alone.

Check the condition of the battery andcables.Cold temperatures reduce the capacity ofany battery, so it must be in top shapeto provide enough power for winter start-ing. It tells you how to visually inspect thebattery on page 330. Your Toyota dealerand most service stations will be pleasedto check the level of charge.Make sure the engine oil viscosity issuitable for the cold weather.See page 315 for recommended viscosity.Leaving a heavy summer oil in your ve-hicle during winter months may causeharder starting. If you are not sure aboutwhich oil to use, call your Toyota dealer–they will be pleased to help.Keep the door locks from freezing.Squirt lock de- icer or glycerine into thelocks to keep them from freezing.Use a washer fluid containing an anti-freeze solution.This product is available at your Toyotadealer and most auto parts stores. Followthe manufacturer’s directions for howmuch to mix with water.

257

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or anyother substitute because it may dam-age your vehicle’s paint.

Do not use your parking brake whenthere is a possibility it could freeze.When parking, put the transmission into“P” and block the front wheels. Do notuse the parking brake, or snow or wateraccumulated in and around the parkingbrake mechanism may freeze, making ithard to release.Keep ice and snow from accumulatingunder the fenders.Ice and snow built up under your fenderscan make steering difficult. During badwinter driving, stop and check under thefenders occasionally.Depending on where you are driving,we recommend you carry some emer-gency equipment.Some of the things you might put in thevehicle are tire chains, window scraper,bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel,jumper cables, etc.

Dinghy towing

30c001a

Your vehicle is not designed to bedinghy towed (with four wheels on theground) behind a motorhome.

NOTICE

Do not tow your vehicle with fourwheels on the ground. This maycause serious damage to your vehicle.

Trailer towingYour vehicle is designed primarily as apassenger- and- load- carrying vehicle. Tow-ing a trailer will have an adverse effect onhandling, performance, braking, durabilityand driving economy (fuel consumption,etc.). Your safety and satisfaction dependon the proper use of correct equipmentand cautious driving habits. For your safe-ty and the safety of others, you must notoverload your vehicle or trailer. Ask yourlocal Toyota dealer for further details be-fore towing.

CAUTION

Vehicles with active height controlsuspension system: When disconnect-ing a trailer, put the vehicle height inthe “LO” (Low) mode and push theheight control switch to turn off theactive height control suspension.Otherwise, the vehicle height may bechanged in the automatic levelingfunction, resulting in an accident. Fordetails, see “Active height controlsuspension” on page 158.

258

WEIGHT LIMITSBefore towing, make sure the total trail-er weight, gross combination weight,gross vehicle weight, gross axle weightand trailer tongue load are all withinthe limits.The total trailer weight and tongue loadcan be measured with platform scalesfound at a highway weighing station, build-ing supply company, trucking company,junk yard, etc.

CAUTION

! The maximum gross trailer weight(trailer weight plus cargo weight)must never exceed 2948 kg(6500 lb.). If towing a trailer andcargo weighing over 907 kg(2000 lb.), it is necessary to use asway control device with sufficientcapacity. The combination of thegross trailer weight added to thetotal weight of the vehicle, occu-pants and vehicle cargo must neverexceed a total of 5625 kg(12400 lb.). Exceeding the maximumweight of the trailer, the vehicle, orthe vehicle and trailer combination,can cause an accident resulting inserious personal injuries.

! Trailer hitch assemblies have differ-ent weight capacities established bythe hitch manufacturer. Even thoughthe vehicle may be physically capa-ble of towing a higher weight, theoperator must determine the maxi-mum weight rating of the particularhitch assembly and never exceedthe maximum weight rating speci-fied for the trailer- hitch. Exceedingthe maximum weight rating set bythe trailer hitch manufacturer cancause an accident resulting in seri-ous personal injuries.

259

20c508

! The gross vehicle weight must notexceed the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) indicated on theCertification Label. The gross ve-hicle weight is the sum of weightsof the unloaded vehicle, driver, pas-sengers, luggage, hitch and trailertongue load. It also includes theweight of any special equipmentinstalled on your vehicle.

! The load on either the front or rearaxle resulting from distribution ofthe gross vehicle weight on bothaxles must not exceed the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) listedon the Certification Label.

Total trailer weight Tongue load

Tongue loadTotal trailer weight

! 100 = 9 to 11% (∗1)or 15% (∗2)

! The trailer cargo load should bedistributed so that the tongue loadis 9 to 11% for weight carryinghitch (∗1) or 15% for weight distrib-uting hitch (∗2) of the total trailerweight, not exceeding the maximumload of the followingWeight carrying hitch

295 kg (650 lb.)Weight distributing hitch

442 kg (975 lb.)

260

Never load the trailer with moreweight in the back than in thefront. About 60% of the trailer loadshould be in the front half of thetrailer and the remaining 40% in therear.

HITCHES! If you wish to install a trailer hitch, you

should consult with your Toyota dealer.! Use only a hitch recommended by the

hitch manufacturer and the one whichconforms to the total trailer weightrequirement.

! The hitch must be bolted securely tothe vehicle frame and installed accord-ing to the hitch manufacturer’s instruc-tions.

! The hitch ball and king pin should havea light coat of grease.

! Toyota recommends removing the trail-er hitch whenever you are not towinga trailer to reduce the possibility ofadditional damage caused by the hitchif your vehicle is struck from behind.After removing the hitch, seal anymounting holes in the vehicle body toprevent entry of pollutants such as ex-haust fumes, dirt, water, etc.

NOTICE

Do not use axle- mounted hitches asthey can cause damage to the axlehousing, wheel bearings, wheels ortires. Also, never install a hitch whichmay interfere with the normal functionof an Energy Absorbing Bumper, if soequipped.

261

1 Trailer ball load rating2 Ball diameter3 Shank length 4 Shank diameter

TRAILER BALLFollow these easy steps to properly deter-mine the correct trailer ball for your ap-plication:1. Determine the correct trailer ball size

for the trailer coupler. Most couplersare stamped with the required trailerball size. The sizes you will most likelyfind stamped on the coupler are:

Trailer Class Typical Trailer Ball SizeIII 2 in.II 2 in.I 1 7/8 in.

2. Select the appropriate trailer ball tomatch or exceed the gross trailerweight rating of the trailer. The trailerball load rating should be printed onthe top of the ball.

3. When mounted in the ball mount, thethreaded ball shank must protrude be-yond the bottom of the lock washerand nut at least 2 threads. The trailerball shank must be matched to the ballmount hole diameter size.

1 Coupler 2 Trailer ball

262

MATCHING TRAILER BALL HEIGHT TOTRAILER COUPLER HEIGHTNo matter which class of tow hitch ap-plies, for a safe trailer hookup, the trailerball setup on must be the proper heightfor the coupler on the trailer.BRAKES AND SAFETY CHAINS! Toyota recommends trailers with

brakes that conform to any applica-ble federal and state/provincial regu-lations.

! A safety chain must always be usedbetween the towing vehicle and thetrailer. Leave sufficient slack in thechain for turns. The chain shouldcross under the trailer tongue toprevent the tongue from dropping tothe ground in case it becomes dam-aged or separated. For correct safetychain procedures, follow the hitch ortrailer manufacturer’s recommenda-tions.

CAUTION

! If the total trailer weight exceeds453 kg (1000 lb.), trailer brakes arerequired.

! Never tap into your vehicle’s hy-draulic system as it would lower itsbraking effectiveness.

! Never tow a trailer without using asafety chain securely attached toboth the trailer and the vehicle. Ifdamage occurs to the coupling unitor hitch ball, there is danger of thetrailer wandering over into anotherlane.

TIRES! Ensure that your vehicle’s tires are

properly inflated. Adjust the tire infla-tion pressure indicated below:tire inflation pressure, kPa (psi)

Front 220 (32)Rear 240 (35)

See Section 7- 2 and Section 8 for in-structions.

! The trailer tires should be inflated tothe pressure recommended by the trail-er manufacturer in respect to the totaltrailer weight.

263

TRAILER LIGHTS! Your vehicle is equipped with a wire

harness stored in the rear end underbody. Your vehicle is fitted with a sock-et for trailer lights under the rearbumper. Use either of them to connectand operate the trailer lights. However,the trailer lights must comply with fed-eral, state/provincial and local regula-tions. See your local recreational ve-hicle dealer or rental agency for thecorrect type of wiring and relays foryour trailer. Check for correct operationof the turn signals and stop lights eachtime you hitch up. Direct splicing maydamage your vehicle’s electrical systemand cause a malfunction of your lights.

BREAK- IN SCHEDULE! Toyota recommends that you do not

tow a trailer with a new vehicle or avehicle with any new power train com-ponent (engine, transmission, differen-tial, wheel bearing, etc.) for the first800 km (500 miles) of driving.

MAINTENANCE! If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will

require more frequent maintenance dueto the additional load. For thisinformation, please refer to thescheduled maintenance information inthe “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or“Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

! Retighten all fixing bolts of the towingball and bracket after approximately1000 km (600 miles) of trailer driving.

CONNECTING A TRAILER (models withactive height control suspension only)Stop your vehicle and a trailer in line andperform the following:1. Put the active height control suspen-

sion in the “LO” (low) mode. Turn theignition switch off or push the heightcontrol switch to turn off the activeheight control suspension.

2. Connect a trailer.

3. Turn the ignition switch on or push theheight control switch to turn on theactive height control suspension. Selectthe “N” (normal) mode with the heightselect switch.

When a vehicle loaded with four occu-pants tows a trailer of about 1800 kg(4000 lb.) with more than about 180 kg(400 lb.) tongue load, the normal modemay not be selected with the height con-trol indicator “LO”. However, there is noproblem to continue normal driving. Drivewith sufficient care because of large load.DISCONNECTING A TRAILER (modelswith active height control suspensiononly)Stop your vehicle and a trailer in line andperform the following:1. Put the active height control suspen-

sion in the “LO” mode. (Make sure thevehicle height is in the “LO” mode bypushing the height select switch on the“"”side.)

2. Turn the ignition switch off or push theheight control switch to turn off theactive height control suspension.

3. Set the supporting leg of a trailer onthe ground and raise the hitch by 100mm (4 in.).

264

4. Turn the ignition switch on or push theheight control switch to turn on theactive height control suspension.

5. Wait for about 20 seconds until therear vehicle height is lowered by theautomatic leveling function.

6. Make sure the hitch is disconnected. Ifnot, raise the hitch higher and repeatsteps 2 through 5.

7. Move the vehicle forward in the “LO”mode where the hitch does not touchanything in the “N” mode.

8. Put the active height control suspen-sion in the “N” mode.

PRE- TOWING SAFETY CHECK! Check that your vehicle remains level

when a loaded or unloaded trailer ishitched. Do not drive if the vehicle hasan abnormal nose- up or nose- downcondition, and check for impropertongue load, overload, worn suspensionor other possible causes.

! Make sure the trailer cargo is securelyloaded so that it cannot shift.

! Check that your rear view mirrors con-form to any applicable federal, state/provincial or local regulations. If not,install the rear view mirrors requiredfor towing purpose.

TRAILER TOWING TIPSWhen towing a trailer, your vehicle willhandle differently than when not tow-ing. The three main causes of vehicle-trailer accidents are driver error, exces-sive speed and improper trailer loading.Keep these in mind when towing:! Before starting out, check operation of

the lights and all vehicle- trailer connec-tions. After driving a short distance,stop and recheck the lights and con-nections. Before actually towing a trail-er, practice turning, stopping and back-ing with a trailer in an area away fromtraffic until you learn the feel.

! Because stopping distance may be in-creased, vehicle- to- vehicle distanceshould be increased when towing atrailer. For each 16 km/h (10 mph) ofspeed, allow at least one vehicle andtrailer length between you and the ve-hicle ahead. Avoid sudden braking asyou may skid, resulting in jackknifingand loss of control. This is especiallytrue on wet or slippery surfaces.

! Avoid jerky starts or sudden accelera-tion.

! Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns.The trailer could hit your vehicle in atight turn. Slow down before making aturn to avoid the necessity of suddenbraking.

! Remember that when making a turn,the trailer wheels will be closer thanthe vehicle wheels to the inside of theturn. Therefore, compensate for this bymaking a larger than normal turningradius with your vehicle.

! Backing with a trailer is difficult andrequires practice. Grip the bottom ofthe steering wheel and move your handto the left to move the trailer to theleft. Move your hand to the right tomove the trailer to the right. (This pro-cedure is generally opposite to thatwhen backing without a trailer). Also,just turn the steering wheel a little ata time, avoiding sharp or prolongedturning. Have someone guide you whenbacking to reduce the risk of an acci-dent.

265

! Crosswinds and rough roads will ad-versely affect handling of your vehicleand trailer, causing sway. Pay attentionto the rear from time to time to pre-pare yourself for being passed by largetrucks or buses, which may cause yourvehicle and trailer to sway. If swayinghappens, firmly grip the steering wheeland reduce speed immediately butgradually. Never increase speed. Steerstraight ahead. If you make no extremecorrection with the steering or brakes,the vehicle and trailer will stabilize it-self.

! Be careful when passing other ve-hicles. Passing requires considerabledistance. After passing a vehicle, donot forget the length of your trailer andbe sure you have plenty of room be-fore changing lanes.

! In order to maintain engine braking andelectrical charging performance, do notuse the overdrive. Transmission mustbe in the “4” position.

! Because of the added load of the trail-er, your vehicle’s engine may overheaton hot days (at temperatures over30°C [85°F]) when going up a long orsteep grade with a trailer. If the enginecoolant temperature gauge indicatesoverheating, immediately turn off the airconditioning (if in use), pull off the roadand stop in a safe spot. Refer to “Ifyour vehicle overheats” on page 274.

! Always place wheel blocks under boththe vehicle and trailer wheels whenparking. Apply the parking brake firmly.Put the transmission in “P”. Avoid park-ing on a slope with a trailer, but if itcannot be avoided, do so only afterperforming the following:1. Apply the brakes and keep them

applied.2. Have someone place wheel blocks

under both the vehicle and trailerwheels.

3. When the wheel blocks are in place,release your brakes slowly until theblocks absorb the load.

4. Apply the parking brake firmly.5. Shift into “P” and turn off the en-

gine.

When restarting out after parking on aslope:1. With the transmission in “P” posi-

tion, start the engine. Be sure tokeep the brake pedal depressed.

2. Shift into the “3”, “2”, “L” or “R”position.

3. Release the parking brake andbrake pedal and slowly pull or backaway from the wheel blocks. Stopand apply your brakes.

4. Have someone retrieve the blocks.

266

CAUTION

! Do not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph) orthe posted towing speed limit,whichever is lower. Because insta-bility (swaying) of a towing vehicle-trailer combination usually in-creases as the speed increases, ex-ceeding 72 km/h (45 mph) maycause loss of control.

! Slow down and downshift beforedescending steep or long downhillgrades. Do not make sudden down-shifts.

! Avoid holding the brake pedal downtoo long or too frequently. Thiscould cause the brakes to overheatand result in reduced braking effi-ciency.

Improving fuel economy is easy–just takeit easy. It will help make your vehicle lastlonger, too. Here are some specific tipson how to save money on both fuel andrepairs:! Keep your tires inflated at the cor-

rect pressure. Underinflation causestire wear and wastes fuel. See page on320.

! Do not carry unneeded weight inyour vehicle. Excess weight puts aheavier load on the engine, causinggreater fuel consumption.

! Avoid lengthy warm- up idling. Oncethe engine is running smoothly, begindriving—but gently. Remember, howev-er, that on cold winter days this maytake a little longer.

! Accelerate slowly and smoothly.Avoid jackrabbit starts.

! Avoid long engine idling. If you havea long wait and you are not in traffic,it is better to turn off the engine andstart again later.

! Avoid engine over-revving. Use agear position suitable for the road onwhich you are travelling.

! Avoid continuous speeding up andslowing down. Stop- and- go drivingwastes fuel.

! Avoid unnecessary stopping andbraking. Maintain a steady pace. Tryto time the traffic signals so you onlyneed to stop as little as possible ortake advantage of through streets toavoid traffic lights. Keep a proper dis-tance from other vehicles to avoid sud-den braking. This will also reduce wearon your brakes.

! Avoid heavy traffic or traffic jamswhenever possible.

! Do not rest your foot on the brakepedal. This causes premature wear,overheating and poor fuel economy.

! Maintain a moderate speed on high-ways. The faster you drive, the greaterthe fuel consumption. By reducing yourspeed, you will cut down on fuel con-sumption.

How to save fuel and makeyour vehicle last longer, too

267

! Keep the front wheels in properalignment. Avoid hitting the curb andslow down on rough roads. Improperalignment not only causes faster tirewear but also puts an extra load onthe engine, which, in turn, wastes fuel.

! Keep the bottom of your vehicle freefrom mud, etc. This not only lessensweight but also helps prevent corro-sion.

! Keep your vehicle tuned- up and intop shape. A dirty air cleaner, improp-er valve clearance, dirty plugs, dirty oiland grease, brakes not adjusted, etc.all lower engine performance and con-tribute to poor fuel economy. For longerlife of all parts and lower operatingcosts, keep all maintenance work onschedule, and if you often drive undersevere conditions, see that your vehiclereceives more frequent maintenance.(For scheduled maintenance informa-tion, please refer to the “ScheduledMaintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manu-al Supplement”.)

CAUTION

Never turn off the engine to coastdown hills. Your power steering andbrake booster will not function with-out the engine running. Also, theemission control system operatesproperly only when the engine is run-ning.

268

269

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY If your vehicle will not startt 270. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your engine stalls while driving 274. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you cannot increase engine speed 274. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle overheats 274. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you have a flat tire 275. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle becomes stuck 286. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle needs to be towed 287. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you cannot shift automatic transmission selector lever 290. . . . . . . . If you lose your keys 291. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 4

270

Before making these checks, make sureyou have followed the correct startingprocedure given in “How to start theengine” on page 252 and that you havesufficient fuel. Also check whether theother keys will start the engine. If theywork, your key may be broken. Have thekey checked at your Toyota dealer. Ifnone of your keys work, there may be amalfunction in the immobilizer system. Callyour Toyota dealer. (See “Keys” on page10.)

If the engine is not turning over or isturning over too slowly—1. Check that the battery terminals are

tight and clean.2. If the battery terminals are O.K., switch

on the interior light.3. If the light is out, dim or goes out

when the starter is cranked, the batteryis discharged. You may try jump start-ing. See “(c) Jump starting” for furtherinstructions.

If the light is O.K., but the engine still willnot start, it needs adjustment or repair.Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repairshop.

NOTICE

Do not pull- or push- start the ve-hicle. It may damage the vehicle orcause a collision when the enginestarts. Also the three- way catalyticconverter may overheat and become afire hazard.

If the engine turns over at its normalspeed but will not start—1. The engine may be flooded because of

repeated cranking. See “(b) Starting aflooded engine” for further instructions.

2. If the engine still will not start, it needsadjustment or repair. Call a Toyotadealer or qualified repair shop.

If your vehicle will not start—(a) Simple checks

271

(b) Starting a flooded engineIf the engine will not start, your enginemay be flooded because of repeatedcranking.If this happens, turn the ignition key to“START” with the accelerator pedal fullydepressed, and hold the key at this posi-tion for about 30 seconds. Then thecranking hold function stops cranking au-tomatically, and you can try starting theengine with your foot off the acceleratorpedal.If the engine does not start, wait a fewminutes and try again.If the engine still will not start, it needsadjustment or repair. Call a Toyota dealeror qualified repair shop for assistance.

(c) Jump startingTo avoid serious personal injury anddamage to your vehicle which might re-sult from battery explosion, acid burns,electrical burns, or damaged electroniccomponents, these instructions must befollowed precisely.If you are unsure about how to follow thisprocedure, we strongly recommend thatyou seek the help of a competent me-chanic or towing service.

CAUTION

! Batteries contain sulfuric acidwhich is poisonous and corrosive.Wear protective safety glasses whenjump starting, and avoid spillingacid on your skin, clothing, or ve-hicle.

! If you should accidentally get acidon yourself or in your eyes, removeany contaminated clothing and flushthe affected area with water im-mediately. Then get immediate medi-cal attention. If possible, continueto apply water with a sponge orcloth while en route to the medicaloffice.

! The gas normally produced by abattery will explode if a flame orspark is brought near. Use onlystandardized jumper cables and donot smoke or light a match whilejump starting.

NOTICE

The battery used for boosting mustbe 12 V. Do not jump start unless youare sure that the booster battery iscorrect.

272

JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE1. If the booster battery is installed in

another vehicle, make sure the vehiclesare not touching. Turn off all unneces-sary lights and accessories.When boosting, use the battery ofmatching or higher quality. Any otherbattery may be difficult to jump startwith.If jump starting is difficult, charge thebattery for several times.

2. If required, remove all the vent plugsfrom the booster and discharged batter-ies. Lay a cloth over the open ventson the batteries. (This helps reduce theexplosion hazard, personal injuries andburns.)

3. If the engine in the vehicle with thebooster battery is not running, start itand let it run for a few minutes. Duringjump starting, run the engine at about2000 rpm with the accelerator pedallightly depressed.

Discharged battery

Positiveterminal(“+” mark)

Jumpercable

Boosterbattery

Positive terminal(“+” mark)

4. Make the cable connections in the or-der a, b, c, d.a. Connect the clamp of the positive

(red) jumper cable to the positive(+) terminal on the discharged bat-tery.

b. Connect the clamp at the other endof the positive (red) jumper cable tothe positive (+) terminal on thebooster battery.

Discharged battery BoosterbatteryNegative

terminal (“–” mark)

Jumper cable

c. Connect the clamp of the negative(black) jumper cable to the negative(–) terminal on the booster battery.

d. Connect the clamp at the other endof the negative (black) jumper cableto a solid, stationary, unpainted, me-tallic point of the vehicle with thedischarged battery.

The recommended connecting point isshown in the following illustration:

273

Connecting pointDo not connect the cable to or near anypart that moves when the engine iscranked.

CAUTION

When making the connections, toavoid serious injury, do not lean overthe battery or accidentally let thejumper cables or clamps touch any-thing except the correct battery termi-nals or the ground.

5. Charge the discharged battery with thejumper cables connected for approxi-mately 5 minutes. At this time, run theengine in the vehicle with the boosterbattery at about 2000 rpm with the ac-celerator pedal lightly depressed.

6. Start your engine in the normal way.After starting, run it at about 2000 rpmfor several minutes with the acceleratorpedal lightly depressed.

7. Carefully disconnect the cables in theexact reverse order: the negative cableand then the positive cable.

8. Carefully dispose of the battery covercloths—they may now contain sulfuricacid.

9. If removed, replace all the battery ventplugs.

If the cause of your battery discharging isnot apparent (for example, lights left on),you should have it checked at your Toyotadealer.

If the first start attempt is not success-ful...Check that the clamp on the jumpercables are tight. Recharge the dischargedbattery with the jumper cables connectedfor several minutes and restart your en-gine in the normal way.If the another attempt is not successful,the battery may be depleted. Have itchecked at your Toyota dealer.

274

If your engine stalls while driving...1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping

a straight line. Move cautiously off theroad to a safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.3. Try starting the engine again.If the engine will not start, see “If yourvehicle will not start” on page 270.

CAUTION

If the engine is not running, the pow-er assist for the brakes and steeringwill not work so steering and brakingwill be much harder than usual.

If engine speed does not increase whenthe accelerator pedal is depressed, theelectronic throttle control system maybe faulty. Move the vehicle to a safeplace by means of creeping and call aToyota dealer for assistance:1. Depress the brake pedal and shift to

the “D” position.2. Gradually release the brake pedal, and

the vehicle starts to move by creeping.After arriving at a safe place, stop thevehicle and call a Toyota dealer forassistance.

CAUTION

! The above method of moving thevehicle is for emergency. Use itonly for moving minimum distancesto a safe place.

! Be especially careful to prevent er-roneous pedal operation.

If your vehicle overheatsIf your engine coolant temperaturegauge indicates overheating, if you ex-perience a loss of power, or if you heara loud knocking or pinging noise, theengine has probably overheated. Youshould follow this procedure...1. Pull safely off the road, stop the ve-

hicle and turn on your emergencyflashers. Put the transmission in “P”and apply the parking brake. Turn offthe air conditioning if it is being used.

2. If coolant or steam is boiling out of theradiator or reservoir, stop the engine.Wait until the steam subsides beforeopening the hood. If there is no coolantboiling over or steam, leave the enginerunning.

CAUTION

To help avoid personal injury, keepthe hood closed until there is nosteam. Escaping steam or coolant isa sign of very high pressure.

If your engine stalls whiledriving

If you cannot increase enginespeed

275

3. Visually check to see if the enginedrive belt (fan belt) is broken or loose.Look for obvious coolant leaks from theradiator, hoses, and under the vehicle.However, note that water draining fromthe air conditioning is normal if it hasbeen used.

CAUTION

When the engine is running, keephands and clothing away from themoving fan and engine drive belts.

4. If the engine drive belt is broken or thecoolant is leaking, stop the engine im-mediately. Call a Toyota dealer for as-sistance.

5. If the engine drive belt is O.K. andthere are no obvious leaks, you mayhelp the engine cool down more quicklyby running it at about 1500 rpm for afew minutes with the accelerator pedallightly depressed.

6. Check the coolant reservoir. If it is dry,add coolant to the reservoir while theengine is running. Fill it about half full.For the coolant type, see “Coolant typeselection” on page 317.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to remove the radiatorcap when the engine and radiator arehot. Serious injury could result fromscalding hot fluid and steam blownout under pressure.

7. After the engine coolant temperaturehas cooled to normal, again check thecoolant level in the reservoir. If neces-sary, bring it up to half full again. Seri-ous coolant loss indicates a leak in thesystem. You should have it checked assoon as possible at your Toyota dealer.

If you have a flat tire—1. Reduce your speed gradually,

keeping a straight line. Move cau-tiously off the road to a safe placewell away from the traffic. Avoidstopping on the center divider ofa highway. Park on a level spotwith firm ground.

2. Stop the engine and turn on youremergency flashers.

3. Firmly set the parking brake andput the transmission in “P”.

4. Have everyone get out of the ve-hicle on the side away from traffic.

5. Read the following instructionsthoroughly.

276

CAUTION

When jacking, be sure to observethe following to reduce the possi-bility of personal injury:! Follow jacking instructions.! Do not put any part of your

body under the vehicle sup-ported by the jack. Otherwise,personal injury may occur.

! Do not start or run the enginewhile your vehicle is supportedby the jack.

! Stop the vehicle on a level firmground, firmly set the parkingbrake and put the transmissionin reverse. Block the wheel di-agonally opposite to the onebeing changed if necessary.

! Make sure to set the jack prop-erly in the jack point. Raisingthe vehicle with jack improper-ly positioned will damage thevehicle or may allow the ve-hicle to fall off the jack andcause personal injury.

! Never get under the vehiclewhen the vehicle is supportedby the jack alone.

! Use the jack only for liftingyour vehicle during wheelchanging.

! Do not raise the vehicle withsomeone in the vehicle.

! When raising the vehicle, donot place any objects on topof or underneath the jack.

! Raise the vehicle only highenough to remove and changethe tire.

NOTICE! Do not continue driving with

a deflated tire. Driving even ashort distance can damage atire and wheel beyond repair.

! Vehicles with active heightcontrol suspension system:When jacking up or installingthe tire chains, be sure toturn off the active heightcontrol system and stop theengine. Otherwise, the ve-hicle height may change inthe automatic leveling func-tion, resulting in an accident.

277

1. Get the required tools and sparetire.

1 Tool bag2 Jack3 Spare tire

To prepare yourself for an emergency,you should familiarize yourself withthe use of the jack, each of the toolsand their storage locations.When storing the jack, put it in placeand secure to prevent it from flyingforward during a collision or suddenbraking.

Turn the jack joint by hand.To remove: Turn the joint in direction1 until the jack is free.To store: Turn the joint in direction 2until the jack is firmly secured to pre-vent it flying forward during a collisionor sudden braking.

To remove the spare tire under theluggage compartment:1. Put a jack handle, jack handle ex-

tensions and jack handle end to-gether as shown in the illustration.1 Jack handle end2 Jack handle extension3 Jack handle

CAUTION

Make sure they are each securelyfixed with screws.

—Required tools and sparetire

278

When connecting a jack handle exten-sion with a jack handle end, use ajack handle to tighten the bolts on thejoints as shown in the illustration.When connecting the jack handle withextension, tighten the wing bolt on thejoint securely. Make sure the hollowmeets the bolt on every joint whenyou tighten the bolts.

NOTICETighten all the joints securely.Otherwise, the extension maycome off and it may damagethe paint or vehicle body.

2. Remove the access hole cover onthe rear bumper with a flatheadscrewdriver.

To protect the paint, place severalsheets of paper over the paintwork.

3. Insert the jack handle end into thelowering screw through the accesshole and turn it counterclockwisewith pushing it to the front lightly.

279

4. After the tire is lowered completelyto the ground, remove the holdingbracket as shown in the illustration.

When storing the spare tire, put it inplace with the outer side of the wheelfacing up and hook the holding brack-et as shown in the illustration. Thensecure the tire, taking care that thetire goes straight up without catchingon any other part, to prevent it frommoving during a collision or suddenbraking.Check the tire from the side to seethat the tire is stored horizontally.

—Blocking the wheel

2. Block the wheel diagonally op-posite the flat tire to keep thevehicle from rolling when it isjacked up.

When blocking the wheel, place awheel block in front of one of the frontwheels or behind one of the rearwheels.

280

—Removing wheel ornament

3. Remove the wheel ornament.Pry off the wheel ornament, using thebeveled end of the wheel ornamentremover as shown.

CAUTION

Do not try to pull off the orna-ment by hand. Take due care inhandling the ornament to avoidunexpected personal injury.

—Loosening wheel nuts

4. Loosen all the wheel nuts.Always loosen the wheel nuts beforeraising the vehicle.Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwiseto loosen. To get maximum leverage,fit the wrench to the nut so that thehandle is on the right side, as shownabove. Grab the wrench near the endof the handle and pull up on the han-dle. Be careful that the wrench doesnot slip off the nut.Do not remove the nuts yet—just un-screw them about one- half turn.

CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on thebolts or nuts. The nuts may loos-en and the wheels may fall off,which could cause a serious ac-cident.

281

—Positioning the jack

5. Position the jack at the correctjack point as shown.

JACK POINTS:Front—Under the frame side railLeft rear—Under the rear axlehousingRight rear—Under the bracket onthe rear axle housing

Make sure the jack is positioned ona level and solid place.

Put a jack handle, jack handle exten-sions, and jack handle end togetheras shown in the illustration.1 Jack handle end2 Jack handle extensions3 Jack handle

CAUTION

Make sure they are each securelyfixed with screws.

282

When connecting a jack handle exten-sion with another extension and a jackhandle end, use a jack handle to tight-en the bolts on the joints as shownin the illustration. When connectingthe jack handle with extension, tight-en the wing bolt on the jack handlesecurely. Make sure the hollow meetsthe bolt on any joint when you tightenthe bolts.

NOTICETighten all the joints securely.Otherwise, the extension maycome off and it may damagethe paint or vehicle body.

—Raising your vehicle

6. After making sure no one is inthe vehicle, raise it high enoughso that the spare tire can beinstalled.

Remember you will need more groundclearance when putting on the sparetire than when removing the flat tire.

283

To raise the vehicle, insert the jackhandle end into the joint of the jack(it is a loose fit) and turn it clockwisewith the handle, making sure the han-dle remains firmly fitted onto the jackhandle extension. As the jack touchesthe vehicle and begins to lift, double-check that it is properly positioned.

CAUTION

Never get under the vehicle whenthe vehicle is supported by thejack alone.

—Changing wheels

7. Remove the wheel nuts andchange tires.

Lift the flat tire straight off and put itaside.Roll the spare wheel into position andalign the holes in the wheel with thebolts. Then lift up the wheel and getat least the top bolt started throughits hole. Wiggle the tire and press itback over the other bolts.

Before putting on wheels, remove anycorrosion on the mounting surfaceswith a wire brush or such. Installationof wheels without good metal- to- met-al contact at the mounting surface cancause wheel nuts to loosen andeventually cause a wheel to come offwhile driving.

284

—Reinstalling wheel nuts

8. Reinstall all the wheel nuts fin-ger tight.

Reinstall the wheel nuts (tapered endinward) and tighten them as much asyou can by hand. Press back on thetire and see if you can tighten themmore.

CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on thebolts or nuts. Doing so may leadto overtightening the nuts anddamaging the bolts. The nutsmay loosen and the wheels mayfall off, which could cause a seri-ous accident. If there is oil orgrease on any bolt or nut, cleanit.

—Lowering your vehicle

9. Lower the vehicle completelyand tighten the wheel nuts.

Turn the jack handle extension coun-terclockwise with handle to lower thevehicle, making sure the handle re-mains firmly fitted onto the jack han-dle extension.Use only the wheel nut wrench andturn it clockwise to tighten the nuts.Do not use other tools or any addition-al leverage other than your hands,such as a hammer, pipe or your foot.Make sure the wrench is securely en-gaged over the nut.

285

Tighten each nut a little at a time inthe order shown. Repeat the processuntil all the nuts are tight.

CAUTION

! When lowering the vehicle,make sure all portions of yourbody and all other personsaround will not be injured asthe vehicle is lowered to theground.

! Have the wheel nuts tightenedwith a torque wrench to 131N·m (13.4 kgf·m, 96.6 ft·lbf), assoon as possible after chang-ing wheels. Otherwise, thenuts may loosen and thewheels may fall off, whichcould cause a serious acci-dent.

! Do not attach a heavily dam-aged plastic wheel ornament.It may fly off the wheel andcause accidents while the ve-hicle is moving.

—Reinstalling wheel ornament

10. Reinstall the wheel ornament.Put the wheel ornament into position.And press hand firmly on one side ofwheel ornament and then firmly tapthe other side around the edge ofwheel ornament with the heel of yourhand to snap into place.

CAUTION

Take due care in handling the or-nament to avoid unexpected per-sonal injury.

—After changing wheels11. Check the air pressure of the re-

placed tire.Adjust the air pressure to the specifi-cation designated on page 344. If thepressure is lower, drive slowly to thenearest service station and fill to thecorrect pressure.Do not forget to reinstall the tire infla-tion valve cap as dirt and moisturecould get into the valve core andpossibly cause air leakage. If the capis missing, have a new one put on assoon as possible.

12. Restow all the tools, jack andflat tire securely.

As soon after changing wheels aspossible, tighten the wheel nuts to thetorque specified on page 344 with atorque wrench. Have a technician re-pair the flat tire.This is the same procedure for chang-ing or rotating your tires.

286

CAUTION

Before driving, make sure all thetools, jack and flat tire are se-curely in place in their storagelocation to reduce the possibilityof personal injury during a colli-sion or sudden braking.

If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow,mud, sand, etc., then you may attempt torock the vehicle free by moving it forwardand backward.If your vehicle is equipped with the trac-tion control system, turn off the system tobecome unstuck to allow the tires to spinenough to remove the vehicle from theobstruction. (For details, see “Vehicle sta-bility control system” on page 146.)

CAUTION

Do not attempt to rock the vehiclefree by moving it forward and back-ward if people or objects are any-where near the vehicle. During therocking operation the vehicle maysuddenly move forward or backwardas it becomes unstuck, causing injuryor damage to nearby people or ob-jects.

NOTICE

If you rock your vehicle, observe thefollowing precautions to prevent dam-age to the transmission and otherparts.! Do not depress the accelerator ped-

al while shifting the selector leveror before the transmission is com-pletely shifted to forward or reversegear.

! Do not race the engine and avoidspinning the wheels.

! If your vehicle remains stuck afterrocking the vehicle several times,consider other ways such as tow-ing.

If your vehicle becomesstuck

287

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck—

—From rear

(b) Using flat bed truck

—From front

If towing is necessary, we recommendyou have it done by your Toyota dealeror a commercial tow truck service. Inconsultation with them, have your ve-hicle towed using either (a) or (b).Only when you cannot receive a towingservice from a Toyota dealer or com-mercial tow truck service, tow your ve-hicle carefully in accordance with theinstructions given in “—Emergency tow-ing” on page 288.Proper equipment will help ensure thatyour vehicle is not damaged while beingtowed. Commercial operators are generallyaware of the state/provincial and locallaws pertaining to towing.Your vehicle can be damaged if it istowed incorrectly. Although most operatorsknow the correct procedure, it is possibleto make a mistake. To avoid damage toyour vehicle, make sure the following pre-cautions are observed. If necessary, showthis page to the tow truck driver.TOWING PRECAUTIONS:Use a safety chain system for all towing,and abide by the state/provincial and locallaws. The wheels and axle on the groundmust be in good condition. If they aredamaged, use a towing dolly.

CAUTION

Vehicles with active height controlsuspension system: When your ve-hicle is towed, put the vehicle heightin the “N” (Normal) mode and pushthe height control switch to turn offthe active height control system.Otherwise, the vehicle height may bechanged in the automatic levelingfunction, resulting in an accident. Fordetails, see “Active height controlsuspension” on page 158.

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truckUse a towing dolly under the wheels notlifted by the truck.(b) Using flat bed truck

If your vehicle needs to betowed—

288

(c) Towing with sling type truck

(c) Towing with sling type truck

NOTICE

Do not tow with sling type truck, ei-ther from the front or rear. This maycause body damage.

—Emergency towing

If towing is necessary, we recommendyou to have it done by your Toyotadealer or a commercial tow truck ser-vice.If towing service is not available in anemergency, your vehicle may be tempo-rarily towed by a cable or chain se-cured to front emergency towing hook.Use extreme caution when towing thevehicle.A driver must be in the vehicle to steer itand operate the brakes.Towing in this manner may be done onlyon hard- surfaced roads for a short dis-tance and at low speeds. Also, thewheels, axles, drive train, steering andbrakes must all be in good condition.

CAUTION

Use extreme caution when towing ve-hicle. Avoid sudden starts or erraticdriving maneuvers which would placeexcessive stress on the emergencytowing hook and towing cable orchain. The hook and towing cable orchain may break and cause seriousinjury or damage.

NOTICE

! Do not use front and rear eyelets.It is not designed for towing.

! Use only a cable or chain specifi-cally intended for use in towing ve-hicles. Securely fasten the cable orchain to the towing hook provided.

! Never tow a vehicle from the rearwith four wheels on the ground.This may cause serious damage tothe transmission.

Before towing, release the parking brakeand put the transmission in “N”. Unlockthe center differential. The key must be in“ACC” (engine off) or “ON” (engine run-ning).

289

CAUTION

If the engine is not running, the pow-er assist for the brakes and steeringwill not work so steering and brakingwill be much harder than usual.

! Before emergency towing, check thatthe hook is not broken or damage andthat the installation bolts are not loose.

! Fasten the towing cable or chain se-curely to the hook.

! Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady andeven force.

! To avoid damaging the hook, do notpull from the side or at a verticalangle. Always pull straight ahead.

CAUTION

If the emergency towing hook is usedto get out when your vehicle becomesstruck in mud, sand or other condi-tion from which the vehicle cannot bedriven out under its own power, makesure to observe the precautions men-tioned below. Otherwise, excessivestress will be put on the hook andthe towing cable or chain may break,causing serious injury or damage.! If the towing vehicle can hardly

move, do not forcibly continue thetowing. Contact your Toyota dealeror a commercial tow truck servicefor assistance.

! Tow the vehicle as straight aheadas possible.

! Keep away from the vehicle duringtowing.

—Emergency towing hookprecautions

290

—Tips for towing a stuck vehicleThe following methods are effective touse when your vehicle is stuck in themud, sand or other condition fromwhich the vehicle cannot be driven outunder its own power. Use extreme cau-tion when towing the vehicles. In addi-tion, keep away from the vehicles andtowing cable or chain when towing.! Remove the sand soil in the front and

the back of the tires.! Place stones or wood under the tires.

If you cannot shift the selector leverout of “P” position to other positionseven though the brake pedal is de-pressed, use the shift lock override but-ton as follows:1. Turn the ignition key to “LOCK”

position. Make sure the parkingbrake is applied.

2. Pry up the cover with a flatheadscrewdriver or equivalent.

3. Insert your finger into the hole topush down the shift lock overridebutton. You can shift out of “P”position only while pushing the but-ton.

4. Shift into “N” position.5. Reinstall the cover.6. Start the engine. For your safety,

keep the brake pedal depressed.Be sure to have the system checked byyour Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

If you cannot shift automatictransmission selector lever

291

If you lose your keysYou can purchase a new key at yourToyota dealer if you can give them thekey number and master key.Even if you lose only one key, contactyour Toyota dealer to make a new key. Ifyou lose all your master keys, you cannotmake new keys; the whole engine immobi-lizer system must be replaced.See the suggestion given in “Keys” onpage 10.You can use the wireless remote controlsystem with the new key. Contact yourToyota dealer for detailed information.If your keys are locked in the vehicle andyou cannot get a duplicate, many Toyotadealers can still open the door for you,using their special tools. If you mustbreak a window to get in, we suggestbreaking the smallest side window be-cause it is the least expensive to replace.Be extremely cautious to avoid cuts fromthe glass.

292

293

CORROSION PREVENTION ANDAPPEARANCE CARE Protecting your Toyota from corrosionn 294. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Washing and waxing your Toyota 295. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning the interior 297. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 5

294

Toyota, through its diligent research, de-sign and use of the most advancedtechnology available, helps prevent corro-sion and provides you with the finest qual-ity vehicle construction. Now, it is up toyou. Proper care of your Toyota can helpensure long- term corrosion prevention.The most common causes of corrosionto your vehicle are:! The accumulation of road salt, dirt and

moisture in hard- to- reach areas underthe vehicle.

! Chipping of paint, or undercoatingcaused by minor accidents or bystones and gravel.

Care is especially important if you livein particular areas or operate your ve-hicle under certain environmental condi-tions:! Road salt or dust control chemicals will

accelerate corrosion, as will the pres-ence of salt in the air near the sea-coast or in areas of industrial pollution.

! High humidity accelerates corrosion es-pecially when temperatures range justabove the freezing point.

! Wetness or dampness to certain partsof your vehicle for an extended periodof time, may cause corrosion eventhough other parts of the vehicle maybe dry.

! High ambient temperatures can causecorrosion to those components of thevehicle which do not dry quickly due tolack of proper ventilation.

The above signifies the necessity to keepyour vehicle, particularly the underside, asclean as possible and to repair any dam-age to paint or protective coatings assoon as possible.To help prevent corrosion on yourToyota, follow these guidelines:Wash your vehicle frequently. It is, ofcourse, necessary to keep your vehicleclean by regular washing, but to preventcorrosion, the following points should beobserved:! If you drive on salted roads in the

winter or if you live near the ocean,you should hose off the undercarriageat least once a month to minimize cor-rosion.

! High pressure water or steam is effec-tive for cleaning the vehicle’s undersideand wheel housings. Pay particularattention to these areas as it is difficultto see all the mud and dirt. It will domore harm than good to simply wet themud and debris without removing. Thelower edge of doors, rocker panels andframe members have drain holes whichshould not be allowed to clog with dirtas trapped water in these areas cancause corrosion.

! Wash the underside of the vehicle thor-oughly when winter is over.

See “Washing and waxing your Toyota” onpage 295 for more tips.Check the condition of your vehicle’spaint and trim. If you find any chips orscratches in the paint, touch them up im-mediately to prevent corrosion from start-ing. If the chips or scratches have gonethrough the bare metal, have a qualifiedbody shop make the repair.

Protecting your Toyota fromcorrosion

295

Check the interior of your vehicle. Wa-ter and dirt can accumulate under thefloor mats and could cause corrosion. Oc-casionally check under the mats to makesure the area is dry. Be particularly care-ful when transporting chemicals, cleans-ers, fertilizers, salt, etc.; these should betransported in proper containers. If a spillor leak should occur, immediately cleanand dry the area.Use mud shields on your wheels. If youdrive on salted or gravel roads, mudshields help protect your vehicle. Full- sizeshields, which come as near to the groundas possible, are the best. We recommendthat the fittings and the area where theshields are installed be treated to resistcorrosion. Your Toyota dealer will behappy to assist in supplying and installingthe shields if they are recommended foryour area.Keep your vehicle in a well ventilatedgarage or a roofed place. Do not parkyour vehicle in a damp, poorly venti-lated garage. If you wash your vehicle inthe garage, or if you drive it covered withwater or snow, your garage may be sodamp as to cause corrosion. Even if yourgarage is heated, a wet vehicle can cor-rode if the ventilation is poor.

Washing your ToyotaKeep your vehicle clean by regularwashing.The following cases may cause weaknessto the paint or corrosion to the body andparts. Wash your vehicle as soon as pos-sible.! When driving in a coastal area! When driving on a road sprinkled with

antifreeze! When exposed to coal tar, tree sap,

bird droppings and carcass of an insect! When driving in areas where there is

a lot of smoke, soot, dust, iron dust orchemical substances

! When the vehicle becomes remarkablydirty with dust and mud

Hand- washing your ToyotaWork in the shade and wait until thevehicle body is not warm to the touch.

CAUTION

When cleaning under floor or chassis,be careful not to injure your hands.

1. Rinse off loose dirt with a hose. Re-move any mud or road salt from theunderside of the vehicle or the wheelwells.

2. Wash with a mild carwash soap,mixed according to the manufacturer’sinstructions. Use a soft cotton mitt andkeep it wet by dipping it frequently intothe wash water. Do not rub hard—letthe soap and water remove the dirt.

Fuel filler door: Do not apply water(high- pressure car wash, for example) ator near the fuel tank inlet with the fuelfiller door opened. If the water enters theair vent, you may experience trouble withrefueling or rough engine idling.Plastic wheel ornaments: The plasticwheel ornaments are damaged easily byorganic substances. If any organic sub-stances splash an ornament, be sure towash them off with water and check if theornament is damaged.Aluminum wheels: Use only a mild soapor neutral detergent.Plastic bumpers: Wash carefully. Do notscrub with abrasive cleaners. The bumperfaces are soft.

Washing and waxing yourToyota

296

Exterior lights: Wash carefully. Do notuse organic substances or scrub themwith a hard brush. This may damage thesurfaces of the lights.Road tar: Remove with turpentine orcleaners that are marked safe for paintedsurfaces.3. Rinse thoroughly—dried soap can

cause streaking. In hot weather youmay need to rinse each section rightafter you wash it.

4. To prevent water spots, dry the vehicleusing a clean soft cotton towel. Do notrub or press hard—you might scratchthe paint.

NOTICE

! Do not use organic substances(gasoline kerosene, benzine orstrong solvents) which may be toxicor cause damage.

! Do not scrub any part of the ve-hicle with a hard brush, which maycause damage.

Automatic car washYour vehicle may be washed in an auto-matic car wash, but remember that thepaint can be scratched by some types ofbrushes, unfiltered washing water, or thewashing process itself. Scratching reducespaint durability and gloss, especially ondarker colors. The manager of the carwash should be able to advise you wheth-er the process is safe for the paint onyour vehicle.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the antenna,make sure it is retracted before driv-ing your Toyota through an automaticcar wash.

Waxing your ToyotaPolishing and waxing is recommendedto maintain the original beauty of yourToyota’s finish.Apply wax once a month or if the vehiclesurface does not repel water well.1. Always wash and dry the vehicle be-

fore you begin waxing, even if you areusing a combined cleaner and wax.

2. Use a good quality polish and wax. Ifthe finish has become extremely weath-ered, use a car- cleaning polish, fol-lowed by a separate wax. Carefully fol-low the manufacturer’s instructions andprecautions. Be sure to polish and waxthe chrome trim as well as the paint.

Windshield washer nozzles: Make surethat the nozzles do not become blockedwhen waxing. If a nozzle becomesblocked, contact your Toyota dealer tohave the vehicle serviced.

NOTICE

If a nozzle becomes blocked, do nottry to clear it with a pin or otherobject. The nozzle will be damaged.

297

3. Wax the vehicle again when waterdoes not bead but remains on the sur-face in large patches.

NOTICE

Always remove the plastic bumpers ifyour vehicle is re- painted and placedin a high heat paint waxing booth.High temperatures could damage thebumpers.

Exterior lights: Do not apply wax on thesurfaces of the lights. Wax may causedamage to the lenses. If you accidentallyput wax on the light surfaces, wipe orwash it off.

Cleaning the interior

CAUTION

! Vehicles with side airbags and cur-tain shield airbags:Be careful not to splash water orspill liquid on the floor. This mayprevent the side and curtain shieldairbags from activating correctly, re-sulting in serious injury.

! Do not wash the vehicle floor withwater, or allow water to get ontothe floor when cleaning the vehicleinterior or exterior. Water may getinto audio components or otherelectrical components above or un-der the floor carpet (or mat) andcause a malfunction; and it maycause body corrosion.

Vinyl interiorThe vinyl upholstery may be easilycleaned with a mild soap or detergentand water.First vacuum over the upholstery to re-move loose dirt. Then, using a sponge orsoft cloth, apply the soap solution to thevinyl. After allowing it to soak in for a fewminutes to loosen the dirt, remove the dirtand wipe off the soap with a clean dampcloth. If all the dirt do not come off, re-peat the procedure. Commercial foaming-type vinyl cleaners are also availablewhich work well. Follow the manufacturer’sinstructions.

NOTICE

Do not use solvent, thinner, gasolineor window cleaner on the interior.

298

CarpetsUse a good foam- type shampoo toclean the carpets.Begin by vacuuming thoroughly to removeas much dirt as possible. Several types offoam cleaners are available; some are inaerosol cans and others are powders orliquids which you mix with water to pro-duce a foam. To shampoo the carpets,use a sponge or brush to apply the foam.Rub in overlapping circles.Do not apply water—the best results areobtained by keeping the carpet as dry aspossible. Read the shampoo instructionsand follow them closely.Seat beltsThe seat belts may be cleaned withmild soap and water or with lukewarmwater.Use a cloth or sponge. As you are clean-ing, check the belts for excessive wear,fraying, or cuts.

NOTICE

! Do not use dye or bleach on thebelts—it may weaken them.

! Do not use the belts until they be-come dry.

WindowsThe windows may be cleaned with anyhousehold window cleaner.

NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch ordamage the heater wires or connec-tors.

Air conditioning control panel, audiosystem, instrument panel, console pan-el, and switchesUse a soft damp cloth for cleaning.Soak a clean soft cloth in water or luke-warm water then lightly wipe off dirt.

NOTICE

! Do not use organic substances (sol-vents, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline,etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions.These chemicals can cause discol-oring, staining or peeling of thesurface.

! If you use cleaners or polishingagents, make sure their ingredientsdo not include the substances men-tioned above.

! If you use a liquid car freshener, donot spill the liquid onto the ve-hicle’s interior surfaces. It may con-tain the ingredients mentionedabove. Immediately clean any spillusing the method mentioned above.

299

Leather InteriorThe leather upholstery may be cleanedwith neutral detergent for wool.Remove dirt using a soft cloth dampenedwith 5% solution of neutral detergent forwool. Then thoroughly wipe off all tracesof detergent with a clean damp cloth.After cleaning or whenever any part of theleather gets wet, dry with a soft cleancloth. Allow the leather to dry in a venti-lated shaded area.

NOTICE

! If a stain should fail to come outwith a neutral detergent, apply acleaner that does not contain anorganic solvent.

! Never use organic substances suchas benzine, alcohol or gasoline, oralkaline or acid solutions for clean-ing the leather as these couldcause discoloring.

! Use of a nylon brush or syntheticfiber cloth, etc. may scratch thefine grained surface of the leather.

! Mildew may develop on soiled leath-er upholstery. Be especially carefulto avoid oil spots. Try to keep yourupholstery always clean.

! Long exposure to direct sunlightmay cause the leather surface toharden and shrink. Keep your ve-hicle in a shaded area, especially inthe summer.

! The interior of your vehicle is aptto heat up on hot summer days, soavoid placing on the upholsteryitems made of vinyl or plastic orcontaining wax as these tend tostick to leather when warm.

! Improper cleaning of the leather up-holstery could result in discolor-ation or staining.

If you have any questions about thecleaning of your Toyota, your localToyota dealer will be pleased to answerthem.

300

301

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE AND CARE Maintenance requirementss 302. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General maintenance 303. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Does your vehicle need repairing? 305. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emissions inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs 306. . . . . . . . .

For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

SECTION 6

302

Maintenance requirementsYour Toyota vehicle has been designed forfewer maintenance requirements with long-er service intervals to save both your timeand money. However, each regular mainte-nance, as well as day- to- day care, ismore important than ever before to ensuresmooth, trouble- free, safe, and economicaldriving.It is the owner’s responsibility to makesure the specified maintenance, includinggeneral maintenance service, is performed.Note that both the new vehicle andemission control system warranties specifythat proper maintenance and care must beperformed. See “Owner’s WarrantyInformation Booklet” or “Owner’s ManualSupplement” for complete warrantyinformation.General maintenanceGeneral maintenance items are those day-to- day care practices that are important toyour vehicle for proper operation. It is theowner’s responsibility to ensure that thegeneral maintenance items are performedregularly.These checks or inspections can be doneeither by yourself or a qualified technician,or if you prefer, your Toyota dealer will bepleased to do them at a nominal cost.

Scheduled maintenanceThe scheduled maintenance items listed inthe “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or“Owner’s Manual Supplement” are thoserequired to be serviced at regular inter-vals.For details of your maintenance schedule,read the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide”or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.It is recommended that only genuineToyota parts be used for maintenanceor for the repair of the emission con-trol system.The owner may elect to use non- Toyotasupplied parts for replacement pur-poses without invalidating the emissioncontrol system warranty. However, useof replacement parts which are not ofequivalent quality may impair the effec-tiveness of the emission control sys-tems.You may also elect to have mainte-nance, replacement, or repair of theemission control devices and systemperformed by any automotive repair es-tablishment or individual without invali-dating this warranty. See “Owner’s War-ranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’sManual Supplement” for complete war-ranty information.

Where to go for service?Toyota technicians are well- trained spe-cialists and are kept up to date with thelatest service information through technicalbulletins, service tips, and in- dealershiptraining programs. They learn to work onToyotas before they work on your vehicle,rather than while they are working on it.You can be confident that your Toyotadealer’s service department performs thebest job to meet the maintenance require-ments on your vehicle–reliably and eco-nomically.Your copy of the repair order is proof thatall required maintenance has been per-formed for warranty coverage. If any prob-lems should arise with your vehicle whileunder warranty, your Toyota dealer willpromptly take care of it. Again, be sureto keep a copy of the repair order for anyservice performed on your Toyota.What about do- it- yourself maintenance?Many of the maintenance items are easyto do yourself if you have a little mechani-cal ability and a few basic automotivetools. Simple instructions for how to per-form them are presented in Section 7.

303

If you are a skilled do- it- yourselfmechanic, the Toyota service manuals arerecommended. Please be aware thatdo- it- yourself maintenance can affect yourwarranty coverage. See “Owner’s WarrantyInformation Booklet” or “Owner’s ManualSupplement” for the details.

General maintenanceListed below are the general maintenanceitems that should be performed as fre-quently as specified. In addition to check-ing the items listed, if you notice anyunusual noise, smell or vibration, youshould investigate the cause or take yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer or a quali-fied service shop immediately. It is recom-mended that any problem you notice bebrought to the attention of your dealer orthe qualified service shop for their advice.

CAUTION

Make these checks only with ade-quate ventilation if you run the en-gine.

IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENTItems listed below should be checkedfrom time to time, e.g. each time whenrefueling.Washer fluidMake sure there is sufficient fluid in thetank. See page 333 for additional informa-tion.

Engine coolant levelMake sure the coolant level is betweenthe “FULL” and “LOW” lines on the see-through reservoir when the engine is cold.See page 316 for additional information.Radiator, condenser and hosesCheck that the front of the radiator andcondenser are clean and not blocked withleaves, dirt, or insects. See page 317 foradditional information.Battery electrolyte levelMake sure the electrolyte level of all bat-tery cells is between upper and lower lev-el lines on the case. Add only distilledwater when replenishing. See page 330 foradditional information.Brake fluid levelMake sure the brake fluid level is correct.See page 318 for additional information.Engine oil levelCheck the level on the dipstick with theengine turned off and the vehicle parkedon a level ground. See page 314 for addi-tional information.Power steering fluid levelCheck the level through the reservoir. Thelevel should be in the “HOT” or “COLD”range depending on the fluid temperature.See page 319 for additional information.

304

Exhaust systemIf you notice any change in the sound ofthe exhaust or smell exhaust fumes, havethe cause located and corrected immedi-ately. (See “Engine exhaust cautions” onpage 229.)INSIDE THE VEHICLEItems listed below should be checkedregularly, e.g. while performing periodicservices, cleaning the vehicle, etc.LightsMake sure the headlights, stop lights, taillights, turn signal lights, and other lightsare all working. Check headlight aim.Service reminder indicators and warningbuzzersCheck that all service reminder indicatorsand warning buzzers function properly.Steering wheelBe alert for changes in steering condition,such as hard steering or strange noise.

SeatsCheck that all front seat controls such asseat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. op-erate smoothly and that all latches locksecurely in any position. Check that thehead restraint move up and down smooth-ly and that the locks hold securely in anylatched position. For folding- down rearseatbacks, swing- up rear seat cushionsand detachable third seats, check that thelatches lock securely.Seat beltsCheck that the seat belt system such asbuckles, retractors and anchors operateproperly and smoothly. Make sure the beltwebbing is not cut, frayed, worn or dam-aged.Accelerator pedalCheck the pedal for smooth operation anduneven pedal effort or catching.Brake pedalCheck the pedal for smooth operation andthat the pedal has the proper clearance.Check the brake booster function.BrakesIn a safe place, check that the brakes donot pull to one side when applied.

Parking brakeCheck that the lever has the proper traveland that, on a safe incline, your vehicleis held securely with only the parkingbrake applied.Automatic transmission “Park” mecha-nismCheck the lock release button of the se-lector lever for proper and smooth opera-tion. On a safe incline, check that yourvehicle is held securely with the selectorlever in “P” position and all brakes re-leased.OUTSIDE THE VEHICLEItems listed below should be performedfrom time to time, unless otherwisespecified.Fluid leaksCheck underneath for leaking fuel, oil, wa-ter or other fluid after the vehicle hasbeen parked for a while. If you smell fuelfumes or notice any leak, have the causefound and corrected immediately.Doors and engine hoodCheck that all doors and back door oper-ate smoothly and all latches lock securely.Make sure the engine hood secondarylatch secures the hood from opening whenthe primary latch is released.

305

Tire inflation pressureCheck the pressure with a gauge ev-ery two weeks, or at least once amonth. See page 320 for additionalinformation.Tire surface and wheel nutsCheck the tires carefully for cuts,damage or excessive wear. See page323 for additional information. Whenchecking the tires, make sure no nutsare missing, and check the nuts forlooseness. Tighten them if necessary.Tire rotationRotate the tires according to themaintenance schedule. (For sched-uled maintenance information, pleaserefer to the “Scheduled MaintenanceGuide” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment”.) See page 325 for additionalinformation.

Be on the alert for changes in perfor-mance, sounds, and visual tip- offs thatindicate service is needed. Some impor-tant clues are as follows:! Engine missing, stumbling, or pinging! Appreciable loss of power! Strange engine noises! A fluid leak under the vehicle (however,

water dripping from the air conditioningafter use is normal.)

! Change in exhaust sound (This mayindicate a dangerous carbon monoxideleak. Drive with the windows open andhave the exhaust system checked im-mediately.)

! Flat- looking tire; excessive tire squealwhen cornering; uneven tire wear

! Vehicle pulls to one side when drivingstraight on a level road

! Strange noises related to suspensionmovement

! Loss of brake effectiveness; spongyfeeling brake pedal; pedal almosttouches floor; vehicle pulls to one sidewhen braking

! Engine coolant temperature continuallyhigher than normal

! Engine continually runs hot; oil pres-sure gauge stays low

If you notice any of these clues, take yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible. It probably needs adjustment orrepair.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving with the ve-hicle unchecked. It could result in se-rious vehicle damage and possiblypersonal injury.

Does your vehicle need repairing?

306

Some states have vehicle emission in-spection programs which include OBD(On- Board Diagnostics) checks.The OBD system monitors the operationof the emission control system. When theOBD system determines that a problemexists somewhere in the emission controlsystem, the malfunction indicator lampcomes on. In this case, your vehicle maynot pass the I/M test and need to berepaired. Contact your Toyota dealer toservice the vehicle.Even if the malfunction indicator lampdoes not come on, your vehicle may notpass the I/M test as readiness codeshave not been set in the OBD system.Readiness codes are automatically setduring ordinary driving. However, when thebattery is disconnected or run down, thecodes are erased. Also, depending onyour driving habits, the codes may not becompletely set.Also, if the malfunction indicator lamp hadcome on recently due to temporary mal-function such as a loose fuel tank cap,your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

The malfunction indicator lamp will go offafter taking several driving trips, but theerror code in the OBD system will not becleared unless about 40 trips or more aretaken.If your vehicle does not pass the I/M testeven the malfunction indicator lamp doesnot come on, contact your Toyota dealerto prepare the vehicle for re- testing.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance (I/M) programs

307

DO- IT- YOURSELF MAINTENANCEIntroduction Engine compartment overview 308. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse locations 309. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Do- it- yourself service precautions 310. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts and tools 311. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7- 1

308

Engine compartment overview1. Suspension fluid reservoir2. Engine oil filler cap3. Brake fluid reservoir4. Fuse block5. Battery6. Windshield and rear window washer

fluid tank7. Engine oil level dipstick8. Condenser9. Radiator

10. Engine coolant reservoir11. Power steering fluid reservoir

71C004f

309

Fuse locations

i71002d

Spare fuses1

Spare fuses

71C510a

310

If you perform maintenance by yourself,be sure to follow the correct proceduregiven in this section.You should be aware that improper or in-complete servicing may result in operatingproblems.Performing do- it- yourself maintenanceduring the warranty period may affect yourwarranty coverage. Read the separateToyota Warranty statement for details andsuggestions.This part gives instructions only for thoseitems that are relatively easy for an ownerto perform. As explained in Section 6,there are still a number of items that mustbe done by a qualified technician withspecial tools.For information on tools and parts for do-it- yourself maintenance, see “Parts andtools” on page 311.Utmost care should be taken when work-ing on your vehicle to prevent accidentalinjury. Here are a few precautions thatyou should be especially careful to ob-serve:

CAUTION

! When the engine is running, keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom the moving fan and enginedrive belts. (Removing rings,watches, and ties is advisable.)

! Right after driving, the enginecompartment—the engine, radiator,exhaust manifold, power steeringfluid reservoir and spark plugboots, etc.—will be hot. So be care-ful not to touch them. Oil, fluidsand spark plugs may also be hot.

! If the engine is hot, do not removethe radiator cap or loosen the drainplugs to prevent burning yourself.

! Do not leave anything that mayburn easily, such as paper or rags,in the engine compartment.

! Do not smoke, cause sparks or al-low open flames around fuel or thebattery. Their fumes are flammable.

! Be extremely cautious when work-ing on the battery. It contains poi-sonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.

! Do not get under your vehicle withjust the body jack supporting it. Al-ways use automotive jack stands orother solid supports.

! Be sure that the ignition is off ifyou work near the electric coolingfan or radiator grille. With the igni-tion on, the electric cooling fan willautomatically start to run if the airconditioning is on.

! Use eye protection whenever youwork on or under your vehiclewhere you may be exposed to flyingor falling material, fluid spray, etc.

! Used engine oil contains potentiallyharmful contaminants which maycause skin disorders such as in-flammation or skin cancer, so careshould be taken to avoid prolongedand repeated contact with it. To re-move used engine oil from yourskin, wash thoroughly with soapand water.

! Do not leave used oil within thereach of children.

Do- it- yourself service precautions

311

! Dispose of used oil and filter onlyin a safe and acceptable manner.Do not dispose of used oil and fil-ter in household trash, in sewers oronto the ground. Call your dealer ora service station for informationconcerning recycling or disposal.

NOTICE

! Remember that battery and ignitioncables carry high currents or volt-ages. Be careful of accidentallycausing a short circuit.

! Add only “Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” or similar high quality eth-ylene glycol based non- silicate,non- amine, non- nitrite and non- bo-rate coolant with longlife hybridorganic acid technology to fill theradiator. “Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” is a mixture of 50% cool-ant and 50% deionized water.

! If you spill some of the coolant, besure to wash it off with water toprevent it from damaging the partsor paint.

! Do not allow dirt or anything elseto fall through the plug holes.

! Do not pry the outer electrode of aspark plug against the center elec-trode.

! Use only spark plugs of the speci-fied type. Using other types willcause engine damage, loss of per-formance or radio noise.

! Do not reuse iridium- tipped sparkplugs by cleaning or regapping.

! Do not overfill automatic transmis-sion fluid, transfer oil and powersteering fluid, or the transmission,transfer and power steering couldbe damaged.

! Do not drive with the air cleanerfilter removed, or excessive enginewear could result. Also backfiringcould cause a fire in the enginecompartment.

! Be careful not to scratch the glasssurface with the wiper frame.

! When closing the engine hood,check to see that you have not for-gotten any tools, rags, etc.

Parts and toolsHere is a list of parts and tools you willneed to perform do- it- yourself mainte-nance. Remember all Toyota parts are de-signed in metric sizes, so your tools mustbe metric.CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVELParts (if level is low):! “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equiva-

lent. See “Checking the engine oil lev-el” on page 314 for instructions.

Tools:! Rag or paper towel! Funnel (only for adding oil)

CHECKING THE ENGINE COOLANT LEV-ELParts (if level is low):! “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or

similar high quality ethylene glycolbased non- silicate, non- amine, non- ni-trite, and non- borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology.“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is amixture of 50% coolant and 50% deion-ized water.

312

Tools:! Funnel (only for adding coolant)

CHECKING BRAKE FLUIDParts (if level is low):! SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

brake fluidTools:! Rag or paper towel! Funnel (only for adding fluid)

CHECKING POWER STEERING FLUIDParts (if level is low):Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON" IIor IIITools:! Rag or paper towel! Funnel (only for adding fluid)

CHECKING BATTERY CONDITIONTools:! Warm water! Baking soda! Grease! Conventional wrench (for terminal

clamp bolts)

CHECKING AND REPLACING FUSESParts (if replacement is necessary):! Fuse with same amperage rating as

originalADDING WASHER FLUIDParts:! Water! Washer fluid containing antifreeze (for

winter use)Tools:! Funnel

REPLACING LIGHT BULBSParts:! Bulb with same number and wattage

rating as original (See charts in “Re-placing light bulbs” on page 333.)

Tools:! Screwdriver

313

DO- IT- YOURSELF MAINTENANCEEngine and ChassisChecking the engine oil level 314. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the engine coolant level 316. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the radiator and condenser 317. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking suspension fluid AHC 318. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking brake fluid 318. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking power steering fluid 319. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking tire inflation pressure 320. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and replacing tires 323. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating tires 325. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing snow tires and chains 325. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing wheels 327. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aluminum wheel precautions 328. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7- 2

314

Checking the engine oil level

Low level Full level

Add oil Too fullO.K.

With the engine at operating tempera-ture and turned off, check the oil levelon the dipstick.1. To get a correct reading, the vehicle

should be on level ground. After turningoff the engine, wait a few minutes forthe oil to drain back into the bottom ofthe engine.

2. Pull the dipstick out, hold a rag underthe end and wipe it clean.

3. Standing up on the left side of thevehicle, reinsert the dipstick in the di-rection so that the “ENGINE OIL” ontop should be read correctly and pushit in as far as it will go, or the readingwill not be correct.

4. Pull the dipstick out and look at the oillevel while holding a rag under theend.

CAUTION

Be careful not to touch the hot ex-haust manifold.

NOTICE

Be careful not to drop engine oil onthe vehicle components.

If the oil level is below or only slightlyabove the low level, add engine oil ofthe same type as already in the engine.Remove the oil filler cap and add engineoil in small quantities at a time, checkingthe dipstick. We recommend that you usea funnel when adding the oil.The approximate quantity of oil needed toraise the level between low and full on thedipstick is indicated as follows:

1.5 L (1.6 qt., 1.3 Imp.qt.)For the engine oil capacity, see “Servicespecifications” on page 341.When the level reaches within the correctrange, install the filler cap hand- tight.

NOTICE

! Be careful not to spill engine oil onthe vehicle components.

! Avoid overfilling, or the enginecould be damaged.

! Check the oil level on the dipstickonce again after adding the oil.

315

ENGINE OIL SELECTION“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used inyour Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalentto satisfy the following grade and viscos-ity.Oil grade:

API grade, SL “Energy- Conserving” orILSAC multigrade engine oil

Recommended viscosity:SAE 5W- 30

Outside temperature

SAE 5W- 30 is the best choice for goodfuel economy, and good starting in coldweather.If SAE 5W- 30 oil is not available, SAE10W- 30 oil may be used. However, itshould be replaced with SAE 5W- 30 atthe next oil change.

API service symbol

ILSAC certification mark

316

Oil identification marksEither or both API registered marks areadded to some oil containers to helpyou select the oil you should use.The API Service Symbol is located any-where on the outside of the container.The top portion of the label shows the oilquality by API (American Petroleum Insti-tute) designations such as SL. The centerportion of the label shows the SAE viscos-ity grade such as SAE 5W- 30. “Energy-Conserving” shown in the lower portion,indicates that the oil has fuel- saving ca-pabilities.The ILSAC (International Lubricant Stan-dardization and Approval Committee) Certi-fication Mark is displayed on the front ofthe container.

To ensure excellent lubrication perfor-mance for your engine, “Toyota GenuineMotor Oil” is available, which has beenspecifically tested and approved for allToyota engines.Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-ther details about “Toyota Genuine MotorOil”.

Look at the see- through coolant reser-voir when the engine is cold. The cool-ant level is satisfactory if it is betweenthe “FULL” and “LOW” lines on thereservoir. If the level is low, add thecoolant. (For the coolant type, see“Coolant type selection” described be-low.)The coolant level in the reservoir will varywith engine temperature. However, if thelevel is on or below the “LOW” line, addcoolant. Bring the level up to the “FULL”line.If the coolant level drops within a shorttime after replenishing, there may be aleak in the system. Visually check theradiator, hoses, radiator cap and draincock and water pump.If you can find no leak, have your Toyotadealer test the cap pressure and checkfor leaks in the cooling system.

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, do notremove the radiator cap when the en-gine is hot.

Checking the engine coolantlevel

317

Coolant type selectionUse of improper coolants may damageyour engine cooling system.Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”or similar high quality ethylene glycolbased non- silicate, non- amine, non- nitrite,and non- borate coolant with long- lifehybrid organic acid technology. (Coolantwith longlife hybrid organic acidtechnology is a combination of lowphosphates and organic acids.)“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mix-ture of 50% coolant and 50% deionizedwater. This coolant provides protectiondown to about –35°C (–31°F).

NOTICE

Do not use plain water alone.

Toyota recommends “Toyota Super LongLife Coolant”, which has been tested toensure that it will not cause corrosion norresult in malfunction of your engine cool-ant system with proper usage. “Toyota Su-per Long Life Coolant” is formulated withlong- life hybrid organic acid technologyand has been specifically designed toavoid engine cooling system malfunctionon Toyota vehicles.Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-ther details.

If any of the above parts are extremelydirty or you are not sure of their condi-tion, take your vehicle to a Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, be care-ful not to touch the radiator or con-denser when the engine is hot.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the radiatorand condenser, do not perform thework by yourself.

Checking the radiator andcondenser

318

Under the unloaded condition, checkthe suspension fluid AHC in the follow-ing way.1. Start the engine and put the vehicle

height in the “LO” (Low) mode andthen “N” (Normal) mode.

2. Turn off the ignition switch about 30seconds after the “N” (Normal) modeindicator light comes on.

3. Make sure the fluid level is between“MAX” and “MIN”.

If the fluid level is lower than “MIN”, havesuspension fluid AHC filled by your Toyotadealer.

NOTICE

Only use the Suspension fluid AHCfor the active height control suspen-sion. If you fill other fluids such asbrake fluid, automatic transmissionfluid, power steering fluid, engine oil,etc., the active height control suspen-sion could be damaged.

Checking brake fluid

To check the fluid level, simply look atthe see- through reservoir. The levelshould be between the “MAX” and“MIN” lines on the reservoir.It is normal for the brake fluid level to godown slightly as the brake pads wear orwhen the fluid level in the accumulator ishigh.If the reservoir needs frequent refueling,it may indicate a serious mechanical prob-lem.

Checking suspension fluidAHC

319

If the level is low, add SAE J1703 orFMVSS No. 116 DOT 3 brake fluid tothe brake reservoir.Refilling brake fluid:1. Turn the ignition switch off.2. Depress the brake pedal more than 40

times.3. Remove the reservoir cap by hand.

Add brake fluid up to the “MAX” line.If you do not follow the procedure above,the reservoir may overflow.Use only newly opened brake fluid. Onceopened, brake fluid absorbs moisture fromthe air, and excess moisture can cause adangerous loss of braking.

CAUTION

Take care when filling the brake fluidreservoir because brake fluid canharm your hands or eyes. If fluid getson your hands or in your eyes, flushthe affected area with clean water im-mediately. If you still feel uncomfort-able with your hands or eyes, go tothe doctor.

NOTICE

If you spill some of the fluid, be sureto wipe it off to prevent it from dam-aging the parts or paintwork.

Checking power steering fluid

OpenClose

If coldO.K.

If coldadd

If hotO.K.

If hotadd

Check the fluid level on the dipstick. Ifnecessary, add automatic transmissionfluid DEXRON!II or III.If the vehicle has been driven around 80km/h (50 mph) for 20 minutes (a littlemore in frigid temperatures), the fluid ishot (60"C–80"C or 140"F–175"F). Youmay also check the level when the fluidis cold (about room temperature,10"C–30"C or 50"F–85"F) if the enginehas not been run for about five hours.

320

Clean all dirt from outside of the reservoirtank and look at the fluid level. If the fluidis cold, the level should be in the “COLD”range. Similarly, if it is hot, the fluid levelshould be in the “HOT” range. If the levelis at the low side of either range, addautomatic transmission fluid DEXRON!IIor III to bring the level within the range.To remove the reservoir cap, turn it coun-terclockwise and lift up. To reinstall it,turn it clockwise. After replacing the fillercap, visually check the steering box case,vane pump and hose connections forleaks or damage.

CAUTION

The reservoir tank may be hot so becareful not to burn yourself.

NOTICE

Avoid overfilling, or the power steer-ing could be damaged.

72c502b

Checking tire inflation pres-sure

321

Keep your tire inflation pressuresat the proper level.The recommended cold tire inflationpressures, tire sizes and the com-bined weight of occupants and cargo(vehicle capacity weight) are de-scribed on page 344 and 340. Theyare also described on the tire andloading information label as shown.You should check the tire inflationpressures every two weeks, or atleast once a month. And do not forgetthe spare!The following instructions forchecking tire inflation pressureshould be observed:# The pressure should be

checked only when the tires arecold. If your vehicle has beenparked for at least 3 hours and hasnot been driven for more than 1.5km or 1 mile since, you will getan accurate cold tire inflation pres-sure reading.

# Always use a tire inflation pres-sure gauge. The appearance ofa tire can be misleading. Besides,tire inflation pressures that areeven just a few pounds off can de-grade ride and handling.

# Do not bleed or reduce tireinflation pressure after driving.It is normal for the tire inflationpressure to be higher after driving.

# Never exceed the vehicle capac-ity weight. The passenger andluggage weight should be locatedso that the vehicle is balanced.

Tire inflation pressure gauge

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENTPROCEDURE1. Remove the tire valve cap.2. Press the tip of the tire inflation

pressure gauge to the tire valve.3. Read the pressure using a gradua-

tion of the gauge.4. In case that the tire inflation pres-

sure is not within the prescribedrange, insert the compressed airfrom the valve. In case of applyingtoo much air, press the center ofthe valve and release the air to ad-just.

322

5. After completing the tire inflationpressure measurement and adjust-ment, apply soap water to thevalve and check the leakage.

6. Install the tire valve cap.If the gauge and the air pump are notavailable, have your vehicle checkedby your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Be sure to reinstall the tire valvecaps. Without the valve caps, dirtor moisture could get into thevalve core and cause air leakage.If the caps have been lost, havenew ones put on as soon as pos-sible.

Incorrect tire inflation pressure maywaste fuel, reduce the comfort of driv-ing, reduce tire life and make your ve-hicle less safe to drive.If a tire frequently needs refilling,have it checked by your Toyota deal-er.

CAUTION

Keep your tires properly inflated.Otherwise, the following condi-tions may occur and cause an ac-cident resulting in death or seri-ous injuries.Low tire pressure (underinfla-tion)—# Excessive wear# Uneven wear# Poor handling# Possibility of blowouts from an

overheated tire# Poor sealing of the tire bead# Wheel deformation and/or tire

separation# A greater possibility of tire

damage from road hazards

High tire pressure (overinfla-tion)—# Poor handling# Excessive wear# Uneven wear# A greater possibility of tire

damage from road hazards

323

Checking and replacing tires

Tread wear indicator

CHECKING YOUR TIRESCheck the tire’s tread for treadwear indicators. If the indicatorsshow, replace the tires. The loca-tion of the tread wear indicators isshown by the “TWI” or “∆” marks,etc., molded on the sidewall ofeach tire.

The tires on your Toyota have built- intread wear indicators to help youknow when the tires need replace-ment. When the tread depth wears to1.6 mm (0.06 in.) or less, the indica-tors will appear. If you can see theindicators in two or more adjacentgrooves, the tire should be replaced.The lower the tread, the higher therisk of skidding.The effectiveness of snow tires islost if the tread wears down below4 mm (0.16 in.).If you have tire damage such ascuts, splits, cracks deep enough toexpose the fabric, or bulges indi-cating internal damage, the tireshould be replaced.If a tire often goes flat or cannot beproperly repaired due to the size orlocation of a cut or other damage, itshould be replaced. If you are notsure, consult with your Toyota dealer.

If air loss occurs while driving, do notcontinue driving. Driving even a shortdistance can damage a tire beyondrepair.Any tires which are over 6 yearsold must be checked by a qualifiedtechnician even if damage is notobvious.Tires deteriorate with age even if theyhave never or seldom been used.This also applies to the spare tire andtires stored for future use.REPLACING YOUR TIRESWhen replacing a tire, use a tire ofthe same size and construction,and the same or greater maximumload as the originally installedtires. Also, all the tires must be thesame brand and have the sametread patterns.

324

Using any other size or type of tiremay seriously affect handling, ride,speedometer/odometer calibration,ground clearance, and clearance be-tween the body and tires or snowchains.Check that the maximum load of thereplaced tire is greater than 1/2 of theGross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR)of either the front axle or the rearaxle, whichever is greater. As for themaximum load of the tire, see the loadlimit at maximum cold tire inflationpressure mentioned on the sidewallof the tire, and as for the Gross AxleWeight Ratings (GAWR), see the Cer-tification Label. For details about thesidewall of the tire and the Certifica-tion Label, see pages 238 and 236.

CAUTION

Observe the following instruc-tions. Otherwise, an accidentmay occur resulting in death orserious injuries.# Do not mix radial, bias belted,

or bias- ply tires on your ve-hicle, as this may cause dan-gerous handling characteris-tics resulting in loss of control.

# Do not use tires other than themanufacturer’s recommendedsize, as this may cause danger-ous handling characteristicsresulting in loss of control.

# Do not use tires of differentbrands, sizes, construction ortread patterns, as this maycause dangerous handlingcharacteristics resulting inloss of control.

Toyota recommends all four tires,or at least both front or rear tiresbe replaced as a set.See “If you have a flat tire” on page275 for tire change procedure.When a tire is replaced, the wheelshould always be balanced.An unbalanced wheel may affect ve-hicle handling and tire life. Wheelscan get out of balance with regularuse and should therefore be balancedoccasionally.When replacing a tubeless tire, theair valve should also be replacedwith a new one.

325

Rotating tires

To equalize tire wear and help ex-tend tire life, Toyota recommendsthat you rotate your tires accord-ing to the maintenance schedule.(For scheduled maintenance infor-mation, please refer to the “Sched-uled Maintenance Guide” or “Own-er’s Manual Supplement”.)However, the most appropriate tim-ing for tire rotation may vary ac-cording to your driving habits androad surface conditions.

See “If you have a flat tire” on page275 for tire change procedure.When rotating tires, check for unevenwear and damage. Abnormal wear isusually caused by incorrect tire infla-tion pressure, improper wheel align-ment, outof- balance wheels, or se-vere braking.

WHEN TO USE SNOW TIRES ORCHAINSSnow tires or chains are recommendedwhen driving on snow or ice.On wet or dry roads, conventional tiresprovide better traction than snow tires.SNOW TIRE SELECTIONIf you need snow tires, select tires ofthe same size, construction and loadcapacity as the originally installed tires.Also, all the tires must be the samebrand and have the same tread pat-terns.Do not use tires other than those men-tioned above. Do not install studded tireswithout first checking local regulations forpossible restrictions.

Installing snow tires andchains

326

CAUTION

Observe the following instructions.Otherwise, an accident may occur re-sulting in death or serious injuries.# Do not use snow tires other than

the manufacturer’s recommendedsize, as this may cause dangeroushandling characteristics resulting inloss of control.

# Do not use snow tires of differentbrands, sizes, construction or treadpatterns, as this may cause danger-ous handling characteristics result-ing in loss of control.

SNOW TIRE INSTALLATIONSnow tires should be installed on allwheels.Installing snow tires on the rear wheelsonly can lead to an excessive differencein road grip capability between the frontand rear tires which could cause loss ofvehicle control.When storing removed tires, you shouldstore them in a cool dry space.Mark the direction of rotation and be sureto install them in the same direction whenreplacing.

CAUTION

# Do not drive with the snow tiresincorrectly inflated.

# Never drive over 105 km/h (65 mph)with any type of snow tires.

Cross chain

Side chain

TIRE CHAIN SELECTIONUse the tire chains of correct size.Use the following type chains.For P275/60R18 111H tire

mm (in.)A Diameter of side chain: 3.5 (0.14)B Diameter of cross chain: 4.0 (0.16)

Regulations regarding the use of tirechains vary according to location ortype of road, so always check local reg-ulations before installing chains.

327

NOTICE

If the wrong combination of tire andchain is used, the chains could dam-age the vehicle body.

CHAIN INSTALLATIONInstall the chains on the rear tires astightly as possible. Do not use tirechains on the front tires. Retightenchains after driving 0.5 – 1.0 km (1/4 –1/2 mile).When installing chains on your tires, care-fully follow the instructions of the chainmanufacturer.If wheel covers are used, they will bescratched by the chain band, so removethe covers before putting on the chains.

CAUTION

# Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) orthe chain manufacturer’s recom-mended speed limit, whichever islower.

# Drive carefully avoiding bumps,holes, and sharp turns, which maycause the vehicle to bounce.

# Avoid sharp turns or locked- wheelbraking, as use of chains may ad-versely affect vehicle handling.

# When driving with chains installed,be sure to drive carefully. Slowdown before entering curves toavoid losing control of the vehicle.Otherwise an accident may occur.

Replacing wheelsWHEN TO REPLACE YOUR WHEELSIf you have wheel damage such asbending, cracks or heavy corrosion, thewheel should be replaced.If you fail to replace a damaged wheel,the tire may slip off the wheel or causeloss of handling control.WHEEL SELECTIONWhen replacing wheels, care should betaken to ensure that the wheels are re-placed by ones with the same load ca-pacity, diameter, rim width, and offset.Correct replacement wheels are availableat your Toyota dealer.A wheel of a different size or type mayadversely affect handling, wheel and bear-ing life, brake cooling, speedometer/odom-eter calibration, stopping ability, headlightaim, bumper height, vehicle ground clear-ance, and tire or snow chain clearance tothe body and chassis.

328

Replacement with used wheels is not rec-ommended as they may have been sub-jected to rough treatment or high mileageand could fail without warning. Also, bentwheels which have been straightened mayhave structural damage and thereforeshould not be used. Never use an innertube in a leaking wheel which is designedfor a tubeless tire.

CAUTION

Observe the following instructions.Otherwise, an accident may occur re-sulting in death or serious injuries.# Do not use wheels other than the

manufacturer’s recommended size,as this may cause dangerous han-dling characteristics resulting inloss of control.

# Do not use wheels of differentbrands, sizes and types, as thismay cause dangerous handlingcharacteristics resulting in loss ofcontrol.

Aluminum wheel precautions# When installing aluminum wheels,

check that the wheel nuts are tightafter driving your vehicle the first 1600km (1000 miles).

# If you have rotated, repaired, orchanged your tires, check that thewheel nuts are still tight after driving1600 km (1000 miles).

# When using tire chains, be careful notto damage the aluminum wheels.

# Use only Toyota wheel nuts andwrench designed for your aluminumwheels.

# When balancing your wheels, use onlyToyota balance weights or equivalentand a plastic or rubber hammer.

# As with any wheel, periodically checkyour aluminum wheels for damage. Ifdamaged, replace immediately.

329

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCEElectrical componentsChecking battery condition 330. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery recharging precautions 331. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and replacing fuses 332. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding washer fluid 333. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing light bulbs 333. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7- 3

330

CAUTION

BATTERY PRECAUTIONSThe battery produces flammable andexplosive hydrogen gas.! Do not cause a spark from the bat-

tery with tools.! Do not smoke or light a match near

the battery.The electrolyte contains poisonousand corrosive sulfuric acid.! Avoid contact with eyes, skin or

clothes.! Never ingest electrolyte.! Wear protective safety glasses when

working near the battery.! Keep children away from the bat-

tery.EMERGENCY MEASURES! If electrolyte gets in your eyes,

flush your eyes with clean waterimmediately and get immediatemedical attention. If possible, con-tinue to apply water with a spongeor cloth while en route to the medi-cal office.

! If electrolyte gets on your skin,thoroughly wash the contact area. Ifyou feel pain or burning, get medi-cal attention immediately.

! If electrolyte gets on your clothes,there is a possibility of its soakingthrough to your skin, so immediate-ly take off the exposed clothing andfollow the procedure above, if nec-essary.

! If you accidentally swallow electro-lyte, drink a large quantity of wateror milk. Follow with milk of magne-sia, beaten raw egg or vegetableoil. Then go immediately for emer-gency help.

—Checking battery exterior

Terminals Ground cable

Hold- down clamp

Check the battery for corroded or looseterminal connections, cracks, or loosehold- down clamp.a. If the battery is corroded, wash it off

with a solution of warm water and bak-ing soda. Coat the outside of the termi-nals with grease to prevent further cor-rosion.

b. If the terminal connections are loose,tighten their clamp nuts—but do notovertighten.

c. Tighten the holddown clamp onlyenough to keep the battery firmly inplace. Overtightening may damage thebattery case.

Checking battery condition— —Precautions

331

NOTICE

! Be sure the engine and all accesso-ries are off before performing main-tenance.

! When checking the battery, removethe ground cable from the negativeterminal (“–” mark) first and rein-stall it last.

! Be careful not to cause a short cir-cuit with tools.

! Take care no solution gets into thebattery when washing it.

If the battery terminal is disconnectedor the battery is run down, the moonroof may not operate automatically andthe jam protection function will not operatecorrectly after you reconnect, replace orrecharge the battery with the moon roofslide- opened or tilted up. In any of thesecases, you should return the moon roof tonormal. To return the moon roof to normal,see “Electric moon roof” on page 31.

—Checking battery condition

Type A

Type B

Green Dark Clear or light yellow

Blue White Red

CHECKING BY INDICATORCheck the battery condition by the indi-cator color.

Indicator colorCondition

Type A Type BCondition

Green Blue Good

Dark White

Charging necessary.Have battery checked by your Toyota dealer.

Clear orlight yellow

RedHave battery checked by your Toyota dealer.

Battery recharging precautionsDuring recharging, the battery is pro-ducing hydrogen gas.Therefore, before recharging:1. If recharging with the battery installed

on the vehicle, be sure to disconnectthe ground cable.

2. Be sure the power switch on the re-charger is off when connecting thecharger cables to the battery and whendisconnecting them.

CAUTION

! Always charge the battery in an un-confined area. Do not charge thebattery in a garage or closed roomwhere there is not sufficient ventila-tion.

! Only do a slow charge (5 A orless). Charging at a quicker rate isdangerous. The battery may ex-plode, causing personal injuries.

NOTICE

Never recharge the battery while theengine is running. Also, be sure allaccessories are turned off.

332

Type A

Type B

Type C

Good Blown

Good Blown

Good Blown

If the headlights or other electricalcomponents do not work, check thefuses. If any of the fuses are blown,they must be replaced.See “Fuse locations” on page 309 forlocations of the fuses.Turn the ignition switch and inoperativecomponent off. Pull the suspected fusestraight out and check it.Determine which fuse may be causing theproblem. The lid of the fuse box showsthe name of the circuit for each fuse. Seepage on 345 for the functions controlledby each circuit.

Type A fuses can be pulled out by thepull- out tool. The location of the pull- outtool is shown in the illustration.If you are not sure whether the fuse hasblown, try replacing the suspected fusewith one that you know is good.If the fuse has blown, push a new fuseinto the clip.Only install a fuse with the amperage rat-ing designated on the fuse box lid.If you do not have a spare fuse, in anemergency you can pull out the “RADIO”,“DOME” or “RR A.C” fuse, which may bedispensable for normal driving, and use itif its amperage rating is the same.If you cannot use one of the same amper-age, use one that is lower, but as closeto the rating as possible. If the amperageis lower than that specified, the fusemight blow out again but this does notindicate anything wrong. Be sure to getthe correct fuse as soon as possible andreturn the substitute to its original clip.It is a good idea to purchase a set ofspare fuses and keep them in your ve-hicle for emergencies.

Checking and replacing fuses

333

If the new fuse immediately blows out,there is a problem with the electrical sys-tem. Have your Toyota dealer correct it assoon as possible.

CAUTION

Never use a fuse with a higher am-perage rating, or any other object, inplace of a fuse. This may cause ex-tensive damage and possibly a fire.

Adding washer fluidIf any washer does not work, the wash-er tank may be empty. Add washerfluid.You may use plain water as washer fluid.However, in cold areas where tempera-tures range below freezing point, usewasher fluid containing antifreeze. Thisproduct is available at your Toyota dealerand most auto parts stores. Follow themanufacturer’s directions for how much tomix with water.

NOTICE

! Do not use engine antifreeze or anyother substitute because it maydamage your vehicle’s paint.

! Do not fill washer fluid over the“NORMAL” level.

Replacing light bulbs—The following illustrations show how togain access to the bulbs. When replacinga bulb, make sure the ignition switch andlight switch are off. Use bulbs with thewattage ratings given in the table.The tail lights and stop lights consist ofa number of LEDs. If any LED burns out,we recommend you take your vehicle toyour Toyota dealer to have the light in-spected as soon as possible.

CAUTION

! To prevent burning yourself, do notreplace the light bulbs while theyare hot.

! Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and require special handling.They can burst or shatter ifscratched or dropped. Hold a bulbonly by its plastic or metal case.Do not touch the glass part of abulb with bare hands.

NOTICE

Only use a bulb of the listed type.

334

The inside of the lens of exterior lightssuch as headlights may temporarily fog upwhen the lens becomes wet in the rain orin a car wash. This is not a problembecause the fogging is caused by thetemperature difference between the outsideand inside of the lens, just like the wind-shield fogs up in the rain. However, ifthere is a large drop of water on theinside of the lens, or if there is waterpooled inside the light, contact yourToyota dealer.

Light bulbs BulbNo. W Type

Headlights(high) 9005 60 A

Headlights(low) 9006 51 B

Front turn signal,front side markerand parking lights

1157NA 27/8 C

Front fog lights 9006 51 B

Tail lights — 0.5 G

Stop/ tail lights — 4.3/0.3 G

Light bulbs BulbNo. W Type

Rear turn signal lights 7440 21 D

Back- up lights 921 18 D

Hight mounted stoplight — 2.2 G

License plate lights — 5 DInterior lights — 8 E

Personal lightsType AType B

——

58

FE

Glove box light — 1.4 DDoor courtesy lights — 3 D

Vanity lights — 1.5 E

A : HB3 halogen bulbsB : HB4 halogen bulbsC : Single end bulbs (amber)D : Wedge base bulbsE : Double end bulbsF : Single end bulbsG : LEDs (Light- emitting Diodes)

—Headlights

73c005a

1. Open the hood.Left- hand headlight: Remove thewasher inlet.

Be careful not to spill the washer fluidover the “NORMAL” level.Do not place the washer inlet on the en-gine or battery.

335

2. Left- hand headlight and right- handhead light (high beam):Turn the bulb base counterclockwiseto the front of the vehicle.Right- hand headlight (low beam):Turn the bulb base clockwise to thefront of the vehicle.

3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb base.If the connector is tight, wiggle it.

4. Left- hand headlight and right- handheadlight (high beam):Install the bulb base by turning itclockwise to the front of the vehicle.Right- hand headlight (low beam):Install the bulb base by turning itcounterclockwise to the front of thevehicle.Left- hand haedlight: Remove thewasher inlet.

Aiming is not necessary after replacingthe bulb. When aiming adjustment is nec-essary, contact your Toyota dealer.

336

—Front fog lights

1. Turn the bulb base counterclockwiseto the front of the vehicle as shown.

2. Pull the bulb out of the bulb base.If the connector is tight, wiggle it.

3. Install a new bulb base by turning itclockwise to the front of the vehicle.

Aiming is not necessary after replacingthe bulb. When aiming adjustment is nec-essary, contact your Toyota dealer.

337

If either the left or right front turn sig-nal and front side marker light burnsout, contact your Toyota dealer.

NOTICE

Do not try to replace the front turnsignal and front side marker lightbulbs by your self. You may damagethe vehicle.

Use a flathead screwdriver.

a

b

a: Rear turn signal light b: Back–up light

—Front turn signal and frontside marker lights

—Rear turn signal and back–up lights

338

—License plate lights

339

SPECIFICATIONS Dimensions and weightss 340. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine 340. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel 340. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service specifications 341. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tires 344. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuses 345. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 8

340

Dimensions and weights Overall length mm (in.) 4890 (192.5)Overall width mm (in.) 1940 (76.4)Overall height∗1 mm (in.) 1875 (73.8)

1845 (72.6)∗2

Wheelbase mm (in.) 2850 (112.2)Front tread mm (in.) 1620 (63.8)Rear tread mm (in.) 1615 (63.6)Vehicle capacity weight(occupants + luggage)

kg (lb.) 545 (1200)Towing capacity(trailer weight + cargo weight)

kg (lb.) 2948 (6500)∗1: Unladen vehicle∗2: With active height control suspension

EngineModel:

4.7L V8 (2UZ- FE)Type:

8 cylinder V type, 4 cycle, gasolineBore and stroke, mm (in.):

94.0 ! 84.0 (3.70 ! 3.30)Displacement, cm3 (cu. in.):

4664 (284.6)

FuelFuel type:

Unleaded gasoline, Octane Rating 87(Research Octane Number 91) or higher.For improved vehicle performance, theuse of premium unleaded gasoline withan Octane Rating of 91 (Research Oc-tane Number 96) or higher is recom-mended.

Fuel tank capacity, L (gal., Imp.gal.):96 (25.4, 21.1)

341

Service specificationsENGINEValve clearance (engine cold), mm (in.):

Intake 0.15 – 0.25 (0.006 – 0.010)Exhaust 0.25 – 0.35 (0.010 – 0.014)

Spark plug type:DENSO SK20R11NGK IFR6A11

Spark plug gap, mm (in.):1.1 (0.043)

ENGINE LUBRICATIONOil capacity (drain and refill), L (qt.,Imp.qt.)

With filter 6.8 (7.2, 6.0) Without filter 6.4 (6.8, 5.6)

Oil grade:“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used inyour Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota ap-proved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” orequivalent to satisfy the following gradeand viscosity.Oil grade:API grade, SL “Energy- Conserving” orILSAC multigrade engine oil

Recommended viscosity:SAE 5W- 30

Outside temperature

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-ther details.

COOLING SYSTEMTotal capacity, L (qt., Imp.qt.)

Without rear heater 14.7 (15.5, 12.9)With rear heater 15.4 (16.3, 13.6)

Coolant type:“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is usedin your Toyota vehicle at factory fill. Inorder to avoid technical problems, only use“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similarhigh quality ethylene glycol based non- sili-cate, non- amine, non- nitrite, and non- bo-rate coolant with longlife hybrid organicacid technology. (Coolant with longlife hy-brid organic acid technology is a combina-tion of low phosphates and organic acids.)Do not use plain water alone.Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-ther details.

BATTERYOpen voltage∗ at 20!C (68!F):

12.6 – 12.8 V Fully charged 12.2 – 12.4 V Half charged 11.8 – 12.0 V Discharged

∗: Voltage that is checked 20 minutes af-ter the key is removed with all the lightsturned offCharging rates:

5 A max.

342

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONFluid capacity (drain and refill), L (qt.,Imp.qt.)

Up to 3.0 (3.2, 2.6)Fluid type:

“Toyota Genuine ATF WS”Change automatic transmission fluidonly as necessary.Generally, it is necessary to change au-tomatic transmission fluid only if yourvehicle is driven under one of the Spe-cial Operating Conditions listed in your“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or“Owner’s Manual Supplement”. Whenchanging the automatic transmissionfluid, use only “Toyota Genuine ATFWS” (ATF JWS3324 or NWS9638) to aidin assuring maximum transmission per-formance.Notice: Using automatic transmissionfluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATFWS” may cause deterioration in shiftquality, locking up of your transmis-sion accompanied by vibration, andultimately damage the automatictransmission of your vehicle.

TRANSFEROil capacity, L (qt., Imp.qt.)

1.3 (1.4, 1.1)Oil type:

Gear oil API GL- 4 or GL- 5Recommended oil viscosity:

SAE 75W- 90DIFFERENTIALOil capacity, L (qt., Imp.qt.):

Front 1.6 (1.7, 1.4)Rear 3.3 (3.5, 2.9)

Oil type:Hypoid gear oil API GL- 5

Recommended oil viscosity:Above –18!C (0!F)

SAE 90Below –18!C (0!F)

SAE 80W or 80W- 90

CHASSIS LUBRICATIONWheel bearings:

Lithium base wheel bearing grease,NLGI No.2

Front drive shaft thrust bushings:Synthetic oil and lithium soap basechassis grease, NLGI No.1

Propeller shafts:Spiders

Lithium base chassis grease, NLGINo.2

Slide yokeLithium base chassis grease, NLGINo.2 or Molybdenum—disulfide lithiumbase chassis grease, NLGI No.2

343

BRAKESMinimum pedal clearance when depressedwith the force of 490 N (50 kgf, 110 lbf)with the engine running, mm (in.):

116 (4.6)Pedal free play, mm (in.):

1 – 6 (0.04 – 0.24)Pad wear limit, mm (in.):

1.0 (0.04)Lining wear limit, mm (in.):

1.0 (0.04)Parking brake adjustment when pulled withthe force of 196 N (20 kgf, 44 lbf):

4 – 6 clicksFluid type:

SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3STEERINGWheel free play:

Less than 40 mm (1.6 in.)Power steering fluid type:

Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON"IIor III

344

TiresTire size and inflation pressure:

kPa (psi)

Tire sizeFront Rear

Wheel sizeTire sizeNormal driving Trailer towing Normal driving Trailer towing

Wheel size

P275/60R18 111H 200 (29) 220 (32) 220 (32) 240 (35) 18 ! 8JJ

Wheel nut torque, N·m (kgf·m, ft·lbf): 131 (13.4, 96.6)NOTE: For a complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing wheels), see “Checking tire inflation pressure”

on page 320 through “Aluminum wheel precautions” on page 328.

345

Fuses

Engine compartment

Fuses1. ABS NO.2 40 A: Anti- lock brake sys-

tem2. ABS NO.1 50 A: Anti- lock brake system3. AHC 50 A: No circuit4. WIP- S 7.5 A: No circuit5. TOWING 30 A: Trailer lights6. MIR HTR 15 A: Outside rear view mirror

defogger7. RR HTR 10 A: Rear air conditioning sys-

tem

Left side kick panel

8. HAZ- TRN 15 A: Emergency flashers,Turn signal lights

9. ALT- S 7.5 A: Charging system10. NV- IR 20 A: No circuit11. FR FOG 15 A: Fog lights12. TOWING BRK 30A: Trailer lights13. HEAD CLNER 20 A: Headlight cleaner14. FR- IG 10 A: Charging system15. PANEL 7.5 A: Instrument panel light16. TOWING TAIL 30 A: Trailer lights17. TAIL 15 A: Parking lights, Tail lights

Right side kick panel

18. BAT 30 A: All components in “ECU- B2”19. TEL 7.5 A: No circuit20. AMP 30 A: Audio system21. EFI or ECD No.1 25 A: Multiport fuel

injection system/Sequential multiport fuelinjection system

22. AM2 15 A: All components in “IGN”23. ETCS 10 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-

tem/Sequential multiport fuel injection sys-tem

24. HORN 10 A: Horns25. HEAD (RH- LWR) 10 A: Right- hand

headlight (low beam)

346

81C506

Engine compartment

26. HEAD (LH- LWR) 10 A: Left- hand head-light (low beam)

27. HEAD (RH- UPR) 20 A: Right- handheadlight (high beam)

28. HEAD (LH- UPR) 20 A: Left- hand head-light (high beam)

29. PWR OUTLET 15 A: Power outlets30. CIG 15 A: Cigarette lighter31. ACC 7.5 A: Instrument panel light32. AM1 7.5 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-

tem/Sequential multiport fuel injectionsystem

33. DEFOG 20 A: Rear window defogger

34. AHC- B 15 A: Active height control sus-pension (AHC)

35. FUEL HTR 20 A: Fuel heater36. POWER HTR 7.5 A: Power heater37. AHC- IG 20 A: Active height control sus-

pension (AHC)38. EFI or ECD No.2 10 A: Emission con-

trol system39. GAUGE1 10 A: Gauges and meters40. ECU- IG1 10 A: Multiport fuel injection

system/Sequential multiport fuel injec-tion system

41. ECU- B1 10 A: Navigation system42. DBL LOCK 15 A: Double lock system43. A/C 15 A: Air conditioning system44. STOP 15 A: Stop lights45. OBD- 2 7.5 A: On- board diagnosis sys-

tem46. IDEL UP 7.5 A: Idle- up system47. LH SEAT 30 A: Power seat system48. DOOR 25 A: Power door lock system,

Power windows49. SUN ROOF 25 A: Electronic moon roof50. RR WIPER 15 A: Rear wiper system51. ECU- B2 10 A: Power door lock system,

Power window

52. DIFF 20 A: Four- wheel drive system53. WASHER 15 A: Windshield washer54. RADIO 10 A: Audio system55. DOME 10 A: Interior lights56. VGRS 40 A: Variable gear ratio steer-

ing system57. P/W (FL) 20 A: Power window58. P/W (RL) 20 A: Power window59. WIPER 25 A: Windshield wiper60. ECU- IG2 10 A: Rear air conditioning

system61. SEAT HTR 15 A: Seat heater62. GAUGE2 10 A: Back- up lights63. MET 7.5 A: Gauges and meters64. IGN 7.5 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-

tem/Sequential multiport fuel injectionsystem

65. SECURITY 7.5 A: Theft deterrent sys-tem

66. P/W (RR) 20 A: Power window67. P/W (FR) 20 A: Power window68. BATT CHARGE 30 A: Trailer charging

system69. TIL&TEL 20 A: Tilt and telescopic

steering

347

70. RR A/C 30 A: Rear air conditioningsystem

71. RH SEAT 30 A: Power seat system72. AIR PUMP 50A: Multiport fuel injection

system/Sequential multiport fuel injec-tion system

73. A/F HTR 15A: Multiport fuel injectionsystem/Sequential multiport fuel injec-tion system

348

349

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS FOR U.S.OWNERS AND UNIFORM TIRE QUALITYGRADING Reporting safety defects for U.S. ownerss 350. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 9

350

If you believe that your vehicle hasa defect which could cause a crashor could cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform the Na-tional Highway Traffic Safety Ad-ministration (NHTSA) in addition tonotifying Toyota Motor Sales,U.S.A., Inc. (Toll- free:1- 800- 331- 4331).If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investiga-tion, and if it finds that a safety de-fect exists in a group of vehicles, itmay order a recall and remedycampaign. However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individual prob-lems between you, your dealer, orToyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may eithercall the Auto Safety Hotline toll- freeat 1- 800- 424- 9393 (or 366- 0123in Washington, D.C. area) or writeto: NHTSA, U.S. Department ofTransportation, Washington, D.C.20590. You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from the Hotline.

Reporting safety defects forU.S. owners

Documents

Foreword - Amazon S3 · a system to record data in a crash or a near car crash event. This is called an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR